manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon imagerunner advance C5535i, Руководство пользователя, Страница: 654 / 1556

Поделиться
Скачать
Canon imagerunner advance C5535i Скачать руководство пользователя страница 654

Adding a Digital Signature to Sent Files

13WK-0CS

By adding a digital signature to a scanned document that is sent in a particular file format, you can certify that the

document has not been altered and is guaranteed by the creator. The machine can add a device signature or user

signature to documents.

Device Signature

  The device signature uses a key and certificate mechanism, enabling the recipient

of a scanned document to verify that it was created on this machine. The
recipient can check what machine was used to create the document, as well as
whether the document has been altered. A system option is required in order to
use this function (  System Options(P. 1121) ). Before you can add a device
signature, the key and certificate (device certificate) used for the device signature
needs to be created on the machine.  Generating a Device Signature
Certificate(P. 643)

User Signature

  The user signature is linked with personal authentication management functions,

enabling the recipient of a scanned document to verify who created it. As with
the device signature, the user signature enables the recipient to check whether
the document was altered after the signature was added. A system option is
required in order to use this function (  System Options(P. 1121) ). Before you
can add a user signature, a key and certificate (user certificate) needs to be
registered for each user via the Remote UI.  Registering a User Signature
Certificate(P. 644)

TIPS

Displaying a digital signature (visible signature)

Digital signature information can be displayed on the first page of the document, making it easy for the reader

to see that a digital signature has been added. Only PDF documents support visible signatures.  Adding a

Digital Signature(P. 457)

Managing the Machine

642

Содержание imagerunner advance C5535i

Страница 1: ...imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560i C5550i C5540i C5535i User s Guide USRMA 0946 01 2016 05 en Copyright CANON INC 2016 ...

Страница 2: ...ecifying Detailed Settings 29 Checking the SSID and Network Key 31 Setting an IP Address 32 Setting an IPv4 Address 33 Setting an IPv6 Address 35 Adapting to the Network Environment 38 Making Ethernet Settings 39 Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network 41 Making DNS Settings 42 Making SMB Settings 46 Making WINS Settings 47 Making WebDAV Settings 48 Registering the LDAP Server 49 Monito...

Страница 3: ... the Multi Purpose Tray 147 Registering Free Size Paper Custom Size Paper 149 Automatically Selecting the Paper Source Depending on Function 151 Customizing the Touch Panel Display 152 Customizing the Main Menu 154 Creating a Shortcut for a Frequently Used Function 157 Registering a Combination of Frequently Used Functions 159 Customizing the Basic Features Screen 162 Using the Quick Menu 165 Regi...

Страница 4: ...ng Material 245 Finishing by Collating Grouping 246 Finishing with the Stapler 248 Other Finishing Functions 250 Attaching Numbers and Symbols to Copies 251 Making Booklets 254 Making Booklets Booklet Copying 255 Setting Binding Margins 260 Adding a Cover and Back Cover 262 Useful Copy Functions 264 Copying Free Size Originals 266 Mirroring Images Mirror Image 267 Shifting the Image 268 Copying wi...

Страница 5: ...ding Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals 344 Sending Separately Scanned Documents Together Job Build 346 Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending Previous Settings 347 Useful Functions When Sending 348 Sending at a Specified Time 349 Saving a Copy of a Sent Document 351 Various Receiving Methods 353 Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception 354 Keeping ...

Страница 6: ...te Pages 435 Scanning to Make a Booklet Booklet Scan 437 Sending Saving Separately Scanned Documents Together Job Build 439 Useful Scanning Functions 440 Skipping Blank Pages When Scanning 442 Checking Scanned Originals Before Sending Saving Preview 444 Stamping Scanned Originals for Sending Saving 445 Sending Saving at a Specified Time 446 Notifying You by E Mail of the Completion of Sending Savi...

Страница 7: ...1 Connecting with Mobile Devices 522 Connecting Directly Access Point Mode 523 Utilizing the Machine through Applications 525 Using AirPrint 526 Printing with AirPrint 530 Scanning with AirPrint 532 Faxing with AirPrint 534 If AirPrint Cannot Be Used 536 Using Google Cloud Print 537 Managing the Machine by the Remote Control 540 Managing the Machine 543 Applying a Security Policy to the Machine 54...

Страница 8: ... 623 Restricting Printing from a Computer 625 Restricting the Use of Memory Media 628 Increasing the Security of Documents 629 Printing User Information on Documents 631 Embedding Invisible Text Forced Secure Watermark 633 Embedding Information That Restricts Copying Forced Document Scan Lock 636 Using TL Code to Restrict Copying 638 Using QR Code to Restrict Copying 640 Adding a Digital Signature...

Страница 9: ...18 Distributing the Device Information 720 Checking the Results of Device Information Distribution 723 Managing Hard Disk Data 724 Removing Unnecessary Data from the Hard Disk 725 Initializing All Data Settings 727 IEEE 2600 729 Settings Registration 731 Preferences 732 Paper Settings 733 Display Settings 735 Timer Energy Settings 738 Network 741 External Interface 751 Accessibility 752 Adjustment...

Страница 10: ... Emptying the Punch Waste in the Staple Finisher 864 Emptying the Punch Waste in the Booklet Finisher 866 Emptying the Punch Waste in the Inner Finisher 868 Adjusting Print and Finish Quality 869 Adjusting Gradation 871 Adjusting Color Tone 874 Adjusting Density 876 Correcting Uneven Density 877 Correcting Color Mismatch 879 Making Colors More Vivid 880 Adjusting Image Size 881 Setting the Dither ...

Страница 11: ...ms in the Booklet Finisher 999 Paper Jams in the Inner Finisher 1004 Clearing Staple Jams Optional 1007 Staple Jams in the Staple Finisher 1008 Staple Jams in the Booklet Finisher 1010 Staple Jams in the Inner Finisher 1014 Appendix 1018 Third Party Software 1020 Feature Highlights 1021 Efficient Eco friendly Operations 1022 Enhanced Security 1024 Custom User Settings 1026 So Much More 1027 Specif...

Страница 12: ... Unit F1 1101 Inner Finisher H1 Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B1 Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B1 1104 Staple Finisher Y1 Booklet Finisher Y1 Buffer Pass Unit L1 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A1 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 1106 Inner 2way Tray J1 1110 Copy Tray J2 1111 Platen Cover Type W 1112 Copy Card Reader F1 1113 ADF Access Handle A1 1115 Removable HDD Kit 1116 System Options 1121 List of Items...

Страница 13: ...eless Router 28 Setting Up a Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings 29 Checking the SSID and Network Key 31 Setting an IP Address 32 Setting an IPv4 Address 33 Setting an IPv6 Address 35 Adapting to the Network Environment 38 Making Ethernet Settings 39 Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network 41 Making DNS Settings 42 Making SMB Settings 46 Making WINS Settings 47 Making WebDAV Sett...

Страница 14: ...appointed as an administrator and general users operate the machine under the management of an administrator Administrators decide the rules for using the machine and operate important setups such as networks and security Administrators set the access for each user when necessary TIPS Carrying out the initial setup of the machine Setup Guide You can easily set up to start using the machine such as...

Страница 15: ... 2 Setting up the Network Environment P 19 Set up the network environment not included on the Setup Guide If you do not start the Setup Guide start setting up from this procedure Step 3 Installing Drivers P 59 Step 4 Setting E mail I Fax Communication P 62 Step 5 Setting the Advanced Box of the Machine P 65 TIPS Setting from the Remote UI When you complete setup for the network environment you can...

Страница 16: ... other Canon multifunction printer and save export its registered setup data to a computer beforehand setup contents such as address book and paper type setting can be immediately used by importing them to the machine Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 682 Setting Up 4 ...

Страница 17: ...global IP address is used for Internet connections A private IP address is used for local area networks such as an office LAN If your IP address is a global IP address unauthorized users on the Internet can attempt to access your local network and risks such as information leakage become larger If your address is a private address only users on a local area network such as the office LAN have acce...

Страница 18: ...eceives unauthorized access from a malicious third party risk of information leakage can be greatly reduced when various information resources in the machine are protected by passwords Password for each function PIN code setting Personal authentication management using User Authentication Configuring the Personal Authentication Management Settings P 558 PIN code setting for system management conte...

Страница 19: ...keyboard that is displayed to enter characters Select the language and press OK To change the keyboard layout press Set select the keyboard layout and press OK Displaying the button for switching languages will be convenient for frequent language switching Switching the Displayed Language P 175 Step 2 Check the paper settings Check that the paper loaded in the drawers is correctly specified If the...

Страница 20: ...ation This machine is set to use the user authentication as the login service For more information see Configuring the Personal Authentication Management Settings P 558 Press On for Use User Authentication press On for the login method to use and press Next If you do not use user authentication press Off for Use User Authentication press OK and proceed to Step 5 If you select an item other than Pi...

Страница 21: ...Picture Login Screen see Change Default Display for Picture Login Screen P 808 Select the number of preset buttons on the Picture Login screen and press OK Step 5 Set the date and time Set the current time for the functions that use the time as a reference Enter the date and time and press OK Set Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time as necessary For more information see Setting the Date Time P 17 St...

Страница 22: ...t the IP address manually clear the selection for DHCP or Auto IP press IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address to enter each value and press Next or OK For information on the IPV4 address settings see Setting an IPv4 Address P 33 If you press On for Use IPv6 specify the following settings Press On to use the stateless address or Off to not use the stateless address and press Next For informati...

Страница 23: ...he manual address specify the following settings Press On to use DHCPv6 or Off to not use DHCPv6 and press OK Step 7 Specify the DNS settings Specify the DNS server address DNS host name and DNS domain name Press Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server enter IPV4 IPv6 address for the DNS server and press Next For information on the settings of the DNS server address see Making DNS Settings P 4...

Страница 24: ...ically Step 8 Specify the Proxy settings Specify the necessary settings to use the Proxy To use the Proxy press On press Server Address and Port Number to enter each value and press OK If you set Use Proxy within Same Domain to On press Set Authentication to specify the Proxy authentication settings For information on the Proxy settings see Setting a Proxy P 602 Step 9 Specify the fax settings Spe...

Страница 25: ... 10 Perform the automatic gradation adjustment Adjust the gradation to print clearly Depending on the machine the procedure differs For information on the automatic gradation adjustment see Adjusting Gradation P 871 Step 11 Print a report You can print the network user list fax user data list and adjusted value list Press Start Printing for the report you want to print Setting Up 13 ...

Страница 26: ... End Setup Guide in Step 1 Starting the Setup Guide later The Setup Guide cannot be started in the following cases If the user authentication or department ID authentication is set If the DepartmentID Authentication is set If the authentication with a card is performed Management Settings License Other Start Setup Guide Enable If you start the Setup Guide later and log in as an administrator Step ...

Страница 27: ...min Password enter the license key press Start OK If Administrator is disabled it is enabled when initializing the password Registering User Information in the Local Device P 561 You can prohibit initialization of the administrator password Prohibit Initialization of Administrator Password P 813 1 Press 2 Press Log In 3 Log in with the procedure Picture login Press Administrator Keyboard authentic...

Страница 28: ... the items that can be personalized settings are registered as the personal settings for the users who log into the machine If you set to Device Settings settings are registered as the machine s settings Personal Settings and Device Settings are only displayed on the Settings Registration screen if you log in with Administrator privileges LINKS Logging into the Machine P 104 Starting the Remote UI...

Страница 29: ...ation via the Internet precise time zone setting is essential Daylight Saving Time To set daylight saving time press On and set the date time for Start Date and End Date To set the date specify the day of the week and the week of the month If daylight saving time is set the time can be put forward an hour compared to the time zone or time during a specified period in the summer Date and time Enter...

Страница 30: ... If you changed the setting of Time Zone or Daylight Saving Time you need to restart the machine by turning the power OFF Setting Up 18 ...

Страница 31: ...SB cable without connecting to a network operations such using as a scanner or sending transferring data from the machine to a computer are not possible You can establish a wireless direct connection between the machine and mobile devices Connecting Directly Access Point Mode P 523 Confirm before handling Follow the procedure below to make a connection to a network Confirm first Are a computer and...

Страница 32: ...ssary If you want to use a specific IP address or change the protocol of the automatic setting of an IP address from DHCP initial setting to another this setting is necessary Setting an IP Address P 32 Confirm that proper connection is completed Start the Remote UI from a computer Starting the Remote UI P 648 If the Remote UI screen is displayed the connection is completed Depending on the utility...

Страница 33: ... settings in order to prevent unintended changes Unlock the security lock to change them Preferences Network Confirm Network Connection Setting Changes On OK If Off is selected you cannot view or change the network settings Also error messages related to the network are not displayed Setting Up 21 ...

Страница 34: ...s LAN Wired LAN or Wireless LAN OK If you select Wireless LAN when Low is set for Sleep Mode Energy Use select Compensate for Network Comm at the same time Otherwise the wireless LAN cannot be used during Sleep mode Timer Energy Settings Sleep Mode Energy Use P 739 LINK Connecting to a Wired LAN P 23 Connecting to a Wireless LAN P 24 Setting Up 22 ...

Страница 35: ... 10BASE T use a category 5 twisted pair cable It is recommended to use an enhanced category 5 twisted pair cable to make a connection using 1000BASE T If devices supporting 1000BASE T 100BASE TX and 10BASE T are used together a device such as a switching hub supporting all of the Ethernet types you use is necessary For more information contact a person in charge of service 1 Connect the machine to...

Страница 36: ...he instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your manufacturer 128 104 64 40 bit WEP WPA PSK TKIP AES CCMP WPA2 PSK TKIP AES CCMP Depending on the network device the operation of the wireless LAN router differs See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help When Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption is set to On Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption P 820 the machine cannot b...

Страница 37: ...ences Network Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Information Connecting Directly You can establish a direct wireless connection between a mobile device and the machine without using a wireless LAN router Setting Up 25 ...

Страница 38: ...ush Button Mode press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router When the wireless LAN router is detected and the configuration is complete the screen Connected will be displayed Depending on the networking device you may need to press and hold the WPS button for 2 seconds or longer See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help If the wireless router is set to use WEP authent...

Страница 39: ...Registering the PIN code to the wireless router Register the PIN code within two minutes after the PIN code is generated For details see the instruction manual for your networking device 1 Access a wireless router from a computer 2 Display the screen for entering a WPS PIN code 3 Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router When the wireless LAN router is detected and the configuration i...

Страница 40: ... CCMP for WPA WPA2 encryption set up the connection in Enter Manually Setting Up a Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings P 29 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Settings Other Set Manually 3 Press Select Access Point The machine starts searching for available wireless routers 4 Select a wireless router and connect to it If the security setting of your wireless LAN r...

Страница 41: ...ed 5 Specify the security settings in Security Settings Using WEP 1 Press WEP 2 Select an authentication method To use the WEP key as a password press Shared Key If you press Open System the machine experiences an authentication is set on the wireless router If this happens the machine automatically changes the setting to Shared Key and retries the connection 3 Select the WEP key that you want to ...

Страница 42: ...6 Press OK When the wireless LAN router is detected and the configuration is complete the screen Connected will be displayed Setting Up 30 ...

Страница 43: ...ing devices or contact your manufacturer SSID A name given for identifying a specific wireless LAN Some other terms used for SSID include access point name and network name Network Key A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network Some other terms used for network key include encryption key WEP key WPA WPA2 passphrase preshared key PSK Wireless Security Protocols Authe...

Страница 44: ... network a unique IP address on the network is required The machine supports two versions of IP addresses IPv4 and IPv6 Set and use them according to your environment You can use either IPv4 or IPv6 You can also use both of them at the same time Setting Up 32 ...

Страница 45: ...ition of an IP address fails Automatic allocation using DHCP Press DHCP or Auto IP Select one of them according to your network environment If you select both DHCP and Auto IP automatic allocation using DHCP takes priority If you press Auto IP the available IP address is automatically searched in the network LAN and the value for each item is allocated This function allocates the IP address withou...

Страница 46: ...l panel of the machine Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings PING Command Enter the address of any other in use device Enable When the machine is connected correctly the Response from the host message is displayed Even though IP addresses are properly set if the machine is connected to a switching hub the machine might not be connected to the network In this case delay the timing of th...

Страница 47: ...fied by a router and the MAC address of the machine even in an environment without a DHCP server Manual address Addresses that are manually entered Prefix length and a default router address are specified Stateful address Addresses that are acquired from the DHCP server Setting an IPv6 Address P 35 Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv6 Address P 37 Setting an IPv6 Address 1 Press 2 Press Prefer...

Страница 48: ... upper 96 bits are 0 with an IPv4 address contained in the lower 32 bits IPv4 mapped addresses IPv6 addresses in which the upper 96 bits are 0 0 0 0 ffff with an IPv4 address contained in the lower 32 bits Prefix Length The length of the network address section can be changed Default Router Address Press Default Router Address and enter an address The following addresses cannot be used Addresses t...

Страница 49: ... IP Settings IPv6 Settings PING Command Enter the address of any other in use device or the host name Enable When the machine is connected correctly the Response from the host message is displayed Even though IP addresses are properly set if the machine is connected to a switching hub the machine might not be connected to the network In this case delay the timing of the machine s communication sta...

Страница 50: ... form of a network varies depending on the purpose and use The machine adopts various technologies for adapting to as many environments as possible Consult your network administrator and carry out necessary settings according to your environment Setting Up 38 ...

Страница 51: ...Ethernet Driver Settings 3 Make Ethernet settings Normally press On in Auto Detect The communication system and Ethernet type are detected and automatically configured Making Ethernet settings manually 1 Press Off in Auto Detect 2 Select the communication system Half Duplex Carry out send receive functions alternately Select this when the connected router is set for half duplex communication Full ...

Страница 52: ...4 Press OK 5 Press Apply Set Changes Yes LINKS Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network P 41 Setting Up 40 ...

Страница 53: ...termine the roles of the switching ports but communication may not be properly transmitted in cases just after changes such as adding a new device to the network To connect the machine to such a network set the waiting time which is the time until the communication starts Preferences Network Waiting Time for Connection at Startup Set the waiting time OK Apply Set Changes Yes LINKS Making Ethernet ...

Страница 54: ...on you can make correspondence with an IP address by acquiring the host name through a DHCP server without manually entering the host name of the machine Making DNS Settings P 42 Using a DHCP Server P 45 Making DNS Settings 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network TCP IP Settings DNS Settings 3 Specify a DNS server address 1 Press DNS Server Address Settings 2 Carry out the necessary settings According...

Страница 55: ...me as IPv4 press On in Use Same Host Name Domain Name as IPv4 To set to be different from those of IPv4 press Off To set the host name to be different from IPv4 press Host Name and enter the host name of the machine to register on the DNS server using alphanumeric characters To set the domain name to be different from IPv4 press Domain Name and enter the domain name that the machine belongs to usi...

Страница 56: ... set to Off 3 Press OK 6 Specify the mDNS settings 1 Press mDNS Settings 2 Carry out the necessary settings Use IPv4 mDNS To enable the DNS function in an environment without a DNS server press On Press mDNS Name and enter an mDNS name of your choice using alphanumeric characters Use IPv6 mDNS To enable the DNS function in an environment without a DNS server press On To set the same settings as IP...

Страница 57: ...ver automatically update information regarding correspondence between the IP addresses and the host names without using the machine press On Acquire DNS Server Address To acquire the DHCP server IP address press On Acquire Domain Name To acquire a domain name through the DHCP server press On Acquire WINS Server Address To acquire a domain name through the WINS server press On Acquire SMTP Server A...

Страница 58: ...the necessary setup Require SMB Signature for Connection To set so that an SMB packet signature is requested when connecting to the SMB server press On Use SMB Authentication User authentication is conducted by using user information in the Advanced Box To conduct user authentication press On Authentication Type Select the version of the authentication protocol Select NTLMv1 or NTLMv2 according to...

Страница 59: ...er Name Workgroup Name Settings for TCP IP Settings Computer Name Workgroup Name Settings P 742 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network TCP IP Settings WINS Settings 3 Press On in WINS Resolution and enter the IP address of the WINS server in WINS Server Address If the WINS server IP address is acquired from the DHCP server the IP address acquired from the DHCP server has priority 4 Press OK 5 Press A...

Страница 60: ...eb server Because WebDAV also supports TLS encryption you can construct a file sharing system which is highly secure through user management Enabling the WebDAV server functions makes it possible for the Advanced Box to be used as a WebDAV file server Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Use WebDAV Server On OK Apply Set Changes Yes LINKS Setting the Advanced Box of the Machine P 65 Setting Up 48 ...

Страница 61: ...ric characters Example ldap example com Server Address and DNS To prevent errors pay attention to the following when a destination search is carried out from the machine to the LDAP server When entering the IP address check if the usable DNS server supports only forward lookup When the DNS server supports forward lookup only press Do Not Use or Use in Authentication Information in step 4 When sele...

Страница 62: ...ch Specify how many destinations can be searched Port Number Enter the port number used when communicating to from the LDAP server 3 Press Next 4 Set authentication information Specify authentication methods according to the settings of the LDAP server When authenticating using login information Enter the user name and the password used as authentication information 1 Press Use in Authentication I...

Страница 63: ...version and character code information are set to ver 3 UTF 8 The time of the machine and LDAP server need to be synchronized 1 Press Use Security Auth in Authentication Information 2 Enter the user name and the password and carry out the necessary settings User Name Enter the username of the machine registered in the LDAP server Example user1 Password Enter the password registered on the LDAP ser...

Страница 64: ...3 Press OK LINKS Performing User Authentication when Distributing Device Information P 718 Registering Server Information P 565 Set Destination P 803 Making SNTP Settings P 57 Setting Up 52 ...

Страница 65: ...able to security issues To ensure safety invalidate SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3 enables you to implement network device management with strong security functions When SNMP management software is usable you can set monitor and control the machine through a computer For details see your software s instruction manuals Setting SNMPv1 SNMPv3 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network SNMP Settings 3 S...

Страница 66: ...t Dedicated Community you cannot set an exclusive community name 4 Press OK 4 Set SNMPv3 1 Press On in Use SNMPv3 If you don t use SNMPv3 press Off 2 Press Administrator Settings 3 Specify the necessary settings and press OK Use Administrator If you use Administrator set to On Encryption Password If you use a password which is different from the authentication deselect Use Same Password as for Aut...

Страница 67: ...Encryption Password Enter a password to use for encoding When the password is entered Confirm is displayed for confirmation Enter the password again 6 Press OK OK 7 Press Context Settings Register 8 Enter a context name and press OK 9 Press OK 5 Configure settings in Retrieve Printer Mngt Information from Host If you set to On you can periodically acquire printer management information such as pri...

Страница 68: ... SNMPv3 will not be effective Access privileges to MIB can be set in either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3 In SNMPv3 you can set them for each user If Administrator is disabled you cannot specify settings in SNMP Settings Use SNMPv3 Administrator Settings In addition Use Same Password as for Authentication for Encryption Password is fixed to off Administrator cannot be used as a user name in SNMP Settings Use S...

Страница 69: ...TP is a protocol to adjust time using a time server on the network SNTP is used when time needs to be adjusted between the machine and the server in cases when security authentication is done at the time of accessing an LDAP server Set the time difference time zone beforehand because actions are based on Coordinated Universal Time UTC Setting the Date Time P 17 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network ...

Страница 70: ... 5 Press Apply Set Changes Yes Monitoring the Machine From Device Management Systems When device management software such as iW Management Console is employed you can collect manage various information such as setting information address information and device failure information on the network through the server 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Multicast Discovery Settings 3 Se...

Страница 71: ...CD ROM disks see Driver Software Used with This Machine P 1127 to check the drivers 2 Set the User Software CD ROM in a computer 3 Confirm the installation guide and carry out installation For Windows For more details on the installation click Manuals and see Printer Driver Installation Guide Color Network ScanGear 2 Installation Guide and Fax Driver Installation Guide For Mac OS For more details ...

Страница 72: ...d you can show or print the sender s name Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 319 6 Select a line type in Select Line Type press OK If you are not sure what kind of line type you are using please contact your dealer or the sales office of your telephone company Configure the setting according to the fax option You can edit the line name that is displayed in the line selection screen using Edit Li...

Страница 73: ...LINKS Faxing P 314 Options P 1088 Setting Up 61 ...

Страница 74: ...e machine an SMTP server to receive e mails and I faxes Be aware that you cannot receive via SMTP if you don t register the host name of the machine on the DNS server SMTP Server Enter an SMTP server name or an IP address E Mail Address Enter the machine s e mail address You can specify any name as the user name part at the left of mark Enter the registered host name at the right of the mark POP S...

Страница 75: ...POP select POP AUTH POP Authentication Before Sending To perform authentication using the POP3 server press On Allow TLS POP To encode the communication to from the POP3 server using TLS press On When On is set you can confirm the TLS server certificate during communication with the server and add CN to the verification items E Mail I Fax Settings Confirm TLS Certificate for POP RX P 781 3 Press O...

Страница 76: ... faxes using the SMTP server press Always TLS or On When you don t want to receive data other than encoded data select Always TLS Display Auth Screen When Sending When sending e mails and I faxes to display the user name and password entry screen press On Allow TLS SMTP TX To encode the communication to from the SMTP server using TLS press On When On is set you can confirm the TLS server certifica...

Страница 77: ...ement file sharing with computers and other Canon multifunction printers without introducing a server In addition you can increase the storage capacity by connecting the machine to the Advanced Box of other multifunction printers To utilize such functions adjust settings for sharing files beforehand Here the procedures are described as follows Available only for imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machines...

Страница 78: ...es Advanced Box Settings Unified Advanced Box Settings Next 3 Set the method to make the Advanced Box available to the network and press Next If you want to make the Advanced Box available to the outside as a WebDAV server press By WebDAV If you want to make the Advanced Box available to the outside as an SMB server press By SMB If you set to WebDAV the Use WebDAV Server is set to On If you set to...

Страница 79: ... whether to use TLS and press Next If you use TLS press On Configure the setting of the keys and certificates Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS P 604 If you set the Authentication Management and TLS setting to On the setting of Authentication Type in WebDAV Server Settings is set to Basic Advanced Box Settings WebDAV Server Settings P 798 If you set to By SMB and set the Authentication M...

Страница 80: ...ther multifunction printers to connect to 1 Press Network Place Settings Register 2 Enter the necessary information and press OK Name Enter the name of the Advanced Box to connect to As a name entered here is displayed on the list at the time of access enter a name that is easy to read Protocol Select SMB or WebDAV depending on whether the Windows server or Advanced Box of destination is made avai...

Страница 81: ...on via WebDAV is not used set the WebDAV setting to Off Verifying the certificate when connecting When the Windows server or Advanced Box to connect to is set to use TLS you can verify the TLS server certificate sent from the connected device when connecting Because a connection will be canceled if an error occurs attacks such as identity theft by third parties can be prevented 1 Press Confirm TLS...

Страница 82: ...n the Multi Purpose Tray 117 Loading Envelopes 120 Loading Transparencies 128 Loading Preprinted Paper 130 Loading Tab Paper 133 Specifying Paper Size and Type 137 Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer 138 Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi purpose Tray 142 Registering Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi purpose Tray 145 Setting the Method for Selecting the Pape...

Страница 83: ...age 175 Customizing Settings Registration 177 Configuring Accessibility Settings Personal Settings 179 Setting Sounds 181 Entering Sleep Mode 184 Registering Destinations 186 Registering Destinations in the Address Book 188 Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group 195 Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book 198 Registering a Destination in a One Touch Button 200 Editing the Reg...

Страница 84: ...el Parts and Their Functions P 75 Turning ON the Machine This section describes how to turn the machine ON or OFF Turning ON the Machine P 90 Using the Touch Panel Display This section describes how to use the buttons on the touch panel display to perform various operations such as adjusting and checking the settings This section also describes how to enter text and numbers which are necessary for...

Страница 85: ...en glass and in the feeder Placing Originals P 106 Loading Paper This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and multi purpose tray Loading Paper P 112 Customizing the Touch Panel Display This section describes how to arrange buttons and customize menus making it easier to use the screens displayed on the touch panel Customizing the Touch Panel Display P 152 Basic Operations...

Страница 86: ...e or when an error occurs Setting Sounds P 181 Entering Sleep Mode This section describes how to set sleep mode Entering Sleep Mode P 184 Registering Destinations This section describes how to register destinations in the Address Book or one touch buttons for sending faxes or scanned documents Registering Destinations P 186 Basic Operations 74 ...

Страница 87: ...hine front side back side and interior and how they function This section also describes how to place originals and how to load paper as well as the names and usage of the keys on the control panel Read this section for tips on how to use the machine properly Basic Operations 75 ...

Страница 88: ...hine the machine exits sleep mode automatically Entering Sleep Mode P 184 Control panel The control panel consists of the numeric keys indicators touch panel display etc You can perform all the operations and specify settings from the control panel Control Panel P 87 Basic Operations 76 ...

Страница 89: ...Up Restoring Data P 694 The USB port rear right side of the machine supports USB 3 0 USB connector Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer The USB connector supports USB 2 0 LAN port Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router etc Setting up the Network Environment P 19 Multi purpose tray Load paper into the multi purpose tray when you want to use a...

Страница 90: ...Turning OFF the Machine P 91 Glass cleaning sheet storage box Use this box to store sheets for cleaning the platen glass Output tray Paper is output here when printing finishes Front cover of the main unit Open this cover when cleaning the dust proof glass Cleaning the Dust Proof Glass P 836 Toner replacement cover Open this cover when replacing the toner cartridge Replacing the Toner Cartridge P ...

Страница 91: ... To use the memory media it is necessary that Memory Media in Store Location Display Settings is set to On Set Use Scan Function and Use Print Function to On Use Scan Print Function P 799 When the memory media is not recognized even if it is connected properly the machine may be set to use the MEAP driver for USB external storage device Set Use MEAP Driver for USB Storage Device to Off Use MEAP Dr...

Страница 92: ...K Unsupported devices and usages Memory media with security functions Memory media that does not meet the USB specification Memory card readers connected via USB Connecting memory media via an extension cable Connecting memory media via a USB hub Basic Operations 80 ...

Страница 93: ... connect the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board to the machine and use LINE 3 and LINE 4 to connect the Super G3 3rd 4th Line Fax Board to the machine System Options P 1121 Telephone line jack LINE 1 Connect a telephone cable when connecting the machine to a telephone line Basic Operations 81 ...

Страница 94: ...e dust proof glass Toner cartridge Replace the toner cartridge when the toner runs out Replacing the Waste Toner Container P 844 Waste toner container Replace the waste toner container when it is full of waste toner Replacing the Waste Toner Container P 844 Basic Operations 82 ...

Страница 95: ...e loaded originals can be scanned continuously Placing Originals P 106 Original supply tray extension Pull out this tray when loading a large sized original Document feed scanning area Originals placed in the feeder are scanned in this area Document feed scanning area cover Open this cover when replacing a stamp cartridge or cleaning the document feed scanning area Maintenance P 825 Platen glass W...

Страница 96: ...g originals neatly Original output tray Scanned originals are output here Original output indicator If you place originals in the feeder while originals for another job remain in the original output tray the indicator blinks to notify the user that originals remain Do not place any objects in the original output area Doing so may cause damage to the originals Regularly clean the feeder and platen ...

Страница 97: ...els or tracing paper Paper guides Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the machine Paper tray Open the paper tray when loading paper Tray extension Pull out the tray extension when loading large sized paper LINKS Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray P 117 Basic Operations 85 ...

Страница 98: ...aper drawer is the second paper drawer from the top Paper guide Left guide Press the top part of the left guide and slide it Paper guide Front guide Press the top part of the front guide and slide it LINKS Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer P 114 Optional Equipment P 1090 Basic Operations 86 ...

Страница 99: ... the Touch Panel Display P 93 Login user name The user name that is currently logged in is displayed Touch panel display In addition to the settings screen for each function the error status is also shown on this display Using the Touch Panel Display P 93 Settings Registration key Press to start specifying many of the settings for the machine such as Preferences or Set Destination Settings Registr...

Страница 100: ...munication or to set the alarm sound when an error occurs Setting Sounds P 181 Clear key Press to clear entered values or characters Stop key Press to cancel copying faxing and other operations Start key Press to start copying or scanning originals Main Power indicator Lights up when the machine is turned ON Turning ON the Machine P 90 Error indicator Blinks or lights up when an error such as a pa...

Страница 101: ...cel Press to check the status of printing or faxing or to view the usage history You can also check the status of the machine such as the remaining amount of paper and toner or whether any errors occurred Using the Touch Panel Display P 93 Adjusting the Angle of the Touch Panel Display You can adjust the angle of the control panel if the touch panel display cannot be seen clearly Basic Operations ...

Страница 102: ...elect the screen displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON Use Default Screen After Startup Restoration P 813 The response of the touch panel display and keys on the control panel may not be optimal immediately after the machine is turned ON If the machine is connected to a powered off Mac computer by USB cable the computer may turn on automatically when this machine does In this case d...

Страница 103: ...ing up stored data from Remote UI message is displayed on the touch panel display Doing so may cause the machine to fail to back up the stored data Data stored in the machine may be damaged if the Advanced Box shared storage of the machine is accessed by another Canon multifunction printer or a computer immediately before the machine is turned OFF If the machine is turned OFF during scanning or pr...

Страница 104: ... Power indicator is turned off and then turn the machine back ON When Quick Startup Settings for Main Power is enabled wait for at least 20 seconds to restart the machine Quick Startup Settings for Main Power P 738 LINKS Turning ON the Machine P 90 Basic Operations 92 ...

Страница 105: ...rp end such as a mechanical pencil or ballpoint pen Doing so may scratch the surface of the touch panel display or break it Peel off the protective film from the touch panel display before use You can customize menus and rearrange frequently used buttons for easier access You can also combine multiple settings into one button to simplify operations Customizing the Touch Panel Display P 152 Adjust ...

Страница 106: ... functions or hide functions not used often Customizing the Main Menu P 154 Shortcut You can place shortcuts for frequently used function buttons Creating a Shortcut for a Frequently Used Function P 157 Function button list Buttons which call up the machine s basic functions are listed here If there are some buttons that do not fit on a screen press and located in the lower section of the screen t...

Страница 107: ...s e mail addresses and fax numbers Settings Registration P 731 Registering Destinations P 186 Current menu level You can check which level is being displayed for the entire setting menu Setting item list Setting items that belong to the current menu level are displayed in a list When there is no menu under the lower level the setting screen is displayed Status Monitor Cancel Screen When you press ...

Страница 108: ...ory levels Specifications P 1029 Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables P 861 Operation Guide Message Operation guides and messages may appear on some screens Use them for tips on how to proceed with operations Operation guide A guide that can be used as a reference for operation is displayed Message Icon A message is displayed when paper runs out or the toner level is low Countermeasures fo...

Страница 109: ...and the Basic Features screen to customize the screen such as rearranging buttons or creating a shortcut key Only an Administrator can customize the Main Menu Customizing the Touch Panel Display P 152 You can change settings regarding the screen display such as which screen appears immediately after turning ON the machine and whether the message appears for remaining paper and toner Display Settin...

Страница 110: ... Button When you press a button the button color may change or a check mark may be added to indicate that it has been selected Press the function setting button to display the setting status in the upper section of a button and the color of the lower section is changed Press a button in which is located in the lower right to display the setting screen When the setting is made the setting status is...

Страница 111: ...es to increase or decrease the numerical value By holding down the button you can change the value quickly Applying Canceling Settings Press OK to apply settings and press Cancel Settings to discard the changes and restore the previous settings In addition buttons such as Cancel which cancels the setting and returns to the previous screen Next which applies the setting to proceed to the next scree...

Страница 112: ...tions of the machine as well as tips for using copy scan etc View this screen when you want to learn more about what functions are available and how to use them Example Tutorial for Copy functions When you select an item from the list the tutorial screen is displayed Use the Help function Depending on the function being displayed is sometimes displayed on the upper right of the screen Press to che...

Страница 113: ...the page or scroll by flicking your finger up down or left right on the screen as you would with a smartphone You can also zoom in or out on the screen by using two fingers to pinch out or pinch in You can drag the enlarged screen with your finger Configuring Accessibility Settings Personal Settings P 179 LINKS Control Panel P 87 Entering Characters P 102 Basic Operations 101 ...

Страница 114: ... to the left of the cursor one by one If a character you want to delete is not to the left of the cursor press or to move the cursor Press on the control panel if you want to delete all the characters you entered Entry mode button Select the entry mode from the drop down list Alphanum Char Alphanumeric character entry mode Symbol Symbol entry mode For some screens the type of characters entered ar...

Страница 115: ...racters from the USB keyboard To enter characters you can also use a USB keyboard by connecting it to the USB port Front Side P 76 Note the following points when entering from a USB keyboard Set Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device in USB Settings to Off Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device P 751 You can only enter ASCII characters from a USB keyboard Keys that are not displayed on the keyboard sc...

Страница 116: ...aching it Configuring the Personal Authentication Management Settings P 558 When the Icon List Is Displayed P 104 When the User Name and Password Input Screen Is Displayed P 104 When the Icon List Is Displayed Press your icon If a PIN code has been set enter your PIN code and press OK Log In You can change the display order or narrow down the icons that appear in the drop down list at the top righ...

Страница 117: ...machine functions become available When you finish using the machine press Log Out or to log out You can log into the machine using the IC card or copy card For details about the IC card contact your local authorized Canon dealer For details about the copy card see Copy Card Reader F1 P 1113 You can specify whether to save passwords entered during login in the cache Prohibit Caching of Authenticat...

Страница 118: ...ce the following types of originals in the feeder as this may cause paper jams Wrinkled or creased paper Carbon paper or carbon backed paper Curled or rolled paper Coated paper Torn originals Originals with large holes Onion skin or thin paper Stapled or clipped originals Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer Transparencies To scan originals more accurately Originals placed in the feeder are...

Страница 119: ...y detected 2 Place the original face down on the platen glass Align the corner of the original with the top left corner of the platen glass When copying 2 sided original place the original so that the top and the bottom are properly positioned as shown in the illustration below 3 Gently close the feeder platen cover The original is ready for scanning When scanning is complete remove the original f...

Страница 120: ...arge sized originals pull out the original supply tray extension and original output tray extension to prevent them from dropping over the edge of the feeder 2 Fan the original stack and align the edges Fan the original stack in small batches and align the edges by lightly tapping the stack on a flat surface a few times 3 Place the originals face up in the feeder Basic Operations 108 ...

Страница 121: ... top and the bottom are properly positioned as shown in the illustration below You can place different sized originals and scan them all at once Copying Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals P 238 Sending Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals P 344 Sending Saving Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals P 433 4 Align the slide guides agai...

Страница 122: ... long originals which have a length of up to 630 mm support the originals by hand when scanning and outputting paper When placing thin paper originals It may be difficult to place thin paper originals In this case lightly bend the paper while placing it Make sure that you do not push too hard when placing the original The original may not be fed correctly or may cause a paper jam When you place th...

Страница 123: ...same original It is recommended that you do not repeatedly scan the same original more than five times this varies depending on paper quality The original may fold or become wrinkled or become difficult to send Basic Operations 111 ...

Страница 124: ...creased paper Curled or rolled paper Torn paper Damp paper Very thin paper Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer Highly textured paper Glossy paper Paper handling and storage Store the paper on a flat surface Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold Do not store the pape...

Страница 125: ...Registering Free Size Paper Custom Size Paper P 149 Cassette Feeding Unit AM1 P 1094 High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A1 P 1097 Paper Deck Unit F1 P 1101 Basic Operations 113 ...

Страница 126: ... 133 1 Hold the handle of the paper drawer and pull it out until it stops 2 Adjust the position of the paper guides While pressing the top part of the left guide slide it to align with the size indicator for the paper to be loaded While pressing the top part of the front guide slide it to align with the size indicator for the paper to be loaded Basic Operations 114 ...

Страница 127: ...GL Legal LTR Letter EXEC Executive STMT Statement 3 Prepare paper Fan the paper stack well and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges Fan all four sides of the paper stack well Make sure that there is enough air between them 4 Load the paper Make sure that the paper size setting of the paper drawer matches the size of the paper to load in the paper drawer Load the paper stack with the print s...

Страница 128: ...package and store it in a dry place away from direct sunlight If paper runs out and printing is stopped load a new paper stack Printing restarts after the new paper stack is loaded If you print on the paper which has absorbed moisture steam may come out from the output area of the machine This is because the moist on the paper evaporates when the high temperature is applied when a toner is fixed t...

Страница 129: ...paper drawer load the paper in the multi purpose tray 1 Open the multi purpose tray Pull out the tray extension when loading large sized paper 2 Adjust the paper guides to match the size of the paper 3 Prepare paper Fan the paper stack well and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges Basic Operations 117 ...

Страница 130: ...y inserted Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line Loading too much paper can cause paper jams If you use envelopes or paper with a logo mark pay attention to the orientation when loading them in the paper source Loading Envelopes P 120 Loading Preprinted Paper P 130 Feed coated paper one sheet at a time When you load ...

Страница 131: ...inting on the back side of printed paper 2nd Side of 2 Sided Page You can print on the back side of printed paper Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the multi purpose tray with the side to print face down previously printed side face up Then press 2nd Side of 2 Sided Page on the screen for selecting the paper type Use only the paper printed with this machine LINKS Specificat...

Страница 132: ...g envelopes For a description of the general procedure for loading envelopes in the multi purpose tray see Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray P 117 Before Loading Envelopes Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading Do not use envelopes that have glue attached to their flaps as the glue may melt due to the heat and pressure of the fixing unit 1 Flatten any curls Pick u...

Страница 133: ...ides In particular carefully press down on the side facing the direction in which the envelopes will be fed Press down firmly so that the flap stays flat Failure to firmly press down on the flap may result in a paper jam If this happens press down firmly on all four sides of each individual envelope 4 Align the envelopes on a flat surface Check that no envelopes are tucked underneath the flap of t...

Страница 134: ...eeder Attachment B to the left guide Attach the Envelope Feeder Attachment A by aligning the protruding areas of the Envelope Feeder Attachment A with the holes on paper receptor located on the bottom of the paper drawer When loading ISO C5 it is not necessary to attach the Envelope Feeder Attachment B When not using the Envelope Feeder Attachments store them in the storage areas of the paper draw...

Страница 135: ...uding areas of the Envelope Feeder Attachment A with the holes on paper receptor located on the bottom of the paper drawer When loading Kakugata 2 it is not necessary to attach the Envelope Feeder Attachment A When not using the Envelope Feeder Attachment A store it in the storage area of paper drawer 2 2 Adjust the position of the paper guides Paper drawer 1 Paper drawer 2 Basic Operations 123 ...

Страница 136: ... of the envelopes the side without the glued areas face up Load 25 envelopes at a time Yougatanaga 3 COM10 No 10 DL ISO C5 Close the flaps and load the envelopes so that their flaps are on the right side Nagagata 3 Load the envelopes so that their flaps are on the far side Basic Operations 124 ...

Страница 137: ...the side without the glued areas face up Load 50 envelopes at a time Yougatanaga 3 Close the flaps and load the envelopes so that their flaps are on the far side Monarch COM10 No 10 DL ISO C5 Close the flaps and load the envelopes so that their flaps are on the near side Basic Operations 125 ...

Страница 138: ... the front side of the envelopes the side without the glued areas face down recommended Load 10 envelopes at a time You can load up to 10 envelopes at the same time If the envelopes are not fed properly even if they have been prepared according to the procedures load the envelopes individually in the multi purpose tray instead of loading several sheets together Do not print on the reverse side of ...

Страница 139: ...shown in the figures below Yougatanaga 3 Nagagata 3 COM10 No 10 Monarch DL ISO C5 When you print on envelopes remove them from the output tray 10 at a time When using Kakugata 2 place it horizontally If envelopes become wrinkled load the envelopes with the long edge of the envelopes facing the machine Basic Operations 127 ...

Страница 140: ...d only A4 or LTR size transparencies 1 Hold the handle of the paper drawer and pull it out until it stops 2 Adjust the position of the paper guides While pressing the top part of the left guide slide it to align with the size indicator for the paper to be loaded While pressing the top part of the front guide slide it to align with the size indicator for the paper to be loaded Basic Operations 128 ...

Страница 141: ...rface Fan all four sides of the paper stack well Separate each sheet of paper and make sure that there is enough air between them 4 Load the transparencies Make sure that the paper size setting of the paper drawer matches the size of the transparencies to load in the paper drawer Load the transparency stack with the print side face up and against the side wall of the paper drawer It is recommended...

Страница 142: ...ed Priority for Copying from Feeder P 773 Loading Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation P 130 Loading Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation P 131 Loading Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation The loading method varies depending on the size of the paper with the logo and the paper source that is used When Loading A4 B5 A5 size Paper with Logos Load the paper so that the logo faces up in t...

Страница 143: ...original facing up in the feeder and facing down on the platen glass Feeder Platen glass Loading Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation The loading method varies depending on the size of the paper with the logo and the paper source that is used When Loading A4 B5 A5 size Paper with Logos Load the paper so that the logo faces up in the paper drawer and faces down in the multi purpose tray as sho...

Страница 144: ...he paper so that the logo faces up in the paper drawer 2 and faces down in the multi purpose tray as shown in the illustrations below A3 and B4 size paper cannot be loaded in the paper drawer 1 Paper drawer 2 Multi purpose tray Pay attention to the orientation when placing an original Place as follows with the original facing up in the feeder and facing down on the platen glass Feeder Platen glass...

Страница 145: ...pment P 1090 Tab Paper Type P 133 Loading Tab Paper in the Paper Drawer 2 P 133 Tab Paper Type There are two kinds of tab paper right order tab paper and reverse order tab paper Right order tab paper Reverse order tab paper When you load tab paper into the paper drawer 2 load right order tab paper face up with the tabs on the left side For the reverse order tab paper load face up with the tabs on ...

Страница 146: ...ion of the paper guides While pressing the top part of the left guide slide it to the left edge 3 Prepare the Tab Feeding Attachment F1 4 Attach the Tab Feeding Attachment F1 aligning the mark for A4 Basic Operations 134 ...

Страница 147: ...e tab paper Load the tab paper with the tabs on the left side Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line Loading too much paper can cause paper jams 6 While pressing the top part of the front guide slide it until it is aligned with the tab paper Basic Operations 135 ...

Страница 148: ...y the paper size and type For details about how to specify the paper size and type see Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer P 138 If you do not change the settings the machine cannot print properly LINKS Specifications P 1029 Basic Operations 136 ...

Страница 149: ...pe settings to match the paper that is loaded Make sure to change the paper settings when you load paper that is different from the previously loaded paper If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper a paper jam or printing error may occur Basic Operations 137 ...

Страница 150: ... from the top Depending on the options installed the display differs If the displayed paper size is different from the loaded paper size the paper may not be loaded properly Load the paper again If Custom is displayed even though the standard size paper is loaded press Custom Size Cancel Settings The correct size will be displayed When loading custom size paper Specify the size of paper loaded in ...

Страница 151: ... Size Paper Custom Size Paper P 149 3 Press OK When loading envelopes Specify the type of envelopes loaded in the paper drawer 1 Select the paper drawer in which envelopes are loaded and press Envelope 2 Select the type of envelopes loaded in the paper drawer 3 Press OK When loading other size paper 1 Select the paper source in which paper is loaded and press Other Size Basic Operations 139 ...

Страница 152: ...e 3 Press OK 5 Select the paper source in which paper is loaded and press Set 6 Select the paper type and press OK If the paper type loaded is not displayed press Detailed Settings to select from a list Basic Operations 140 ...

Страница 153: ...er size label of the paper drawer as necessary Attach the paper size label at the same height as the cassette number indicator and approximately 5 mm to the left Approximately 5 mm LINKS Specifications P 1029 Basic Operations 141 ...

Страница 154: ...the paper size If you press Favorite Paper and register the frequently used paper size on buttons you can call them up with a simple press Registering Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi purpose Tray P 145 When loading standard size paper 1 Press Standard Size 2 Select the paper size and press OK When loading custom size paper 1 Press Custom Size 2 Specify the length of the X side an...

Страница 155: ...lopes press Short Edge Feed or Long Edge Feed and select the envelope type If you selected vertical placement for Nagagata 3 press Next and specify the flap length Proceed to step 5 When using Kakugata 2 place it horizontally When loading custom size envelopes 1 Press Envelope 2 Press Custom Size 3 Specify the length of the X side and Y side Press X or Y to enter the length of each side using the ...

Страница 156: ...d Settings to select from a list 5 Press OK If a screen other than that for specifying the paper size and type is displayed If a message prompting you to adjust the paper guide is displayed adjust the width of the paper guide again and press OK LINKS Specifications P 1029 Basic Operations 144 ...

Страница 157: ... be called up from the screen which is displayed when loading paper 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Paper Settings Register Favorite Paper Multi Purpose Tray 3 Select a button to register and press Register Edit You can change the registered name by pressing Rename 4 Select the paper size and press Next When registering custom size paper 1 Press Custom Size 2 Specify the length of the X side and Y sid...

Страница 158: ...ct the orientation and type of envelopes and press OK 3 Press Next If you placed the envelopes vertically press Long Edge Feed and select the envelope type If you selected vertical placement for Nagagata 3 press Next and specify the flap length Proceed to step 6 When using Kakugata 2 place it horizontally 5 Select the paper type and press OK 6 Press Close LINKS Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose T...

Страница 159: ...Defaults 3 Set the method for selecting the paper When using the same paper every time 1 Press Use Preset Register 2 Select the paper size Standard Select a standard paper size Free Size Press this to use a free paper size every time Custom Size Press this to set a custom paper size for the paper you use every time Envelope Select the envelope type 3 Select the paper type and press OK When using d...

Страница 160: ...the screen for selecting the buttons registered in Register Favorite Paper Multi Purpose Tray 4 Press OK 5 Press Close LINKS Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray P 117 Specifications P 1029 Registering Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi purpose Tray P 145 Basic Operations 148 ...

Страница 161: ...g Paper Size and Type in the Multi purpose Tray P 142 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Paper Settings Register Custom Size 3 Select a button from S1 to S5 and press Register Edit To change a setting 1 Select the button you want to change 2 Press Register Edit and proceed to step 4 To delete a setting 1 Select the button you want to delete 2 Press Delete Yes To change the registered name 1 Select the bu...

Страница 162: ...h of the X side and Y side Press X or Y to enter the length of each side using the numeric keys 5 Press OK LINKS Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer P 114 Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray P 117 Basic Operations 150 ...

Страница 163: ...urce OK Press Off if you do not want to automatically select the paper source Other enables you to set the paper source used when outputting reports If you select Copy you can set whether to consider the paper type If you set Consider Paper Type to On Paper is not fed from another paper source when the original paper source runs out of paper unless another paper source is loaded with paper of the ...

Страница 164: ...in Menu screen to make it easier to select frequently used functions by selecting whether to display or hide buttons and by rearranging them Customizing the Main Menu P 154 Creating a Shortcut You can create a shortcut button for the functions on the Main Menu Use this button to access a different function without returning to the Main Menu Creating a Shortcut for a Frequently Used Function P 157 ...

Страница 165: ...gs that you need in the Quick Menu Using the Quick Menu P 165 Changing the Language Displayed You can change the language displayed on the touch panel display and keyboard Switching the Displayed Language P 175 Settings for Each User Personal Settings The displays and operation environment can be changed for each user Configuring Accessibility Settings Personal Settings P 179 LINKS Using the Touch...

Страница 166: ... your daily operations To customize the Main Menu you must log in with Administrator privileges Logging into the Machine P 104 Selecting Buttons Displayed on the Main Menu P 154 Changing the Background of the Main Menu P 155 Selecting Buttons Displayed on the Main Menu 1 Press on the Main Menu 2 Press Main Menu Button Display Settings 3 Select the number of buttons and the layout Basic Operations ...

Страница 167: ...ank button space can be placed on the Main Menu Select the position from the list where you want to insert a blank space and press Add Blank If you want to delete a blank space select the position from the list where you want to delete it and press Delete Blank A button following the blank is carried forward to the position to be located there 5 Press OK The Main Menu in which the new layout is re...

Страница 168: ...left of the list You can specify whether to display hide the Settings Regist Shortcut button in Other Main Menu Settings For more information on Settings Regist Shortcut see Customizing Settings Registration P 177 LINKS Editing the Quick Menu P 171 Use Default Screen After Startup Restoration P 813 Basic Operations 156 ...

Страница 169: ...ton to access a different function without returning to the Main Menu To create a shortcut log in with Administrator privileges Logging into the Machine P 104 1 Press on the Main Menu 2 Press Shortcut Button Settings 3 Select a number for the shortcut to be created 4 Select the function you want to create a shortcut for Basic Operations 157 ...

Страница 170: ...he list You can check the position of the shortcut selected and the function assigned to it in the preview screen on the left of the list If you do not use shortcuts select Unassigned from the list 5 Press OK Basic Operations 158 ...

Страница 171: ...ntly recalled Copy Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features screen Scan and Store Basic Features screen Access Stored Files Basic Features screen The Copy function is used here as an example Registering Settings P 159 Recalling Registered Settings P 160 Registering Settings 1 Press Copy and specify the settings you want to register Basic Copy Operations P 210 2 Press Reg...

Страница 172: ...se For certain functions press Next enter a comment as necessary and press OK You can set Show Comments to On to display comments Recalling Registered Settings 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Favorite Settings on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Select the button OK Yes Basic Operations 160 ...

Страница 173: ... You can also change the settings you recall after pressing Yes 5 Press Copying starts Basic Operations 161 ...

Страница 174: ... Basic Features screen you can use functions more efficiently In addition by logging in with personal authentication management you can display a different Basic Features screen customized for each user Copy Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features screen Buttons that can be replaced Example Copy Basic Features screen 1 Press Copy on the Main Menu and press 2 Press Regis...

Страница 175: ...ay the button press Unassigned 5 Press OK By replacing with the button selected in step 3 the new button selected in step 4 is displayed on the Basic Features screen The number of setting items located on the Basic Features screen and the location to be displayed differ depending on functions If you have changed the Copy Basic Features screen to the Express Copy screen Changing the Settings Quickl...

Страница 176: ...Functions P 159 Changing the default setting on the Basic Features screen After changing the settings for each function you can register the current settings as a default on the Basic Features screen by pressing followed by Change Default Settings If you log into the machine with personal authentication management Logging into the Machine P 104 before performing this setting it is registered as yo...

Страница 177: ...enable you to register a combination of settings for a function in one button For example if you want to scan 2 sided original convert it into a Compact PDF file and send it via e mail you can register those steps in one button for quick and efficient operation Quick Menu buttons can be configured either as Personal buttons which are created and used by each logged in user or as Shared buttons whi...

Страница 178: ...ng Faxes P 319 Settings that can be registered in Favorite Settings for the Scan and Send function Useful Scanning Functions P 440 Settings that can be registered in Favorite Settings for the Scan and Store function Setting Screen and Operations for Scanning to Save P 514 Save locations for the Scan and Store and Access Stored Files functions Using Storage Space P 475 Shortcuts to the Basic Featur...

Страница 179: ...u press the button on the Quick Menu Select Off if you do not want to display the confirmation screen If you select On for Start Operation for Recall Operation starts when button is pressed copying starts when you press the button on the Quick Menu without pressing Select Off if you want to start copying manually by pressing If you select On for both Display Confirmation Screen When Recalling and ...

Страница 180: ...n registered and overwrite it with a new button 7 Enter the button name and a comment and press OK Press Name or Comment to enter As both inputs are displayed on a button on the Quick Menu it is convenient if you enter a setting name in Name and a memo in Comment 8 Press Close Using the Quick Menu The procedure for using buttons on the Quick Menu vary depending the registered function and settings...

Страница 181: ...ge 5 pages is selected Editing the Quick Menu P 171 the comments entered for the buttons are not shown 2 Press the button you want to use When Display Confirmation Screen When Recalling is set to On A confirmation screen asking whether to recall the settings is displayed If Start Operation for Recall Operation starts when button is pressed is set to On operations registered in the button start whe...

Страница 182: ...ve Using as a Simple File Server P 477 Working with Other Devices P 487 Making Simple Edits to Files P 492 Working with Data in Memory Media P 507 When you select Access Stored Files function button The specified save folder is displayed Select a file in the folder for sending or printing Using as a Simple File Server P 477 Working with Other Devices P 487 Making Simple Edits to Files P 492 Workin...

Страница 183: ...Menu 1 Press 2 Edit the Quick Menu screen or buttons To change the button name and comment 1 Press Personal or Shared 2 Press Edit Buttons 3 Select a button and press Rename 4 Change the name or comment and press OK 5 Press Close To change the location of the button 1 Press Personal or Shared 2 Press Edit Buttons 3 Select a button and press or next to Move 4 Press Close Basic Operations 171 ...

Страница 184: ... Buttons 3 Select a button and press Delete 4 Press Yes Close To change button size 1 Press Quick Menu Button Display Settings 2 Select a button size from the list and press OK If you select 12 small buttons per page 5 pages the comments entered for the buttons are not shown To change the background image 1 Press Personal or Shared 2 Press Wallpaper Settings Basic Operations 172 ...

Страница 185: ...3 Select a background image from the list and press OK You can check the background image on the preview screen on the left of the list Basic Operations 173 ...

Страница 186: ...et the usage restrictions Register Shared Buttons If you set it to On all users can register edit Shared buttons If you set it to Off these operations cannot be made unless the user is logged in as the Administrator Use Personal Button If you set it to On users who logged into the machine can use Personal buttons If you set it to Off Personal buttons cannot be used Authentication Default Screen Yo...

Страница 187: ...e below to show this button on the touch panel display Showing the Switch Language Keyboard Button on the Touch Panel Display 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Display Settings 3 Press Display Switch Language Keyboard Button 4 Press On OK If you set it to On appears at the bottom of the touch panel display Switching the Language with the Button 1 Press on the touch panel display 2 Select a language from...

Страница 188: ... You can change the displayed language for each login user Configuring Accessibility Settings Personal Settings P 179 LINKS Switch Language Keyboard P 735 Basic Operations 176 ...

Страница 189: ...ings Regist Shortcut can be displayed on the top of the screen or on the Main Menu screen For more information see Customizing the Main Menu P 154 1 Press Settings Regist Shortcut on the Main Menu 2 Press Register 3 Select the button in which you want to register settings You can select the assigned button to change the registered settings 4 Select the settings to register as shortcuts and press O...

Страница 190: ... If you do not want to register settings select Unassigned Basic Operations 178 ...

Страница 191: ...se personal settings you need to log in with personal authentication management Managing Users P 556 Available settings The settings listed below can be configured The language used on the touch panel display Accessibility functions for users who have difficulty seeing or performing input operations on the touch panel display 1 Press Personal Settings on the Main Menu When the login screen is disp...

Страница 192: ...vert the screen colors and make text easier to read Press Enable Screen Magnification On OK to enable you to zoom in or out on some screens by pinching out or in Set the screen that is displayed when the machine starts If the machine is configured so that users are required to log in when it starts up Logging into the Machine P 104 Default Screen after Startup Restoration is displayed as an item i...

Страница 193: ... Sending Receiving Faxes P 181 Setting the Confirmation Sound and Warning Sound P 182 Adjusting the Volume for Sending Receiving Faxes You can adjust the volume of sounds produced for fax functions such as the communication and cancellation sounds during fax transmission or the sound to indicate that a received fax is finished printing You can also set whether or not a sound is produced for the Fa...

Страница 194: ...s produced when Fax Memory Lock sending receiving completes with an error Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception P 354 Setting the Confirmation Sound and Warning Sound The machine produces sounds in a variety of situations such as when control panel keys or touch panel buttons are pressed or when a malfunction occurs You can specify whether or not set each sound individually 1 P...

Страница 195: ...es Tone Sound produced when the amount of toner is low Forgot Original Tone Sound produced if original is remained on the platen glass after operation is finished Error Tone Sound produced when a malfunction such as paper jam or operational error occurs Job Done Tone Sound produced when an operation such as copying or scanning is complete Energy Saver Sleep Tone Sound produced when the machine ent...

Страница 196: ...hen a person is nearby If the machine does not exit sleep mode press Use Motion Sensor P 740 When You Want to Set the Auto Sleep Timer You can use the Auto Sleep Time setting to automatically put the machine into sleep mode If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep mode follow the procedure below Preferences Timer Energy Settings Auto Sleep Time or ...

Страница 197: ... consumption power during sleep mode Sleep Mode Energy Use P 739 If Low is selected for Sleep Mode Energy Use Compensate for Network Comm will be enabled in the following situations When Select Wired Wireless LAN Settings Registration is set to Wireless LAN When Use Bluetooth Settings Registration is set to On Basic Operations 185 ...

Страница 198: ...n use and destinations that only an Administrator can edit Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 188 Function type button Select the button to filter destinations by function such as fax or e mail Address list drop down list Select an address list for a department or business partner Search by Name Enter the destination name First letter button Select the alphanumeric button for the first...

Страница 199: ...y the procedure for registering destinations between supported machines For more information see Backing Up Restoring Data P 694 You can set a password to avoid unauthorized editing or deletion in the Address Book Setting a PIN for Address Book P 618 If there are destinations that you do not want to display in the Address Book or if you want to limit user access to destinations enter an access num...

Страница 200: ...rver folder location IP address and path in the Address Book as a destination To register a destination for your own use you need to log in with personal authentication management Managing Users P 556 1 Press Dest Fwd Settings on the Main Menu Register Destinations 2 Press Register New Destination 3 Select functions you want to register Select the functions to use for the destination from Fax E Ma...

Страница 201: ...garded as 10 separate address books Classifying an address list by department or by business partners makes them easier to find when specifying a destination It is also easier to manage an address list if you change their names to department name or business partner name Rename Address List P 803 You can also manage User Group Address Lists by enabling only the Administrator to register edit desti...

Страница 202: ...tings as necessary Subaddress Password Specify when sending or receiving documents to increase security by attaching a subaddress and password to all of your fax transactions Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 319 ECM TX Select On to correct image errors Select Off if the recipient s fax machine does not support the Error Correction Mode ECM Select Line If you have additional telephone lines you...

Страница 203: ...nto several sections For example 10 pages of data are transmitted twice 5 pages each time Therefore your counterpart receives two e mails However if you send data that cannot be separated into pages such as JPEG a transmission error occurs I fax 1 Specify settings as necessary Send via Server Specify whether or not to send I faxes to destinations via the mail server Select On if you want to send I...

Страница 204: ... a machine that does not support the Mode function Awaiting result is displayed when you press to check the delivery status even if the transmission is complete It continues to be displayed until the time set in Send P 775 Full Mode TX Timeout passes 2 Press Destination Conditions specify each setting and press OK Paper Size Select the paper size to use when sending Specify only A4 LTR if you send...

Страница 205: ...network If you select Windows SMB or WebDAV you can specify the storage Advanced Box of a Canon multifunction printer Using Storage Space P 475 Available only for the imageRUNNER ADVANCE series Host Name Enter the host name of the file server Check Connection Press this button after entering the host name to confirm the connection with the file server 2 Configure the file server information Ask yo...

Страница 206: ... after pressing Next in step 7 TIPS If the LDAP server has already been registered in the machine Registering the LDAP Server P 49 you can search for destinations and register them in the Address Book Press Dest Fwd Settings Register Destinations Register New Destination LDAP Server and search for destinations using Search by Conditions or Search by Name If the time setting between the LDAP server...

Страница 207: ...ddresses in another one In addition to registering destinations such as e mail addresses you can register a Mail Box machine s temporary storage space in a group Making Simple Edits to Files P 492 For example when you register a Mail Box in a group and send a scanned document attached to an e mail the document can be saved in the machine and checked later To register a group that contains destinat...

Страница 208: ...ss Book If you want to select a Mail Box machine s temporary storage space press Store in Mail Box Destinations in the Address Book and Mail Box can be registered in the same group When you select Add from Address Book 1 Select the destinations you want to register in a group and press OK Destination type button Select e mail fax I fax or file to filter the destinations displayed in the address li...

Страница 209: ...button for the first character of the destination name Press All to display all registered destinations When you select Store in Mail Box 1 Select a Mail Box machine s temporary storage space that you want to register in a group and press OK Only one Mail Box can be registered in a group 7 Press OK Close When destinations are managed by access numbers enter the access number Restricting Access to ...

Страница 210: ...0 or Address List for Admin to filter the destinations to be displayed in the address list Destination list Select the destination you want to edit or delete Details Edit Press to check or edit the settings of destinations Delete Press to delete the destination Search by Name Enter the destination name Press Search by Name again to return to the previous screen First letter button Select the alpha...

Страница 211: ...elete a destination select the destination and press Delete Yes 4 Edit the settings of the destination For details about how to edit the settings see Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 188 5 Press OK Close Basic Operations 199 ...

Страница 212: ...ing scanned data Just as with the Address Book you can register destinations in a one touch button from the LDAP server or combine destinations into a group Registering a Group in a One Touch Button P 201 1 Press Dest Fwd Settings on the Main Menu Register One Touch 2 Select the one touch number to register the destination in and press Register Edit A three digit number 001 to 200 is assigned to e...

Страница 213: ...d as a single destination You can also register a Mail Box machine s temporary storage space in a group Making Simple Edits to Files P 492 1 Press Dest Fwd Settings on the Main Menu Register One Touch 2 Select the button you want to register and press Register Edit Group 3 Press Name enter the group name and press OK 4 Press One Touch Name enter the one touch button name to be displayed and press ...

Страница 214: ...destinations using Search by Conditions or Search by Name After confirming the settings of the destination press One Touch Name enter the one touch name to be displayed press OK If the time setting between the LDAP server and the machine differs by five minutes or more a search cannot be performed Unlike the Address Book you cannot select more than one destination at a time to register The destina...

Страница 215: ...2 Select the one touch button you want to edit or delete If you want to edit the settings of the one touch button press Register Edit For details about how to edit the settings see step 6 in Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 188 Press OK after you finish editing If you want to delete a one touch button select the one touch button and press Delete Yes 3 Press Close Basic Operations 203...

Страница 216: ...e Originals 238 Copying Separately Scanned Originals Together Job Build 240 Checking the Copy Results 241 Copying Immediately by Interrupting Other Jobs 244 Functions Useful for Making and Managing Material 245 Finishing by Collating Grouping 246 Finishing with the Stapler 248 Other Finishing Functions 250 Attaching Numbers and Symbols to Copies 251 Making Booklets 254 Making Booklets Booklet Copy...

Страница 217: ...ion 291 Enlarging an Image to Make a Poster 295 Restricting Copying of Confidential Documents 300 Embedding the TOP SECRET Text Secure Watermark 301 Disabling Copying of Documents Document Scan Lock 304 Restricting Copying Using a TL Code 305 Restricting Copying Using a QR Code 307 Reducing Copying Operations 309 Recalling Previously Used Copy Settings Previous Settings 310 Changing the Settings Q...

Страница 218: ...ns useful for enhancing copy quality and operational efficiency such as adjusting sharpness to obtain clearer print results and combining multiple originals to efficiently copy them at once Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality P 222 Copying Efficiently P 233 Making Booklets and Handouts This section describes copy functions that enable you to create booklets with covers or create documents suitabl...

Страница 219: ...ribes various copy functions from document editing functions such as layout change and label making to security functions for preventing information leakage Useful Copy Functions P 264 Restricting Copying of Confidential Documents P 300 Copying 207 ...

Страница 220: ...210 Press this icon to register the current settings in Favorite Settings of or to change the buttons displayed in Registering a Combination of Frequently Used Functions P 159 Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 162 Previous Settings Press to recall the previously specified settings Recalling Previously Used Copy Settings Previous Settings P 310 Favorite Settings Register frequently used copy ...

Страница 221: ...make your copy immediately Copying Immediately by Interrupting Other Jobs P 244 Some functions cannot be used in combination with each other Buttons that cannot be selected are displayed in light gray TIPS Change the Copy Basic Features screen to the Express Copy Screen to enable quick access to each setting item Changing the Settings Quickly Express Copy Screen P 311 Copying 209 ...

Страница 222: ...ng or Black and White Copying Enlarging or Reducing Copies Selecting Copy Paper 2 Sided Copying Adjusting Image Quality of Copies Selecting Color Copying or Black and White Copying Normally the machine automatically detects whether the original is color or black and white for copying but you can also specify it For example this enables you to save toner by copying color originals in black and whit...

Страница 223: ...gardless of the color of the original Black White Copies in black K only regardless of the color of the original Two Colors Copies in black and the color you specify Select Red Green Blue Yellow Magenta or Cyan Example If you copy with black and magenta Single Color Copies with the color you specify only Select Red Green Blue Yellow Magenta or Cyan Example If you copy with red 3 Press OK Copying 2...

Страница 224: ... vertical and horizontal ratios individually Enlarging or Reducing Copies by Specifying the Copy Ratio You can enlarge or reduce by specifying the finished dimension and the output image is fit to the dimension You can specify the vertical and horizontal dimensions individually Enlarging or Reducing Copies by Specifying Dimensions You can enlarge or reduce to automatically fit the paper size selec...

Страница 225: ...ecify vertical and horizontal ratios individually press XY Ratio and then specify the ratios for each Depending on the ratio the image on the printout may be rotated by 90 degrees Enlarging or Reducing Copies by Specifying Dimensions 1 Press Copy Ratio 2 Press Set by Length 3 Enter the dimensions and press OK Copying 213 ...

Страница 226: ...d specify the dimension for each Enlarging and Reducing Copies to Fit Paper Size 1 Press Select Paper 2 Select paper and press OK 3 Press Copy Ratio 4 Press Auto OK When copying in equal copy ratio to paper that has the same size as the original the edges of the copied image may be slightly missing To avoid this reduce the size of the image by pressing Copy Ratio Fit to Page to obtain the missing ...

Страница 227: ...of the original or a size close to the original 2 Sided Copying You can copy 1 sided originals on both sides of the paper You can also copy a 2 sided original on both sides of the paper or on two separate sheets Copying 1 Sided to 2 Sided Copying 2 Sided to 2 Sided Copying 2 Sided to 1 Sided Place the original in a proper orientation as shown in the illustrations below Originals of heavy or thin p...

Страница 228: ... and back sides of the printout have opposite top bottom orientations Copying 2 Sided to 2 Sided 1 Press Options 2 Sided 2 Press 2 Sided 2 Sided 3 Set Original Type and Finishing Copy Format and press OK To specify orientation of the original and change the print orientation press Set Details Select Book Type when the front and back sides of the original have the same top bottom orientation Select...

Страница 229: ...iginal have opposite top bottom orientations Adjusting Image Quality of Copies You can adjust density of the entire document For example increasing copy density enables you to easily read faint characters written in pencil Adjusting the Density of Copies You can adjust density of the background You can clearly copy originals with a colored background or thin originals such as newspapers whose char...

Страница 230: ...e background Press to increase the density of the entire background Depending on the colors of originals sections other than the background may be affected If you press Adjust Adjust Each Color you can adjust the background density by color 4 Press OK Confirm settings before copying If you press Check Settings the list of the specified settings is displayed If you select a setting on the list and ...

Страница 231: ...Set Detection of Feeder Multi Sheet Feed as Default P 766 TIPS Reserving a copy Even while the machine is being used by someone else for copying or stopped for clearing a paper jam you can still set and scan the next originals to copy When the machine becomes available for use after finishing the previous operation the next copy starts automatically This function is called Reserved copy For exampl...

Страница 232: ...to cancel copying If you press on the control panel the copy job is paused and then the message Stop Select the Copy job you want to cancel and the list of the copy jobs are displayed You can select the copy job from the list and cancel the job by pressing Cancel Canceling Waiting Copy Jobs 1 Press 2 Press Copy Print Job Status 3 Select Copy from the drop down list and display waiting copy jobs Co...

Страница 233: ...opying stops 6 Press Close If you press on the control panel when copy jobs are waiting all the copy jobs are paused and then the message Stop Select the Copy job you want to cancel and the list of the copy jobs are displayed You can select a copy job from the list and cancel the copy job by pressing Cancel If you want to resume copying press Resume Copying Copying 221 ...

Страница 234: ...ecessary dark borders In addition you can change the visual image of the copy result by inverting colors Selecting the Type of Original for Copying P 223 Adjusting Sharpness for Copying Sharpness P 224 Erasing Dark Borders When Copying Erase Frame P 225 Inverting Colors Nega Posi P 227 Adjusting the Color P 228 One Touch Color Mode P 231 Copying 222 ...

Страница 235: ...an copy so that thin color backgrounds of pages such as magazine pages as well as the reverse sides of pages and subsequent pages are not also copied If you select Printed Image you can copy printed photographs photographs made with halftone dots with optimal print quality If you select Photo Printout you can copy photographs printed on photographic paper with optimal print quality 6 Press OK Clos...

Страница 236: ...smooth the finished image 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Sharpness 5 Adjust sharpness and press OK To sharpen blurred text adjust the control in Text to High To reduce moire when copying originals that contain printed photos such as magazines ...

Страница 237: ...amage 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Erase Frame 5 Specify erasing type and width Erasing the frames in copies of documents 1 Press Erase Original Frame and set Original Size If the size displayed in Original Size is different from the size of...

Страница 238: ...er or Sides and enter each erasing width Erasing punch holes in copies of documents 1 Press Erase Binding and select punch hole location 2 Enter erasing width If you want to adjust the width for each border independently press Erase Original Frame or Erase Book Frame and then press Adjust Independently to enter the erasing widths 6 Press OK Close 7 Press Copying starts Copying 226 ...

Страница 239: ...black on the copy and black portions appear white The printed image will look like a film negative 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Nega Posi 5 Press Close 6 Press Copying starts Copying 227 ...

Страница 240: ... the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Color Balance 5 Press or for each color to adjust the color balance 6 Perform other adjustment Adjust Saturation To set the saturation for all colors use the Low or High button for All Colors To set each color separately use the Low or High button for each color When adju...

Страница 241: ...ine Adjust Density Select a color and adjust its density level by its density area using the or button When adjustment is complete press OK Adjust Black Hue Adjust towards the side of Lighter to prevent the image from becoming over darkened Adjust towards the side of Darker if text and images are too light When adjustment is complete press OK 7 Press OK Close 8 Press Copying starts Copying 229 ...

Страница 242: ...ect a button from C1 to C4 press Register Yes OK To recall registered settings press Recall Register select a button and press OK You can change the button names of C1 to C4 Select the button to change press Rename and enter a new name To delete registered settings select the button press Delete Yes Copying 230 ...

Страница 243: ... or having a retro finish like an old photograph 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Adjust One Touch Color 5 Select the desired image quality Example adjustment Copying 231 ...

Страница 244: ...y at the same time However Vivid Colors and Tranquil Colors cannot be selected at the same time and Lighten Image Darken Image and Highlight Reproduction cannot be selected at the same time 6 Press OK Close 7 Press Copying starts The settings in Options Color Balance automatically change according to the image quality you select If you select Sepia Tone Single Color Sepia Tone is displayed in Sele...

Страница 245: ...ether or combining originals scanned with different settings to copy them together Copying Multiple Originals onto One Sheet N on 1 P 234 Copying a Facing Page Original as Two Separate Pages P 235 Copying Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals P 238 Copying Separately Scanned Originals Together Job Build P 240 Checking the Copy Results P 241 Copying Immediately by Interrupting ...

Страница 246: ...ss N on 1 5 Select the way to arrange pages and select the original size and paper size for copying Select how many pages to be arranged onto a single sheet of paper You can change the arrangement order as well To make 2 sided copies or to scan 2 sided originals to make 1 sided copies press 2 Sided Settings For more information on the setting see 2 Sided Copying in step 4 of Basic Copy Operations ...

Страница 247: ... original on the platen glass Place it face down with its corner aligned with the top left corner of the platen glass as shown below Copying a Facing Page Original onto Two Sheets of Paper P 235 Copying a Facing Page Original onto Both Sides of One Sheet of Paper P 236 Copying a Facing Page Original onto Two Sheets of Paper 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu...

Страница 248: ...nal type If you want to change the setting press Set Details Book 2 Sided Type If you select Left Right 2 Sided the left and right pages of the facing page original are copied separately onto both sides of one sheet of paper If you select Front Back 2 Sided the front side and back side of one page of the facing page original are copied onto both sides of one sheet of paper 6 Press OK Close 7 Press...

Страница 249: ...8 Press Start Copying Copying starts Copying 237 ...

Страница 250: ...nals in the feeder Placing Originals P 106 To place the originals with the same width align the top and bottom edges of the originals with the edges of the feeder as shown in the figure below To place the originals with different widths align the top edges of all of the originals with the back edge of the feeder For originals with the same widths For originals with different widths 2 Press Copy on...

Страница 251: ...guides If Different Size Originals is set for copying each original is output with the optimal size of paper If you want to copy all originals with the same size of paper or copy 1 sided originals of different sizes to both sides specify the paper with Select Paper If you do not specify Select Paper the output paper cannot be stapled properly Basic Copy Operations P 210 Optional Equipment P 1090 C...

Страница 252: ...nal Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Job Build Close 5 Press to scan the originals When scanning is complete the screen appears prompting you to scan the next original 6 Place the next original and press to scan the original Repeat this step until you finish scannin...

Страница 253: ...rs of copies you can first make a copy of your whole original to check the result and then start making the rest of the copies You can also copy only specific pages of your original 1 Place the originals in the feeder Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the copy settings as necessary Basic Copy Operations P 210 4 Press Copy Sample on the Copy Basic...

Страница 254: ...s in step 4 the number of copies minus one is printed If you select Specified Pages in step 4 the total number of copies is printed If you want to change settings Press Change Settings to change the settings Copy Sample is displayed after the settings are changed Copy a sample again Checking Scanned Images Page by Page Print Check When scanning an original you can check the scanned images by copyi...

Страница 255: ...rt Copying to start copying If you want to scan the original again To delete the scanned document and scan again select the Re Scan check box and press If you want to change settings Press Change Settings and change the settings After changing the settings press to output the check print When Print Check is specified the output becomes 1 sided copies If you want to make 2 sided copies press Start ...

Страница 256: ...nterrupt copying starts To cancel interrupt copying press Interrupt again before pressing When interrupt copying finishes the previous job restarts automatically During interrupt copying you cannot perform another interrupt copying After the current interrupt copying finishes perform the next interrupt copying TIPS You can interrupt jobs with a reserved copy job Basic Copy Operations P 210 To inte...

Страница 257: ... when copying In addition attaching serial numbers or CONFIDENTIAL to important material calls attention to the handling of the material Finishing by Collating Grouping P 246 Finishing with the Stapler P 248 Other Finishing Functions P 250 Attaching Numbers and Symbols to Copies P 251 Copying 245 ...

Страница 258: ...h 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Finishing 5 Press Collate Page Order or Group Same Pages 6 Set Offset as necessary If you do not want to use offset a function to shift the paper output position press If you selected Collate Page Order specify...

Страница 259: ...he platen glass Pressing Options Job Build on the Copy Basic Features screen enables you to use the Collate Group function even if the original is placed on the platen glass Insert a job separator between each page during a group output If you select Group Same Pages you can insert a job separator between each group For more information see Job Separator Between Groups Copy P 772 Job Separator Bet...

Страница 260: ...u Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Finishing 5 Press Staple Collate or Staple Group Next 6 Select how to staple To staple in one location in the corner of the page select Corner for the staple position To staple in two locations in the side of the page select Double for the staple position Copying 248 ...

Страница 261: ...cify the binding position This is convenient for when you want to save staples or temporarily bind the paper as you can easily tear off the paper by rubbing the crimped part 7 Press OK Close 8 Press Copying starts Depending on finishing functions the installation of optional devices is needed Optional Equipment P 1090 Depending on the paper type you cannot use finishing functions Specifications P ...

Страница 262: ...h set of paper in alternating portrait and landscape orientation Hole Punch You can make punch holes for filing Saddle Fold Using the booklet finisher you can fold the output sheets in half You can specify how many sheets to fold together and which page to start printing on Depending on the paper type you cannot use finishing functions Specifications P 1029 Copying 250 ...

Страница 263: ...nts 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark or Print Date 5 Select the printing format There are no settings to select if you specified Copy Set Numbering Watermark or Print Date in step 4 Proceed to step 6 6...

Страница 264: ... of the placed original As shown in the illustrations below if the original is placed in the portrait orientation when facing you select Upright Image if placed in the landscape orientation select Sideways Image Upright Image Sideways Image 8 Specify the content to print 9 Press OK Close 10 Press Copying starts Numbers and symbols are not printed on covers Adding a Cover and Back Cover P 262 or in...

Страница 265: ... Copy set numbers can be printed together with dates or text Print Settings Copy Set Numbering Option Settings P 763 LINKS Common P 760 Print Settings Copying 253 ...

Страница 266: ...ts with binding margins and covers In addition you can efficiently configure the settings for making booklets such as page layout 2 sided copying and adding covers Making Booklets Booklet Copying P 255 Setting Binding Margins P 260 Adding a Cover and Back Cover P 262 Copying 254 ...

Страница 267: ...or paper that can be used with this function Take note of the following For information on restrictions on paper for each option see Specifications P 1029 Depending on paper size and type booklet copying may not be available The number of sheets to be printed using saddle stitch is limited Paper that can be used for the content and cover pages is limited 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 10...

Страница 268: ...e is automatically selected according to the size of original Press Change in Layout Size and select the paper size for the booklet To make the booklet in the same print size as the original print size select the output size of the facing pages If you specify the same size in Original Size and Layout Size the print size on the booklet is automatically reduced 8 Add Cover Specify the cover settings...

Страница 269: ... it into volumes so that they can be stapled 1 Press Divided Booklet 2 Enter the number of pages per volume 3 OK Press OK When the inner pages protrude after being folded in half If a stack of paper is folded in half the inner pages protrude as the number of pages increases You can correct this paper shift Optional products are required to use this function Without correction With correction The r...

Страница 270: ...ng position and stapling position at the same time 1 Press Change Fold Stitch Position 2 Select the paper for copying and enter the saddle stitch position 3 Press OK Close OK Adjusting the folding position of the paper When you selected Fold Only in step 6 you can shift the folding position from the center 1 Press Adjust Fold Position 2 Select the paper for copying and enter the folding position o...

Страница 271: ...le you can make a booklet that has many pages with a flat spine by folding the bound portion at right angles 1 Press Saddle Press 2 Adjust the strength of the saddle press 3 Press OK Close OK 11 Press OK Close 12 Press Copying starts LINKS Adding a Cover and Back Cover P 262 Specifications P 1029 Copying 259 ...

Страница 272: ...ons on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Gutter 5 Select the margin position If Gutter is set with N on 1 Copying Multiple Originals onto One Sheet N on 1 P 234 the margin specified for the front side is applied to both sides The margin specified for the back side is not applied 6 Enter the margin width Press Front Side or Back Side and enter each margin width...

Страница 273: ...7 Press OK Close 8 Press Copying starts Copying 261 ...

Страница 274: ...ze and Type P 137 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Add Cover 5 Specify the settings for the cover and back cover To add a cover press Front Cover When copying to the cover you can set where to copy the front side the back side or both sides To a...

Страница 275: ...8 Press Copying starts LINKS Making Booklets Booklet Copying P 255 Copying 263 ...

Страница 276: ...es is completed by e mail Copying Free Size Originals P 266 Mirroring Images Mirror Image P 267 Shifting the Image P 268 Copying with the Image Repeated Repeat Images P 270 Inserting Sheets and Chapter Pages Insert Sheets P 272 Inserting Sheets When Copying Onto Transparencies P 277 Superimposing Images P 279 Combining Jobs with Different Settings Into a Single Job Merge Job Blocks P 282 Storing C...

Страница 277: ...Notifying You of the Completion of Copying by E Mail P 287 Making ID Card Copies P 289 Area Designation P 291 Enlarging an Image to Make a Poster P 295 Copying 265 ...

Страница 278: ...P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Free Size Original and press Close 5 Select copy paper Basic Copy Operations P 210 6 To copy 2 sided originals configure the 2 sided copy settings Basic Copy Operations P 210 7 Press Copying starts The enlarging or reducing setting cannot be performed...

Страница 279: ...irror Without using a computer you can easily create symmetrical graphics and diagrams 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Mirror Image 5 Press Close 6 Press Copying starts Copying 267 ...

Страница 280: ...und the image by copying to paper larger than the original or by reducing the copied image to a size smaller than the paper size When these margins are available the image can be shifted to an edge or the center of the paper 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P...

Страница 281: ... Keys and specify the moving distance Press Set in Front Side and specify the moving distance Press the up down left right buttons indicating directions and enter the moving distance using the numeric keys If you want to move the image on the back side when copying both sides the Back Side setting is needed To move to the same position as the front side press Same as Front Side To move symmetrical...

Страница 282: ...partially cut off Example of an incorrect setting Placing an original that is the same size as the output paper and repeating the image twice vertically and twice horizontally Example of a correct setting Placing an original that is one fourth the size of the output paper and repeating the image twice vertically and twice horizontally If the original size is smaller than the output paper size the ...

Страница 283: ...il the images fill the paper 6 Set blank spaces between images and press OK Enter the blank space width If you want to set a different blank space width above the image under the image to the left of the image and to the right of the image press Adjust Independently to enter each width 7 Press OK Close 8 Press Copying starts Copying 271 ...

Страница 284: ...nserting Sheets P 272 Inserting Tab Paper P 274 Inserting Sheets Specify the page to insert the sheets set the number of the sheets and select whether to print on the sheets When inserting special types of paper such as heavy paper make sure to set the paper size and the paper type properly before operation Specifying Paper Size and Type P 137 1 Load paper used for sheets insertion Loading Paper P...

Страница 285: ...ttings 9 Press OK The screen returns to the screen in step 5 and the setting you specified is shown in the first line of the list Inserting the sheet in another page Select the second line onwards in the list press Add and repeat steps 6 to 8 Editing or deleting the sheet Select the sheet from the list press Details Edit or Delete 10 Press OK Close 11 Press Copying starts If inserting the sheet on...

Страница 286: ... the tab paper include the original to be printed on the tab in the original document This feature is only available for models which support tab paper Specifications P 1029 When you print on the tab place the original as in the following illustration Do not arrange unnecessary characters or images in the tab area 1 Load tab paper Loading Tab Paper P 133 2 Place the original Placing Originals P 10...

Страница 287: ...hange Press Print Settings to set whether to print on the tab 10 Specify the page to insert the tab paper Press Page No to enter the page to insert the tab paper using the numeric keys If you will not print on the tab and insert the tab paper before the fifth page enter 5 If you print on the tab and print the fifth page of the original on the tab enter 5 11 Press OK Returns to step 7 The setting y...

Страница 288: ... tab paper when copying you can print the tab paper by itself Load the tab paper place the original to be printed on the tab paper and press Print on Tab in step 4 LINKS Inserting Sheets When Copying Onto Transparencies P 277 Adding a Cover and Back Cover P 262 Copying 276 ...

Страница 289: ...r P 112 For information on the paper size available for transparencies see Specifications P 1029 2 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 3 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 4 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 5 Press Transparency Cover Sheets 6 Select whether to copy on the insert sheet and specify the insert sheet To copy onto th...

Страница 290: ... Copying starts LINKS Inserting Sheets and Chapter Pages Insert Sheets P 272 Copying 278 ...

Страница 291: ...Common Print Settings Register Form Register 2 Select the size of the original for the form image and press Next 3 Specify scan settings as necessary For information on scan settings see Basic Copy Operations P 210 Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality P 222 Pressing Form Name enables you to set the name of the form image Even if you do not enter the form name the saving date and time is automatica...

Страница 292: ...ace the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Superimpose Image 5 Press Set in Front Side If you want to superimpose the form image on the back side when making a 2 sided copy configure Back Side To superimpose the same form image as the front side press Same as...

Страница 293: ... how the image overlaps and press OK To superimpose the form image without adjusting the density press Solid To superimpose the form image with the density decreased press Transparent and adjust the density 8 Press OK Close 9 Press Copying starts If you changed the image position Shifting the Image P 268 or set to mirror the image Mirroring Images Mirror Image P 267 the settings are applied to bot...

Страница 294: ...igure Job Separator see Paper Output Settings Job Separator Between Jobs P 761 or Job Separator Between Copies P 761 To configure Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock see Restricting Copying of Confidential Documents P 300 To configure Page Numbering Copy Set Numbering Watermark Print Date see Functions Useful for Making and Managing Material P 245 To configure Job Done Notice Store in Mail Box see...

Страница 295: ...9 Enter the number of copies and confirm the settings for the scanned documents No of Prints Enter the number of copies using the numeric keys Check Overall Settings You can check the settings specified in step 4 List of scanned documents Displays the information of the scanned documents as a list The number in appears as 1 2 3 in the order that the documents are scanned and the copies are printed...

Страница 296: ... add to the output Add from Mail Box You can call documents from the Mail Box to add to the output Making Simple Edits to Files P 492 Details When selecting documents in Details is displayed You can confirm the settings for each document Print Sample You can print a copy sample to check the result before making a large amount of copies Checking the Copy Results P 241 Clear Selection Select All You...

Страница 297: ... as necessary Basic Copy Operations P 210 4 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 5 Press Store in Mail Box 6 Select the destination Mail Box 7 Enter a file name by pressing File Name and then press OK Even if you do not enter a file name the machine automatically assigns it a name using the year month day and time the file was created For example if a fi...

Страница 298: ...you do not need the duplicate press Copy upon Storing on the screen in step 5 to clear the check box To print the stored files see Printing Files in the Mail Box P 502 You can change the time period for storing files Specifying the Mail Box Settings P 505 LINKS Making Simple Edits to Files P 492 Copying 286 ...

Страница 299: ...d from the Address Book Register the desired destination beforehand Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 188 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the copy settings as necessary Basic Copy Operations P 210 4 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 5 Press Job Done Notice 6 Select...

Страница 300: ...8 Press Documents are scanned and copying starts When copying is complete the notification e mail is sent to the specified address Copying 288 ...

Страница 301: ...e ID card on the platen glass Place the ID card face down with its corner aligned with the top left corner of the platen glass as shown below The Copy ID Card mode cannot be used when the ID card is placed in the feeder If another original is set in the feeder you cannot start copying Remove the original from the feeder 1 Place the ID card Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main...

Страница 302: ...ing is completed a screen will appear notifying you that preparations to scan the back side are complete 9 Turn the ID card over so that its back side is facing down and press to scan the back side After the back side is scanned printing starts automatically Copying 290 ...

Страница 303: ...o cut the original Use the edit pen stored in the control panel to specify the area 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options o the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Area Designation 5 Press Pen Entry 6 Press Start Scanning The original is scanned and the preview screen is displayed 7 Specify t...

Страница 304: ... difficult to specify an area because the space between text or images is small press Fine Adjust to perform fine adjustment of the area You can move the position of an individual point by selecting the desired Move Point button after selecting one of the corner points by pressing the Select Point You can specify up to four areas After specifying the first area press or to specify the second and s...

Страница 305: ... Copying starts Specifying more complicated areas You can specify areas with a complicated shape as indicated in the diagram below Press Enter Multipoints on the screen in step 5 and specify the area using 4 to 10 points After pressing the last point press Set Multipoints to confirm the area When using this method you can only specify one area Specifying a more accurate area Since the edit pen spe...

Страница 306: ...ge X1 the left edge of the area and the original s right edge X2 the top edge of the area and the original s top edge Y1 and the bottom edge of the area and the original s top edge Y2 press Numeric Key Entry in step 2 and enter the dimensions of X1 X2 Y1 and Y2 using the numeric keys Copying 294 ...

Страница 307: ...ers and the optimal paper size and number of sheets to use Refer to this table when entering the copy ratio and when specifying the paper size and number of sheets Poster size Original size and copy ratio Optimal paper size and number of sheets A3 B4 A4 A0 2 Landscape 400 B4 25 sheets B0 Landscape 346 400 A3 16 sheets A0 Landscape 282 326 A3 9 sheets B1 Landscape 244 282 B4 9 sheets A1 Landscape 2...

Страница 308: ... to an appropriate width and glue them together The width of the areas where the images overlap differs according to the copy ratio and paper size Specifying the Copy Ratio Specify the ratio for enlarging the image to create a poster The optimal paper size and number of sheets are automatically selected according to the original size and copy ratio 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Pr...

Страница 309: ...e Paper Size to Use and Number of Sheets If you want to create a poster by selecting the paper because you want to use paper in the multi purpose tray or if there is only a specific size of paper loaded in the machine it is necessary to specify the paper size and number of sheets 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 Copying 297 ...

Страница 310: ...s Poster 5 Press Number of Output Pages Next 6 Press Change select the paper size and press OK If you select the multi purpose tray specify the paper size and type to load 7 Select the number of sheets and press OK Copying 298 ...

Страница 311: ...8 Press Copying starts Copying 299 ...

Страница 312: ... the output copies are copied again the text emerges as a warning Document Scan Lock enables you to embed scan lock information on the copies and prevent them from being copied Embedding the TOP SECRET Text Secure Watermark P 301 Disabling Copying of Documents Document Scan Lock P 304 You can set the machine to always perform Secure Watermark or Document Scan Lock for every copy job Embedding Invi...

Страница 313: ...es 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Secure Watermark 5 Select the type of characters and specify detailed settings as necessary Embedding watermarks such as TOP SECRET or CONFIDENTIAL 1 Press Watermark 2 Select the type of watermark To embed arb...

Страница 314: ...t to select the date format Embedding reference numbers If you copy specifying the number of copies you can embed different five digit reference numbers set by set 1 Press Copy Set Numbering 2 Enter the starting reference number Enter in the input field of Starting Number using the numeric keys Embedding serial numbers Embed the serial number of the machine 1 Press Serial Number Embedding ID or us...

Страница 315: ...ds If you press Adjust Background Character Contrast Sample Print a sample of the pattern and background is printed Check the sample and press to adjust the density 7 Press OK Close 8 Press Copying starts You cannot change the density during output LINKS Printing With Settings Disabling Unauthorized Copying P 399 Copying 303 ...

Страница 316: ...ine a copy or print was made You can embed this information using a TL Code or QR Code The differences between these codes are the embedding methods restriction conditions and Tracking Information Optional products are required to use the Document Scan Lock function System Options P 1121 There are restrictions for paper that can be used with this function See Specifications P 1029 LINKS TL Code an...

Страница 317: ...n the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Document Scan Lock 5 Press Doc Scan Lock Information 6 Select conditions to restrict reproduction To prohibit every job for reproduction press Prohibit All To permit reproduction only when passwords are identified enter the password by pressing Password Authentication To...

Страница 318: ...ermark Information and specify the settings for embedding For information on Secure Watermarks see Embedding the TOP SECRET Text Secure Watermark P 301 Adjusting TL Code formats You can adjust the settings of a TL Code such as the size on the screen in step 4 When you cannot scan the embedded information properly adjust these settings Depending on the device used the embedded information may not b...

Страница 319: ...iginal Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Copy on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Options on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Press Document Scan Lock 5 Press Prohibit All Tracking Information is embedded together with Scan Lock Information If Allow All is selected only Tracking Information is embedded and reproduction is not prohibited 6 Press QR Code Pri...

Страница 320: ... Copying starts Embedding a Secure Watermark You can embed a Secure Watermark together with QR Codes as well For information on setting the Secure Watermark see Embedding the TOP SECRET Text Secure Watermark P 301 Copying 308 ...

Страница 321: ...alling previously used settings In addition switching the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 to the Express Copy Screen enables you to change the settings with fewer steps Recalling Previously Used Copy Settings Previous Settings P 310 Changing the Settings Quickly Express Copy Screen P 311 Copying 309 ...

Страница 322: ...enu Screen P 94 3 Press Previous Settings on the Copy Basic Features screen Copy Basic Features Screen P 208 4 Select the setting to recall and press OK When personal authentication management is in use the machine recalls the settings specified in the past by the user who is logging in to the machine 5 Press Copying starts The Merge Job Blocks setting Combining Jobs with Different Settings Into a...

Страница 323: ...ctly select 1 Sided 2 Sided or 2 Sided 2 Sided so you can finish settings with fewer steps Regular Copy Screen Express Copy Screen Switching to the Express Copy Screen P 311 Express Copy Screen P 311 Switching to the Express Copy Screen Preferences Display Settings Copy Screen Display Settings Express Copy OK Apply Set Changes Yes Express Copy Screen Current main setting status and setting buttons...

Страница 324: ...tton is displayed You can print a copy sample to check the copy result before making a large amount of copies Checking the Copy Results P 241 Function setting buttons Displays the most frequently used buttons from Options The setting status is displayed on the buttons You can change the buttons displayed currently into other function setting buttons using the icon in Previous Settings You can sele...

Страница 325: ...Originals Together Different Size Originals 344 Sending Separately Scanned Documents Together Job Build 346 Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending Previous Settings 347 Useful Functions When Sending 348 Sending at a Specified Time 349 Saving a Copy of a Sent Document 351 Various Receiving Methods 353 Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception 354 Keeping Received Documents P...

Страница 326: ...sfully Easily Conveniently You can find and choose among various sending and receiving methods right for you Fully using functions can provide you with an efficient way to send and receive faxes Sending Faxes Successfully P 335 Simplifying Sending Operations P 343 Useful Functions When Sending P 348 Various Receiving Methods P 353 Forwarding Received Documents Automatically P 358 Sending Faxes fro...

Страница 327: ...ers on the network Using Internet Faxes I Fax P 369 Using Remote Faxes P 378 TIPS Installing an option enables you to use an IP fax The IP fax is a function to send and receive faxes over a TCP IP network such as an office LAN Sending and receiving faxes between devices in the same network helps reduce communication costs as well as makes communication speed faster than normal faxes IP FAX Expansi...

Страница 328: ...n the character T tone is inserted Even if you are using pulse dial numbers following T will be sent using tone dial Press this button when using fax information services One touch button Enables you to specify a fax destination registered in one touch buttons Address Book Enables you to specify a fax destination registered in the Address Book On Hook Press to send a fax document manually Sending ...

Страница 329: ...ings Register frequently used scan settings here in advance to easily recall them when necessary Registering a Combination of Frequently Used Functions P 159 Press this icon to register the current settings in Favorite Settings of and change the button displayed in Registering a Combination of Frequently Used Functions P 159 Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 162 Previous Settings Press to re...

Страница 330: ...Registering Destinations P 186 Faxing 318 ...

Страница 331: ... destination select the desired destination using and and press De tails To delete a destination from the specified destinations press Delete Dest Specifying Destinations from the Address Book 1 Press Address Book 2 Select the destination and press OK If an access number is set when the destination is registered press Access No and enter the access number using the numeric keys The corresponding d...

Страница 332: ...ed Specifying Destinations from One Touch Buttons 1 Press the desired one touch button To specify the destination using a one touch button number one touch number press and enter the number for the desired one touch button To use the Remote Address Book press To Remote Address Book Entering Destinations Manually You can specify destinations manually that are not registered in the Address Book or o...

Страница 333: ...address or Set Details and then enter the subaddress and password Stands for International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector which is the group that makes recommendations towards the standardization of worldwide telecommunications Specifying Destinations in the LDAP Server You can search and specify destinations registered in the LDAP server 1 Press Address Book 2 Pr...

Страница 334: ...n To search with multiple conditions You can search destinations with multiple conditions Specify the first search condition press Add Search Condition and then select or or and for the next condition 5 Press Start Searching The search results are displayed To search with another condition press Delete to delete the specified settings and then set a new condition 6 Select the destination and press...

Страница 335: ...Originals You can scan two facing pages in a book or magazine onto separate pages in one operation Splitting Facing Page Originals into Separate Pages for Faxing Specifying the Scanning Size of Originals 1 Press the setting button for scanning size 2 Select the scanning size and press OK When scanning a free size original Place the original in the feeder and select Free Size When specifying the va...

Страница 336: ...1 Press Options 2 Sided Original 2 Select Book Type or Calendar Type and press OK Select Book Type for originals whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction or Calendar Type for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions 3 Press Close Scanning a Facing Page Original and Faxing it as Two Separate Pages When scanning facing pages of a book or ...

Страница 337: ...sity enables you to easily read faint characters written in pencil Adjusting the Density of the Entire Original You can adjust the density of the background You can clearly send originals with a colored background or thin originals such as newspapers whose characters and images on the back side are transparently visible Adjusting the Density of the Background You can scan the image with clear cont...

Страница 338: ...s The higher the resolution is the more finely originals can be scanned Selecting the Type of Original 1 Press Options Original Type 2 Select the type of original and press OK 3 Press Close Adjusting the Density of the Entire Original 1 Press Options Density 2 Adjust the density and press OK Press to decrease the density Press to increase the density 3 Press Close Adjusting the Density of the Back...

Страница 339: ...lity Priority 3 Adjust the density and press OK If is pressed the density of the entire background decreases If is pressed the density of the entire background increases Depending on the colors of originals sections other than the background may be affected 4 Press OK Close Adjusting Sharpness Sharpness 1 Press Options Sharpness 2 Adjust the sharpness and press OK To sharpen blurred text adjust th...

Страница 340: ...can enlarge or reduce by specifying magnification Enlarging or Reducing by Specifying Magnification Enlarging or Reducing in Standard Paper Sizes 1 Press Options Copy Ratio 2 To reduce select magnification from to enlarge select magnification from and press OK 3 Press Close Enlarging or Reducing by Specifying Magnification 1 Press Options Copy Ratio Faxing 328 ...

Страница 341: ... originals Place the original with punch holes on the platen glass Placing in the feeder may result in damage 1 Press Options Erase Frame 2 Specify the erasing type and width Erasing the frames in copies of documents 1 Press Erase Original Frame and check Original Size If the size displayed in Original Size is different from the size of the original press Change to select the size 2 Enter the widt...

Страница 342: ...u want to adjust the width for each border independently press Erase Original Frame or Erase Book Frame and then press Adjust Independently to enter the erasing widths 3 Press OK Close 5 Press Originals are scanned and sending starts To cancel scanning press Cancel or Yes When Press the Start key to scan the next original is displayed Place the next original to scan and press When scanning all of ...

Страница 343: ... Feeder Multi Sheet Feed as Default to Off Set Detection of Feeder Multi Sheet Feed as Default P 766 TIPS Saving a copy of a sent document You can set the machine so that a copy of a sent document is automatically saved in a file server The copy is converted into an electric file such as PDF and saved allowing you to easily check the contents from your computer Saving a Copy of a Sent Document P 3...

Страница 344: ...s is canceled Canceling Sending Faxes Being Sent or Waiting to Be Sent 1 Press To Status Mntr Cncl on the displayed screen or 2 Press Send Job Status 3 Select Fax A list of jobs being sent or waiting to be sent is displayed 4 Select the job to cancel and press Cancel 5 Press Yes Sending the fax is canceled LINKS Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 319 Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received...

Страница 345: ...p that makes recommendations towards the standardization of worldwide telecommunications TIPS You can save paper when printing Print on Both Sides P 788 2 on 1 Log P 788 Reduce Fax RX Size P 788 You can include information such as reception time in received documents when printing Print RX Page Footer P 789 If you set the machine to check a reception password for subaddress communication you can p...

Страница 346: ...Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents P 361 Faxing 334 ...

Страница 347: ...canning documents or a busy line etc Checking Scanned Images Before Sending Preview P 336 Stamping Scanned Originals for Sending P 337 Checking the Connection to the Recipient Before Sending Direct Send P 338 Sending Faxes Manually Manual Sending P 340 Notifying You by E Mail of the Completion of Sending P 341 Faxing 335 ...

Страница 348: ...he Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 316 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 319 5 Press Options Preview Close 6 Press Originals are scanned and the preview screen appears To cancel scanning press Cancel or Yes When Press the Start key to scan the next original is displayed Place the next original to scan and press When scanning all of ...

Страница 349: ... Placing Originals P 106 A stamp is applied on the originals placed in the feeder 2 Press Fax on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 316 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 319 5 Press Options Finished Stamp Close 6 Press Originals are scanned and sending starts Stamps a...

Страница 350: ...the destination on the Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 316 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 319 5 Press Options Direct Send 6 Press The machine dials the recipient s number When the machine connects the call originals are scanned and sending starts The machine does not start sending when the recipient s line is busy Direct Send is ...

Страница 351: ...To specify the scanning size of originals The scanning size of originals placed in the feeder is automatically set To specify the size yourself use the platen glass Faxing 339 ...

Страница 352: ...316 4 Enter the recipient s phone number 5 Make sure that you hear the recipient or a high pitched tone 6 Press Originals are scanned and sending starts Manual Sending is not available in the following cases Any of the following scan settings are specified 2 Sided Original Different Size Originals Erase Frame Job Build Delayed Send Finished Stamp Limit Functions is set to Off for any function when...

Страница 353: ... e mail needs to be specified from the Address Book Register the desired destination beforehand Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 188 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Fax on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 316 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Send...

Страница 354: ...8 Press Originals are scanned and sending starts When sending is complete the notification e mail is sent to the specified address Faxing 342 ...

Страница 355: ...ed documents together By recalling previously used settings you can simplify sending operations Sending Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals P 344 Sending Separately Scanned Documents Together Job Build P 346 Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending Previous Settings P 347 Faxing 343 ...

Страница 356: ...Place the originals in the feeder Placing Originals P 106 To place the originals with the same width align the top and bottom edges of the originals with the edges of the feeder as shown in the figure below To place the originals with different widths align the top edges of all of the originals with the back edge of the feeder For originals with the same widths For originals with different widths ...

Страница 357: ...are placing the originals with different widths 7 Press Close 8 Press Originals are scanned and sending starts When the originals with different widths are scanned together the images of the smaller size originals may be slanted because the originals cannot be fixed with the slide guides Faxing 345 ...

Страница 358: ... Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 316 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 319 5 Press Options Job Build Close 6 Press to scan the original When scanning is complete the screen appears prompting you to scan the next original 7 Place the next original and press Repeat this step until you ...

Страница 359: ...ress Previous Settings on the Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 316 4 Select the log to recall and press OK The destination and its scan settings are specified according to the selected log When personal authentication management is in use the machine recalls the settings specified in the past by the user who are logging in to the machine You can change the recalled settings be...

Страница 360: ...ng 13WK 066 This section describes how to send a document at a specified time and how to save a copy of a fax document in an external file server Sending at a Specified Time P 349 Saving a Copy of a Sent Document P 351 Faxing 348 ...

Страница 361: ...he destination on the Fax Basic Features screen Fax Basic Features Screen P 316 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 319 5 Press Options Delayed Send 6 Enter the time to send and press OK Enter all four digits of the time For example for 5 minutes past 7 enter 0705 and for 18 minutes past 23 enter 2318 7 Press Close 8 Press Originals are scanned and sent at...

Страница 362: ...eck on the Status Monitor Cancel screen whether sending is complete or not Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents P 361 LINKS Notifying You by E Mail of the Completion of Sending P 341 Faxing 350 ...

Страница 363: ...en the sender s name is not selected and the user is logged in Line Name When the sender s name is not selected the user is not logged in and the priority line set in Settings Registration is named Telephone Number When the sender s name is not selected the user is not logged in the line is not named and there is a line telephone number for the priority line set in Settings Registration When none ...

Страница 364: ...hich include a fax destination from the Scan Basic Features screen To display fax destinations on the Scan Basic Features screen it is necessary to set Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function to On Display Fax Function P 735 LINKS Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 319 Faxing 352 ...

Страница 365: ...ments in it without printing By checking and selecting documents you want to print you can save paper There is also a function to receive and keep confidential documents private Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception P 354 Keeping Received Documents Private P 356 Faxing 353 ...

Страница 366: ...3 and then follow the procedure below to specify the settings so that incoming documents can be received in memory 1 Press Fax I Fax Inbox on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 2 Press Memory RX Inbox If the password is set for the Memory RX Inbox the screen appears prompting you to enter the password Memory RX Inbox PIN P 793 Enter the password and press OK 3 Select Memory RX Inbox and set Fax M...

Страница 367: ... the document To delete the document from the Fax I Fax Inbox after sending press Delete File After Sending before sending To print all the documents in memory press Off for Fax Memory Lock or I Fax Memory Lock You can skip step 5 5 Press Start Printing Once a document is printed it is automatically deleted from memory TIPS You can specify a day of the week or the time such as on weekends or night...

Страница 368: ...ng procedures to check print saved documents To use this function Some settings such as the save location and password for documents need to be registered beforehand Forwarding Settings P 790 1 Press Fax I Fax Inbox on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 2 Press Confidential Fax Inbox 3 Select the box where documents are saved If the password is set for the box the screen appears prompting you to ...

Страница 369: ...e the URL of the save location by e mail when receiving documents Just entering the URL in the address bar of a Web browser enables you to check the contents of documents from your computer through the Remote UI Set Register Confidential Fax Inboxes P 792 LINKS Managing the Machine from a Computer Remote UI P 646 Faxing 357 ...

Страница 370: ...only match the specific conditions such as sender s fax number and received dates times For example you can set conditions such as forwarding documents from Company A to all branch offices and forwarding documents received on holidays to e mail addresses Just like with the Forwarding All method above you can also set to print forwarded documents or receive an e mail notifying you that forwarding d...

Страница 371: ...x Number Select Equals from the drop down list and enter 1111111111 If you have added lines you can also specify a particular line In this case select Fax Line 1 etc for Receive Method 5 Press Forwarding Destination and specify the destination to forward to Received documents are forwarded to the destination specified here 6 Press OK 7 Select the specified forwarding settings and press Validate In...

Страница 372: ...e Sending is enabled as a forwarding destination the screen to enter the password does not appear The registered password is used and forwarding is performed Confirm Before Sending When Fax Dest Included P 786 Selecting Forward without Conditions enables you to forward all received documents that do not meet the specified conditions to the desired destination You can forward to multiple destinatio...

Страница 373: ...ssing Print List prints a status list of sent documents displayed on the screen Pressing De tails Resend enables you to resend the documents that failed to send To specify another destination press Change Destination For documents with multiple destinations specified using the same sending method press Broadcast List select a destination and then press Resend or Change Destination You can resend d...

Страница 374: ...cting a document and pressing Cancel enables you to cancel receiving Checking If Documents Are Sent or Received Successfully 1 Press 2 Press Send or Receive Job Log To display only fax documents select Fax from the drop down list in the upper right of the screen 3 Check if documents are sent or received successfully OK is displayed in the Result column when a document was sent or received successf...

Страница 375: ...ax Activity Report prints a log list of sent and received documents displayed on the screen or sends a file Specifying an address in the log and pressing Register Destinations enables you to register it to the Address Book or one touch buttons LINKS Sending at a Specified Time P 349 Checking the Connection to the Recipient Before Sending Direct Send P 338 Sending Faxes Manually Manual Sending P 34...

Страница 376: ...d to print documents for faxing allowing you to save paper To use this function you need to install a fax driver in your computer Installing Drivers P 59 Help for fax driver Clicking Help Windows or Mac OS on the fax driver setting screen displays the Help screen For information that is not in the User s Guide including driver features and how to set up those features see Help Faxing 364 ...

Страница 377: ...nt or OK 3 Click the Enter Destination tab and specify the communication mode and fax number you are using Communication Mode Make sure that G3 is selected Fax Number URI Make sure that Fax Number is selected Fax Number Enter a fax number If you need to specify a number to dial an outside line click Detailed Settings Add Outside Dialing Prefix to G3 IP Fax Number and enter a fax number in the G3 t...

Страница 378: ...ask tray of the desktop select the file to cancel and click Document Cancel Yes If the icon is not displayed you can cancel from the control panel of the machine Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents P 361 When the department ID and password or the user name and password input screen is displayed Enter the department ID and password or the user name and password 1 Open a document...

Страница 379: ...3 Click General Settings 4 Click Add Destination Faxing 367 ...

Страница 380: ...s panel and then enter the number 6 Click Print Sending starts To cancel sending click the printer icon displayed in the Dock select the file to cancel click Delete or If the icon is not displayed you can cancel from the control panel of the machine Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents P 361 When the department ID and password input screen is displayed Enter the department ID an...

Страница 381: ...can also send and receive I faxes between devices in the same network using an office LAN To send documents to an e mail address used on a computer or mobile device see Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 Standards for I fax are defined by ITU T International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector You can send and receive with other manufacturer s machines as lo...

Страница 382: ... OK If an access number is set when the destination is registered press Access No and enter the access number using the numeric keys The corresponding destination is displayed in the Address Book To use the Remote Address Book press To Remote Address Book When Change Address Book is displayed press Change Address Book Remote Destination type buttons Pressing and displays I fax and group destinatio...

Страница 383: ...utton To use the Remote Address Book press To Remote Address Book Entering Destinations Manually You can specify destinations manually that are not registered in the Address Book or one touch buttons 1 Press New Destination I Fax 2 Select the transmission mode If you want to set the machine so that you can check the sending result of a document on the Status Monitor Cancel screen select Full If no...

Страница 384: ... another I fax address press Next Destination and repeat steps 2 through 5 In Compression Method the compression ratio of files increases in the order of MH MR MMR and shortens transmission time In Divide Data select On to divide large amounts of document data for sending If the recipient does not have the function to combine divided data select Off For the Off setting a transmission error occurs ...

Страница 385: ...ect a criterion to search for destinations from name e mail address organization name and organization unit department name etc Search conditions Select a search condition such as a destination name that contains John and a department name that begins with Development Search characters Press Set and enter search characters for the search condition To search with multiple conditions You can search ...

Страница 386: ...he receiving functions the destination before specifying the conditions In Compression Method the compression ratio of files increases in the order of MH MR MMR so shortens transmission time In Divide Data select On to divide send large amounts of document data for sending If the recipient does not have the function to combine divided data select Off For the Off setting a transmission error occurs...

Страница 387: ...TX Report enables you to set to automatically print the report listing the results of sending Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents P 361 To send files securely Using TLS communication enables you to send an encrypted file Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS P 604 When multiple sheets are fed Scanning is stopped and the message is displayed on the screen Follow the messag...

Страница 388: ...LINKS Registering Destinations P 186 Registering the LDAP Server P 49 Set Destination P 803 Faxing 376 ...

Страница 389: ... When there is no paper matching the size of the received document the document is printed according to the setting of Select Drawer Select Drawer P 788 To receive I faxes manually Press Receive Job Log Check I Fax RX On the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 pressing Fax I Fax Inbox Memory RX Inbox Divided Data RX Inbox enables you to check the receiving statuses of I faxes divided and their data si...

Страница 390: ... for server machines Send P 775 Settings for client machines Send P 775 To use this function You need to install an option beforehand System Options P 1121 Sending a Fax You can send a fax from a client machine in the same way as a normal fax Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 319 Receiving a Fax Faxes received at a server machine are converted into I faxes and forwarded to a client machine You ...

Страница 391: ...d 390 Sending Documents for Job Hold From a Computer 391 Using the Files in the Mail Box on Job Hold 393 Printing Job Hold Documents 394 Printing Documents Retained in the Machine Forced Hold Printing 396 Printing With Settings Disabling Unauthorized Copying 399 Various Printing Methods 401 Directly Printing Files without Opening Them 402 Printing From Memory Media Media Print 404 Printing 379 ...

Страница 392: ...ns used when you want to print a sample set or edit the document before printing large quantities avoid to leave or to be copied printed paper etc Printing After Checking the Document Hold P 390 Printing Documents Retained in the Machine Forced Hold Printing P 396 Printing With Settings Disabling Unauthorized Copying P 399 Printing in various environments This section introduces printing methods f...

Страница 393: ... You can print photographs PDF files etc from a mobile device such as a smart phone tablet etc For more information see Linking with Mobile Devices P 521 Printing 381 ...

Страница 394: ...en For information that is not in the User s Guide including about driver features and how to set up those features see Help Basic Printing Operations This section describes the basic flow when printing from a computer In case of Windows P 382 In case of Mac OS P 383 1 Open a document and display the print screen 2 Select the machine and click Preferences or Properties 3 Specify the print settings...

Страница 395: ...splay the charm on the right side of the screen and select Devices Print Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 only the machine Print When printing with this method some functions are restricted 1 Open a document and display the print screen 2 Select the machine 3 Specify the print settings as necessary After selecting the setting panel from the drop down list set for printing on each panel Printing 383 ...

Страница 396: ...4 Click Print Printing starts If you want to cancel see Canceling Printing P 385 LINKS Checking the Printing Status and History P 387 Printing 384 ...

Страница 397: ...nter icon on the system tray in the lower right of the screen When the printer icon is not displayed Open the printer folder Displaying the Printer Folder P 1139 and click or double click the icon for the machine 2 Select the document to cancel and click Document Cancel If you cannot find the document to cancel the document is already sent to the machine In that case you cannot cancel the printing...

Страница 398: ...1 Click the printer icon displayed on the Dock 2 Select the document to cancel and click Delete or Printing is canceled Printing 386 ...

Страница 399: ...iority Print after selecting a document Interrupt and Print and Priority Print appear Press Interrupt and Print to suspend a print job in process and immediately start printing the document selected Press Priority Print to jump the selected document to the top of the waiting list and print it after printing the print job in progress To ignore an error and continue printing press Details select a d...

Страница 400: ...LINKS Canceling Printing P 385 Printing 388 ...

Страница 401: ...unctions such as running a print job efficiently or improving the security on printing Printing After Checking the Document Hold P 390 Printing Documents Retained in the Machine Forced Hold Printing P 396 Printing With Settings Disabling Unauthorized Copying P 399 Printing 389 ...

Страница 402: ...ge print job print documents in the order of priority or print after viewing the final condition settings This function is called Job Hold To use the Job Hold mode you have to set this mode in advance Hold P 802 Note that print jobs saved on the Job Hold area are automatically deleted after a specified period of time passes You can change the period of time Hold P 802 Printing 390 ...

Страница 403: ...storage space Mail Box of the machine to the Job Hold saving area Using the Files in the Mail Box on Job Hold P 393 In case of Windows P 391 In case of Mac OS P 392 1 Open a document and display the print screen For information on displaying the print screen see Help of each application 2 Select the machine and click Properties 3 Select Hold at Output Method 4 Change the print settings as necessar...

Страница 404: ...or information on displaying the print screen see Help of each application 2 Select the machine 3 Specify the print settings as necessary and click OK 4 Select Hold at Job Processing of the Special Features panel 5 Click Print 6 Click OK The document is sent to the Job Hold saving area Printing 392 ...

Страница 405: ...Main Menu Screen P 94 2 Press Mail Box 3 Select a box and then files Editing Files in the Mail Box P 497 4 Press Edit File Move Duplicate Hold When copying instead of moving press Duplicate Files 5 Press Start Moving Duplic The document is moved copied to the Job Hold saving area from Mail Box you can use it as a print job for Job Hold The file without the printing settings cannot be moved or copi...

Страница 406: ...he selected document check the printing contents change the finishing setting etc The job ticket is JDF Job Definition Format attribute information included in a document through the entire printing process Some apply to the entire document and others apply to each page range divided by page As for editing checking the job ticket you can confirm the steps one by one Select All Max 100 Clear Select...

Страница 407: ...Details Edit Print Sample 2 Set the number of copies and partition Depending on the document the partition cannot be set 3 Press Start Printing Printing starts 4 Press Close Checking the contents of the document Display Image 1 Press Details Edit Preview Deleting a job 1 Press Details Edit Delete 4 Press Start Printing Printing starts If Delete After Printing is not selected the document remains i...

Страница 408: ...lease consult your administrator regarding the length of this time period 1 Press Print on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 2 Select a document Document list Documents which match the document type selected in the drop down list and their related information are displayed in a list format When a document is selected which indicates selected is displayed When multiple documents are selected the ...

Страница 409: ... the document may not be printed correctly Select All Max 100 jobs Clear Selection If a document is not selected in Select All Max 100 is displayed which enables you to select all the documents in the document list When documents are selected Clear Selection is displayed enabling you to cancel the entire selection Depending on settings specified in the printer driver you may not be able to change ...

Страница 410: ...use encrypted secure printing install the Encrypted Secured Print Driver Add in for Client PC to the printer driver Make sure to read the Readme txt file before installing the add in For information on sending encrypted secure print documents from a computer see the help for Encrypted Secured Print Driver Add in for Client PC and the Readme txt file Printing 398 ...

Страница 411: ...is automatically embedded Forced Secure Watermark Forced Document Scan Lock When enabling or disabling the Secure Watermark and Document Scan Lock functions for each document printed follow the followings Enabling the Secure Watermark and Document Scan Lock Windows P 399 Printing Using Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock Windows P 399 Enabling the Secure Watermark and Document Scan Lock To use the...

Страница 412: ...s on the Finishing tab 4 Select On at Secure Printing Function of Device and click OK 5 Click OK 6 Click Print or OK Printing is executed using the Secure Watermark and Document Scan Lock functions LINKS Restricting Copying of Confidential Documents P 300 Printing 400 ...

Страница 413: ...s 13WK 077 This section introduces printing method using the Remote UI or how to print a file stored in memory media Directly Printing Files without Opening Them P 402 Printing From Memory Media Media Print P 404 Printing 401 ...

Страница 414: ...he print settings as necessary If a password is set for the PDF file press Specify PDF File enter the password in Document Password When printing PDF files linked to the policy server select Specify PDF File enter the policy server user name in Policy Server User Name and the policy server password in Policy Server Password To print the PDF file which is prohibited for printing or to print PDF fil...

Страница 415: ...may occur and the file may not be transferred Printing may not be performed properly depending on the data If printing with Direct Print is not possible or the printing position deviates opening files from the application and using the printer driver may enable proper printing Printing 403 ...

Страница 416: ...hen printing after bringing data back from an outside location or when printing data you have brought with you to a business destination Using memory media For available memory media and information on inserting removing memory media see Connecting a USB Memory Device P 78 Depending on the file format an optional product may be required System Options P 1121 Printing 404 ...

Страница 417: ... Saving Separately Scanned Documents Together Job Build 439 Useful Scanning Functions 440 Skipping Blank Pages When Scanning 442 Checking Scanned Originals Before Sending Saving Preview 444 Stamping Scanned Originals for Sending Saving 445 Sending Saving at a Specified Time 446 Notifying You by E Mail of the Completion of Sending Saving 448 Scanning with the OCR Function 450 Enhancing the Security...

Страница 418: ...sic Features Screen P 408 Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 Checking Status and Log for Scanned Documents P 424 Scanning Clearly This section describes the methods to solve problems such as blurry photographs illegible text due to dark paper and the appearance of dark borders Adjusting Image Quality P 427 Adjusting Density P 428 Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning Sharpness P 429 Erasing...

Страница 419: ...ly Scanned Documents Together Job Build P 439 Efficiently Reliably Safely This section describes a variety of functions useful for increasing working efficiency avoiding operation errors and enhancing security Useful Scanning Functions P 440 Scanning Using a Computer If you are editing a scanned document in a computer save directly into the computer for convenience Using Your Computer to Scan Remo...

Страница 420: ...s to recall the previously specified settings Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 Press this icon to register the current settings in Favorite Settings of and change the button displayed in Managing the Machine P 543 Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 162 Favorite Settings Register frequently used scan settings here in advance to easily recall them when necessary Managing the Machin...

Страница 421: ...or a list of specified destinations Send to Myself Enables you to directly specify your own e mail address This button is available only when you are logged in to the machine with personal authentication management Managing Users P 556 Mobile Portal Enables you to specify a destination from the address book of a mobile device Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 Personal Folder Enables yo...

Страница 422: ...Registering Destinations P 186 Scanning 410 ...

Страница 423: ...m the Address Book of a Mobile Device To specify e mail destinations as Cc or Bcc press Cc Bcc Cc or Bcc Specify Destinations specify destinations To specify multiple destinations press Specify Destinations and specify an additional destination To delete a destination select the destination you want to delete and press Delete Dest Specifying Destinations from the Address Book 1 Press Address Book ...

Страница 424: ... you to search the destination by the name you are entering Search buttons by first letter Enables you to narrow down a search by the first letter of the destination name Specifying Destinations from One Touch Buttons 1 Press One Touch 2 Select the desired one touch button and press OK To specify the destination using a one touch button number one touch number press and enter the number for the de...

Страница 425: ...k administrator Specifying Destinations in the LDAP Server You can search and specify destinations registered in the LDAP server 1 Press Address Book 2 Press To LDAP Server When Change Address Book is displayed press Change Address Book LDAP Server If the network password input screen is displayed enter the user name and password and press OK 3 When searching destinations in the LDAP server press ...

Страница 426: ...rst search condition press Add Search Condition and then select or or and for the next condition To change conditions and search again Press Delete to delete the specified contents and specify the conditions again When searching by name Press Search by Name enter the text to search press OK NOTE You can specify attributes used when performing Search by Name for a destination from the LDAP server C...

Страница 427: ...he Canon PRINT Business application to your mobile device Utilizing the Machine through Applications P 525 1 Press Mobile Portal 2 Connect to the mobile device Linking with Mobile Devices P 521 3 Send the address from the mobile device to the machine For detailed information on operations using the mobile device see Canon PRINT Business Help You can send information including the subject message b...

Страница 428: ...ng on the file format you are selecting you can specify the additional functions including Compact When creating files by pages To scan a multiple page original as separate files by pages not as a single file press Divide into Pages enter 1 press OK If you select JPEG TIFF JPEG Auto a file for each page is created automatically TIPS Installing an option can expand functions for scanning to create ...

Страница 429: ... the resolution and press OK Depending on the file format you are selecting the resolution that you can select is limited Specifying the Scanning Size of Originals If you are scanning free size highly transparent originals or the edge of image is missing when scanning you need to manually specify the scanning size 1 Press the setting button for scanning size Scanning 417 ...

Страница 430: ...l Place the original in the feeder and select Long Original To register the scanning size If you frequently specify the scanning size with the same values register the size in Custom Register Size to quickly recall the setting for convenience Selecting Color Scan Black White Scan You can specify color when scanning original 1 Press the setting button for color 2 Select the color and press OK Depen...

Страница 431: ...less of an original s color Select this mode when color is not recognized properly such as when the original has color close to black has faint color or a smaller colored area Black White Scans in black and white regardless of an original s color This mode is automatically set for the TIFF file format Grayscale Scans in grayscale regardless of an original s color This mode uses different shades of...

Страница 432: ...r Reducing You can enlarge or reduce standard size original to other standard sizes when scanning Enlarging or Reducing in Standard Paper Sizes You can enlarge or reduce by specifying magnification Enlarging or Reducing by Specifying Magnification You can enlarge or reduce to automatically fit the paper size selected Enlarging and Reducing to Fit the Finished Paper Size Enlarging or Reducing in St...

Страница 433: ...ifying Magnification 1 Press Options Copy Ratio 2 Specify magnification and press OK 3 Press Close Enlarging and Reducing to Fit the Finished Paper Size 1 Press Options Copy Ratio 2 Press Auto specify the finished size and then press OK Depending on the resolution you are selecting you cannot specify the finished size Scanning 421 ...

Страница 434: ...hecking Status and Log for Scanned Documents P 424 To print the report for the results of sending saving On the Scan Basic Features screen pressing Options TX Report enables you to set to automatically print the report listing the results of sending saving File name When a file is sent saved its file name is automatically set based on the following format You can change the setting so that a diffe...

Страница 435: ...e orientation of the original press OK Specifying multiple destinations including faxes Setting Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function to On enables you to specify fax destinations from the Scan Basic Features screen Display Fax Function P 735 This setting is useful for specifying multiple destinations including faxes such as when saving a copy of a sent fax in a file server Checking scanned images ...

Страница 436: ...uments displayed on the screen Pressing Details Resend enables you to resend resave the documents that failed to send save To specify another destination press Change Destination For documents with multiple destinations specified using the same sending saving method press Broadcast List select a destination and then press Resend or Change Destination You can resend resave documents when Delete Fai...

Страница 437: ...electing a job and pressing Details enables you to check detailed information about the job A three digit number in the Error Code column on the information represents an error code You can check the causes and solutions for errors based on error codes Countermeasures for Each Error Code P 955 By pressing Communic Mgt Report the displayed send save log can be printed as a list or sent as a file LI...

Страница 438: ...pencil and thick magazines adjusting the density and sharpness and erasing unnecessary shadows can scan originals clearly Adjusting Image Quality P 427 Adjusting Density P 428 Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning Sharpness P 429 Erasing Dark Borders When Scanning Erase Frame P 430 Scanning 426 ...

Страница 439: ...cing Originals P 106 2 Press Scan and Send on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Press Options Original Type 5 Select the type of original and press OK 6 Press Close 7 Press Originals are scanned and sending saving starts If the phenomenon called moire striped pattern noise occurs when scanning an origi...

Страница 440: ...ptions Density 5 Adjust the density and press OK Press to decrease the density Press to increase the density To adjust the density of the background Pressing Adjust enables you to adjust the density of the background before sending saving You can clearly send save originals with a colored background or thin originals such as newspapers whose characters and images on the back side are transparently...

Страница 441: ...mage 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Scan and Send on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Press Options Sharpness 5 Adjust the sharpness and press OK To sharpen blurred text adjust the control to High To reduce moire when scanning originals that contain printed photos such as magazin...

Страница 442: ...ce the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Scan and Send on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Press Options Erase Frame 5 Specify the erasing type and width Erasing the frames in copies of documents 1 Press Erase Original Frame and check Original Size If the size displayed in Original Size is diff...

Страница 443: ...of documents 1 Press Erase Binding and select the punch hole location 2 Enter the erasing width If you want to adjust the width for each border independently press Erase Original Frame or Erase Book Frame and then press Adjust Independently to enter the erasing widths 6 Press OK Close 7 Press Originals are scanned and sending saving starts LINKS Scanning a Facing Page Original and Storing Sending ...

Страница 444: ... pages and scanning a large number of originals separately to put into one Sending Saving Different Size Originals Together Different Size Originals P 433 Scanning a Facing Page Original and Storing Sending it as Two Separate Pages P 435 Scanning to Make a Booklet Booklet Scan P 437 Sending Saving Separately Scanned Documents Together Job Build P 439 Scanning 432 ...

Страница 445: ...the originals in the feeder Placing Originals P 106 To place the originals with the same width align the top and bottom edges of the originals with the edges of the feeder as shown in the figure below To place the originals with different widths align the top edges of all of the originals with the back edge of the feeder For originals with the same widths For originals with different widths 2 Pres...

Страница 446: ...placing the originals with different widths 7 Press Close 8 Press Originals are scanned and sending saving starts When the originals with different widths are scanned together the images of the smaller size originals may be slanted because the originals cannot be fixed with the slide guides Scanning 434 ...

Страница 447: ... with its corner aligned with the top left corner of the platen glass as shown below 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Scan and Send on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 5 Press Options Book 2 Pages ...

Страница 448: ...Erasing Dark Borders When Scanning Erase Frame P 430 Scanning 436 ...

Страница 449: ... 94 3 Press Mail Box 4 Select the destination Mail Box For information on the items displayed on the screen and the method for operating them see Editing Files in the Mail Box P 497 5 Press Scan 6 Press Options Booklet Scan 7 Specify the original size and the paper size for the booklet Press Change for Original Size and select the original size If you select Auto the optimal booklet layout size is...

Страница 450: ... the same size for Original Size and Layout Size the size of the image is automatically reduced when output 8 Press OK Close 9 Press Originals are scanned and saving starts Make sure to use the same size for all originals Make sure to place portrait originals vertically because the images for even number pages become upside down if you scan them when placed horizontally Scanning 438 ...

Страница 451: ...u Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 5 Press Options Job Build Close 6 Press to scan the original When scanning is complete the screen appears prompting you to scan the next original 7 Place the next original and press Repeat this st...

Страница 452: ...n Scanning P 442 Scanning with the OCR Function P 450 Checking Scanned Originals Before Sending Saving Preview P 444 Stamping Scanned Originals for Sending Saving P 445 Sending Saving at a Specified Time P 446 Notifying You by E Mail of the Completion of Sending Saving P 448 Enhancing the Security of Electronic Files P 455 Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending Saving Previous Settings P 4...

Страница 453: ...Specifying E Mail Settings P 462 Scanning 441 ...

Страница 454: ...s as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 5 Press Options Skip Blank Originals 6 Select the color of the originals to skip To skip blank originals regardless of their color select All Colors To skip blank originals only in white select White Only Pressing Preview to select the button enables you to check the contents of the scanned originals on the preview screen Checking Scanne...

Страница 455: ...are scanned and sending saving starts If the size of the original is smaller than the scan size setting it may not be skipped correctly To check the number of pages that have been sent saved follow the procedures below Send Job Log select a document Details check the number displayed for Send Pages The status screen and Communication Management Report display the number including blank paper Check...

Страница 456: ... on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 5 Press Options Preview Close 6 Press Originals are scanned and the preview screen appears To cancel scanning press Cancel or Yes When Press the Start key to scan the next original is displayed Place the next original to scan and press When scan...

Страница 457: ...Originals P 106 A stamp is applied on the originals placed in the feeder 2 Press Scan and Send on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 5 Press Options Finished Stamp Close 6 Press Originals are scanned and sending saving ...

Страница 458: ...the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 5 Press Options Delayed Send 6 Enter the time to send save and press OK Enter all four digits of the time For example for 5 minutes past 7 enter 0705 and for 18 minutes past 23 enter 2318 7 Press Close 8 Press Originals are scanne...

Страница 459: ... on the Status Monitor Cancel screen whether sending saving is complete or not Checking Status and Log for Scanned Documents P 424 LINKS Notifying You by E Mail of the Completion of Sending Saving P 448 Scanning 447 ...

Страница 460: ...on e mail needs to be specified from the Address Book Register the desired destination beforehand Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 188 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Scan and Send on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Opera...

Страница 461: ...8 Press Originals are scanned and sending saving starts When sending saving is complete the notification e mail is sent to the specified address Scanning 449 ...

Страница 462: ... and Send on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 5 Select a file format If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files each of which consists of only one page press Divide into Pages enter the nu...

Страница 463: ...ettings the orientation of the original is detected and the document is automatically rotated if necessary before it is sent OCR Text Searchable Settings P 768 If you select OCR Text Searchable you can only send at a zoom ratio of 1 1 100 or Auto If you select PDF or XPS as the file format you can set Compact and OCR Text Searchable at the same time In that case PDF Compact or XPS Compact is displ...

Страница 464: ...ognizable Character Types and Fonts Asian Languages P 452 Recognizable European Languages and Language Groups Languages English French Italian German Spanish Dutch Portuguese Albanian Catalan Danish Finnish Icelandic Norwegian Swedish Croatian Czech Hungarian Polish Slovak Estonian Latvian Lithuanian Russian Greek Turkish Language Groups Western European ISO 2 Central European ISO 3 Baltic ISO 4 R...

Страница 465: ...alic style is not reproduced 1 The following special Greek characters can be recognized Special characters for each language can also be recognized Some special characters cannot be recognized depending on the languages Α Β Γ Δ Ε Ζ Η Θ Ι Κ Λ Μ Ν Ξ Ο Π Ρ Σ Τ Υ Φ Χ Ψ Ω α β γ δ ε ζ η θ ι κ λ μ ν ξ ο π ρ σ τ υ φ χ ψ ω Checking the Format of the Original Documents Use originals suitable for OCR process...

Страница 466: ...h page Characters may be replaced with unintended characters or be missing due to the background color of the original form and size of characters or slanted characters Paragraphs line breaks or tables may not be reproduced Some parts of illustrations photographs or seal impressions may be recognized as characters and be replaced with characters When Word is selected as the file format Scanning 45...

Страница 467: ... signatures For PDF files both encryption and digital signatures can be used Performing Encryption P 455 Adding a Digital Signature P 457 Performing Encryption Setting a password when scanning an original enables PDF files to be encrypted for sending saving This helps reduce the risk of the files being viewed or edited by others IMPORTANT To use this function Set Format PDF to PDF A to Off Format ...

Страница 468: ...the password and then specify the operations to be permitted For Allow Printing or Allow Changes specify the operations that are allowed when printing editing the file Pressing to add a check mark to Enable Copying and Extraction of Images Text allows for copying and extracting the images or text in files Pressing to add a check mark to Enable Access for the Visually Impaired activates the functio...

Страница 469: ...reen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Press the setting button for file format 5 Press PDF or XPS Add Digital Signatures If you do not log in to the machine with personal authentication management and select XPS press Add Device Signature 6 Select the digital signature and press OK Device Signature The name of the machine is added ...

Страница 470: ...le enabling the reader to check at a glance who created the file When using together with PDF file encryption If you want to set a password for Password Required to Change Permission when encrypting a PDF file select Changes but Extract Pages for Allow Changes Performing Encryption P 455 Setting S MIME enables you to send an e mail with a digital signature as well as encryption S MIME Settings P 7...

Страница 471: ...ss Previous Settings on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Select the log to recall and press OK The destination and its scan settings are specified according to the selected log When personal authentication management is in use the machine recalls the settings specified in the past by the user who are logging in to the machine You can change the recalled settings be...

Страница 472: ... in the format of entered file name_page numbers three digits file extension such as business log_001 jpg If you do not enter a file name the format will be Job numbers four digits _page numbers three digits file extension When saving a document in a file server it is saved with its file name assigned in the format of entered file name_the year month day hour minute and second the file is saved 14...

Страница 473: ...to Auto OCR automatically extracts the first text block in the document to assign for File Name Note that this operation is not available for an encrypted PDF file LINKS System Options P 1121 Performing Encryption P 455 Scanning 461 ...

Страница 474: ... file name from the mobile device to the machine Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Scan and Send on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Specify the destination on the Scan Basic Features screen Scan Basic Features Screen P 408 4 Specify the scan settings as necessary Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 5 Press Options and specify e ma...

Страница 475: ... subject body entry screen To specify reply to address 1 Press Reply to 2 Select a reply to address and press OK For instructions on how to specify destinations see Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 To specify priority 1 Press E Mail Priority 2 Select a priority level and press OK 6 Press Close 7 Press Originals are scanned and sending starts Scanning 463 ...

Страница 476: ...dows Using Color Network ScanGear 2 to Scan You can scan originals directly into your favorite application for editing This method is useful when you want to edit scanned photos in Photoshop or want to paste scanned picture into a Word document Using Color Network ScanGear 2 P 465 Using WSD to Scan Even if you do not have a dedicated scanner driver you can scan an original easily from a computer u...

Страница 477: ...Color Network ScanGear 2 Clicking Help Color Network ScanGear 2 Help on the Color Network ScanGear 2 screen displays the Help screen For information that is not in the User s Guide including driver features and how to set up those features see Help Preparing to Use Color Network ScanGear 2 After installing Color Network ScanGear 2 on a computer Installing Drivers P 59 follow the following procedur...

Страница 478: ...3 Click OK The Select Scanner dialog box closes 4 Check that this machine is selected and click Exit To check if it can be connected properly click Test Connection Scanning 466 ...

Страница 479: ...ner on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Online Now you are ready for scanning from your computer During the online state other functions such as copying are not available From a computer 4 From the application menu select the command that starts the scanning Color Network ScanGear 2 starts For more information see the instruction manual for each application 5 At Scanning Method of the B...

Страница 480: ...etailed settings such as original orientation For more information see Help for Color Network ScanGear 2 7 Click Scan Scanning an original starts When scanning is complete the Color Network ScanGear 2 screen closes and the scanned original is displayed on the application screen When the scanning operations are complete press Offline on the Scanner screen Scanning 468 ...

Страница 481: ... before using WSD Scan Preparing for WSD Scan P 469 In the following cases WSD Scan is not available ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is activated Using ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM P 591 DepartmentID Authentication is in use as a login service Changing Login Services P 1083 Preparing for WSD Scan From the control panel 1 Press 2 Press Preferences Network TCP IP Settings WSD Settings 3 Press On for Use WSD Sc...

Страница 482: ... machine and click Next Follow the on screen instructions to operate If this machine is not displayed a Firewall setting problem may exist For more information see the instruction manual of the computer Scanning 470 ...

Страница 483: ...ng WSD From the control panel 1 Place the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press WSD Scan on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Allow Remote Scan Now you are ready for scanning from your computer From a computer 4 Click Start All Programs Windows Fax and Scan 5 Click Scan 6 Click New Scan Scanning 471 ...

Страница 484: ...ttings as necessary Selecting the type of original from the Profile drop down list enables you to make adjustments for the optimal image quality For originals mainly consisting of text select Document For originals consisting of photographs only select Photo Default From the File type drop down list select the file format for the saved image of the scanned original To check the scanned image with ...

Страница 485: ...eniently recall them when scanning Select Add profile from the Profile drop down list Specify the scan settings you want to register Enter a name in the Profile name text box Click Save Profile Sending the document to a computer using WSD You can also send the scanned document to computers on the network that support WSD In this case press WSD Scan on the Main Menu select the computer you want to ...

Страница 486: ... with Files and Folders in Other Devices 489 Printing Files in Other Devices 490 Making Simple Edits to Files 492 Saving Documents in the Mail Box 493 Editing Files in the Mail Box 497 Printing Files in the Mail Box 502 Sending Files in the Mail Box 504 Specifying the Mail Box Settings 505 Working with Data in Memory Media 507 Saving Documents in Memory Media 508 Working with Files and Folders in ...

Страница 487: ... Using as a Simple File Server P 477 Saving Documents in the Advanced Box P 478 Accessing the Advanced Box from a Computer P 479 Working with Files and Folders in the Advanced Box P 481 Creating the Personal Space in the Advanced Box P 484 Working with Other Devices You can access a shared storage Advanced Box of other Canon multifunction printers from your machine for remote operations of files s...

Страница 488: ...ncluding printing and sending files to a computer via e mail Making Simple Edits to Files P 492 Saving Documents in the Mail Box P 493 Editing Files in the Mail Box P 497 Printing Files in the Mail Box P 502 Sending Files in the Mail Box P 504 Working with Data in Memory Media Even if the machine is not connected to a network the use of memory media allows for easy data exchange with computers Wit...

Страница 489: ...forehand Setting the Advanced Box of the Machine P 65 To use the Personal Space both the personal authentication management and Personal Space settings need to be specified beforehand Creating the Personal Space in the Advanced Box P 484 As the Advanced Box is intended for use on a network it normally requires a user authentication during use If the login screen is displayed when accessing the Adv...

Страница 490: ... the screen and instructions on how to use them see Working with Files and Folders in the Advanced Box P 481 5 Display the save location and press Scan 6 Specify the scan settings as necessary For scan settings see Setting Screen and Operations for Scanning to Save P 514 7 Press Originals are scanned and saved as files To cancel scanning press Cancel or Yes When Press the Start key to scan the nex...

Страница 491: ...Opened Using SMB P 479 When Opened Using WebDAV P 479 When Opened Using SMB 1 Open Windows Explorer 2 Enter the address of the Advanced Box in the address bar and press the ENTER key on the computer keyboard To access the Shared Space enter host name or IP address of this machine share To access the Personal Space enter host name or IP address of this machine users When login is successful the Adv...

Страница 492: ...d Box is displayed If you are using an IPv6 address enclose the address with If TLS is in use enter https instead of http when entering the address When the login screen is displayed enter the user name and password Using Storage Space 480 ...

Страница 493: ...ove to the upper level from the current one Advanced Box Details Enables you to check the locations URL of the Shared Space and the Personal Space and the available memory of the Advanced Box Edit Personal Space Enables you to create rename and delete the Personal Space Creating the Personal Space in the Advanced Box P 484 4 Operate files and folders Location currently displayed Displays the locat...

Страница 494: ...rinting Files in the Advanced Box P 485 Folder Operations Press to create or delete folders Edit File Press to rename or delete files Display Image Displays the preview image of a file De tails Displays the size and the updated date time of a file Clear Selection Deselects all the files selected in Display switch button Press Up to move to the upper level from the current one To update the content...

Страница 495: ...older name and press OK 4 Press OK To change a folder name 1 Display a folder whose name you want to change and press Folder Operations 2 Select a folder and press Details 3 Press Rename Folder 4 Enter a folder name and press OK 5 Press OK To check the detailed information of a folder 1 Display a folder whose information you want to check and press Folder Operations 2 Select a folder and press De ...

Страница 496: ...onal Space to On Setting Advanced Box to Public P 66 1 Press Access Stored Files on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 2 Press Advanced Box 3 Press Edit Personal Space Create Personal Space When a Personal Space already exists Delete Personal Space is displayed instead of Create Personal Space Each user is allowed to create only one Personal Space but you can create multiple folders in the Person...

Страница 497: ...in the Advanced Box P 481 4 Select a file and press Print If you select PDF or XPS files proceed to step 6 5 Select the paper source and press OK 6 Enter the number of prints using the numeric keys If you select multiple files in step 4 press Change No of Copies and enter the number of prints 7 Specify the print settings as necessary For print settings see Setting Screen and Operations for Printin...

Страница 498: ...om this screen Working with Files and Folders in the Advanced Box P 481 You can select and print up to 32 files in the same folder at a time However you cannot select files with different file formats at the same time LINKS Saving Documents in the Advanced Box P 478 Loading Paper P 112 Using Storage Space 486 ...

Страница 499: ...dows server from your machine to perform file operations such as printing Available only for imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machines connected to a network To access other devices some settings need to be specified beforehand Connecting to the Other Devices P 68 To prevent unauthorized operations from being performed the Advanced Box that is open to a network requires a user authentication The machine...

Страница 500: ...g with Files and Folders in Other Devices P 489 5 Display the save location and press Scan 6 Specify the scan settings as necessary For scan settings see Setting Screen and Operations for Scanning to Save P 514 7 Press Originals are scanned and saved as files When canceling scanning press Cancel or Yes When Press the Start key to scan the next original is displayed Place the next original to scan ...

Страница 501: ...ork 3 Select the device you want to access Up Press to move to the upper level from the current one Check Storage Information Selecting a device and pressing Details enables you to check the information protocol path of the device 4 Operate files and folders For information on the items on the screen and instructions on how to use them see step 4 of Working with Files and Folders in the Advanced B...

Страница 502: ...PS files proceed to step 6 5 Select the paper source and press OK 6 Enter the number of prints using the numeric keys If you select multiple files in step 4 press Change No of Copies and enter the number of prints 7 Specify the print settings as necessary For print settings see Setting Screen and Operations for Printing Saved Files P 516 To print a PDF file with a password press Options Password t...

Страница 503: ...s You can select and print up to 32 files in the same folder at a time However you cannot select files with different file formats at the same time LINKS Saving Documents in Other Devices P 488 Loading Paper P 112 Using Storage Space 491 ...

Страница 504: ...on via e mail and the like In addition as files saved from a printer driver or from Store in Mail Box in the Copy function contain print settings specified when saving such as two sided printing you can print the files without specifying the print settings The machine is set to automatically delete saved files after a certain period of time You can extend the period of time or choose to store file...

Страница 505: ...ying settings Scanning from the Machine to Save P 493 Saving Data on Computers P 494 Scanning from the Machine to Save 1 Set the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Scan and Store on the Main Menu Main Menu Screen P 94 3 Press Mail Box 4 Select the box to save in For information on the items on the screen and instructions on how to use them see Editing Files in the Mail Box P 497 5 Press Scan...

Страница 506: ...originals press Start Storing to save the file Saving Data on Computers For Windows P 494 For Mac OS P 495 1 Open a file and display the print screen 2 Select the machine and click Preferences or Properties 3 Select Store from Output Method and click Yes 4 Specify the detailed settings for saving and click OK Using Storage Space 494 ...

Страница 507: ...bles you to select multiple boxes and save the same files in each box The box name registered in the machine can be applied to the printer driver For details see Help of the printer driver 5 Specify the print settings as necessary and click OK 6 Click Print or OK The file is saved in the box selected in step 4 1 Open a file and display the print screen 2 Select the machine and specify the print se...

Страница 508: ...es Select the box you want to save in Clicking while holding down the COMMAND key on the computer keyboard enables you to select multiple boxes and save the same files in each box 6 Click OK The file is saved in the box selected in step 5 LINKS Printing From a Computer P 382 Canceling Printing P 385 Using Storage Space 496 ...

Страница 509: ...ou can also enter the box number using the numeric keys to directly specify the desired box Mail box list Displays icons indicating the statuses of the boxes box numbers box names and the amount of memory consumed by each box Icon types displayed are as follows Mail box with files saved Mail box with no files saved Mail box with passwords set Specifying the Mail Box Settings P 505 Used Displays th...

Страница 510: ...ll the print settings for each file are canceled Total number of files and number of selected files Displays the total number of files saved and the number of files in the selection Print List Prints a list of documents saved in the box displayed You can check the names paper sizes and the number of pages of documents Print Prints files Printing Files in the Mail Box P 502 Send Sends files via e m...

Страница 511: ...s OK To delete a file 1 Select a file and press Edit File Delete 2 Press Yes To scan and save documents 1 Set the original Placing Originals P 106 2 Press Edit File Add Files Scan and Store 3 Specify the scan settings as necessary and press For scan settings see Setting Screen and Operations for Scanning to Save P 514 To move duplicate files to another box 1 Select a file and press Edit File Move ...

Страница 512: ...file into another one The files in the same box can be inserted Note that if the resolution settings of each file do not match you cannot insert files 1 Select the file where you want to insert another file and press Edit File Insert Pages 2 Specify the file to insert and the position to insert it and press Next Enter the page number where you want to insert the file using the numeric keys 3 Enter...

Страница 513: ... one page press Single Page and enter the corresponding page number To delete multiple pages at the same time press Multiple Pages First Page or Last Page and enter the corresponding page numbers 3 Press Start Deleting Yes Using Storage Space 501 ...

Страница 514: ...the items on the screen and instructions on how to use them see Editing Files in the Mail Box P 497 4 Select a file and press Print 5 Enter the number of prints using the numeric keys If you select multiple files in step 4 press Change No of Copies and enter the number of prints 6 Specify the print settings as necessary For print settings see Setting Screen and Operations for Printing Saved Files ...

Страница 515: ...w image and print from this screen Editing Files in the Mail Box P 497 You can select and print up to 32 files in one mail box at a time However if there are reserved jobs in the mail box the number of files you can select and print varies depending on the number of files reserved LINKS Saving Documents in the Mail Box P 493 Loading Paper P 112 Using Storage Space 503 ...

Страница 516: ...ee Editing Files in the Mail Box P 497 4 Select a file and press Send 5 Specify the destination and the settings for sending as necessary For details see the following but note that they include some settings that you cannot specify in this step Faxing P 314 Scanning P 406 To delete the selected file after sending press Delete File After Sending 6 Press Start Sending The selected file is sent to t...

Страница 517: ... are not allowed If you forget your password there is no way to retrieve it Be careful not to forget the password Time Until File Auto Delete Press to change the period of time until saved files are automatically deleted When set to 0 files will not be deleted URL Send Settings Notifies you by e mail of the location URL of the box where files are saved This setting is helpful for checking saved fi...

Страница 518: ...le Auto Delete and Print When Storing from Printer Driver can be specified for all boxes at the same time See Time Until File Auto Delete P 797 and Print When Storing from Printer Driver P 797 Using Storage Space 506 ...

Страница 519: ...u to save scanned data or print files in the media Rename files or delete unwanted files from the machine so that you can manage and organize data in the media without using a computer For available memory media or inserting removing memory media see Connecting a USB Memory Device P 78 Using Storage Space 507 ...

Страница 520: ...and instructions on how to use them see Working with Files and Folders in Memory Media P 509 5 Display the save location and press Scan 6 Specify the scan settings as necessary For scan settings see Setting Screen and Operations for Scanning to Save P 514 7 Press Originals are scanned and saved as files To cancel scanning press Cancel or Yes When Press the Start key to scan the next original is di...

Страница 521: ... desired memory media Up Press to move to the upper level from the current one Check Media Information Enables you to check the serial number and the free space of the memory media Press to remove the memory media Be sure to press this button to safely remove the memory media For instructions on how to remove see Connecting a USB Memory Device P 78 4 Operate files and folders Files and folders sav...

Страница 522: ... Press to create a new folder Edit File Press to rename or delete files Display Image Displays the preview image of a file Details Displays the size and the updated date time of a file Clear Selection Deselects all the files selected in Display switch button Press Up to move to the upper level from the current one To update the contents of the displayed screen press Update To change a file name 1 ...

Страница 523: ...ss Create Folder 3 Enter a folder name and press OK 4 Press OK To change a folder name 1 Display a folder whose name you want to change and press Folder Operations 2 Select a folder and press Details 3 Press Rename Folder 4 Enter a folder name and press OK 5 Press OK To check the detailed information of a folder 1 Display a folder whose information is to be checked and press Folder Operations 2 Se...

Страница 524: ...ect PDF or XPS files proceed to step 6 5 Select the paper source and press OK 6 Enter the number of prints using the numeric keys If you select multiple files in step 4 press Change No of Copies and enter the number of prints 7 Specify the print settings as necessary For print settings see Setting Screen and Operations for Printing Saved Files P 516 To print a file with a password press Options Pa...

Страница 525: ...ou can select and print up to 32 files in the same memory media at a time However you cannot select files with different file formats at the same time LINKS Saving Documents in Memory Media P 508 Loading Paper P 112 Using Storage Space 513 ...

Страница 526: ...tons Displays setting status such as resolution magnification and scanning size Make sure to confirm the settings in order to scan properly To change the settings press the button under the display section Favorite Settings Register frequently used scan settings here in advance to easily recall them when necessary Restore Default Settings Changes scan setting into setting values registered in Chan...

Страница 527: ... 256 characters causing the file to not be specified If you enter a file name that already exists in the save location 1 to 9 is added to the file name for example a 1 pdf except for the files in the Mail Box If Divide into Pages is selected when specifying the file format a three digit page number is added to the end of a file name For a file with the name a pdf for example the file is divided in...

Страница 528: ... settings you are specifying the Print Sample button is displayed which enables you to check the print result of a file Number of selected files Displays the number of selected files When selecting multiple files the Change No of Copies button appears To change the number of prints press this button Change Print Settings Print settings registered in Change Default Settings are applied to the files...

Страница 529: ...anceled and the file is printed using the settings registered in Change Default Settings Access Stored Files Settings Change Default Settings P 797 Restore Default Settings Changes print settings into setting values registered in Change Default Settings Access Stored Files Settings Change Default Settings P 797 Options Enables you to specify the settings of functions that are not displayed in For ...

Страница 530: ...ster the current settings in Favorite Settings of or to change the factory default print settings Favorite Settings Register frequently used scan settings here in advance to easily recall them when necessary Print Range Specify this setting when you select a file with two pages or more To print all pages of a file press All Pages or to specify the pages to print press Specified Pages and enter the...

Страница 531: ...uttons To change the settings press the desired button Cancel Cancels print settings and returns to the file selection screen LINKS Printing Files in the Advanced Box P 485 Printing Files in Other Devices P 490 Printing Files in the Mail Box P 502 Printing Files in Memory Media P 512 Using Storage Space 519 ...

Страница 532: ...ectly Access Point Mode 523 Utilizing the Machine through Applications 525 Using AirPrint 526 Printing with AirPrint 530 Scanning with AirPrint 532 Faxing with AirPrint 534 If AirPrint Cannot Be Used 536 Using Google Cloud Print 537 Managing the Machine by the Remote Control 540 Linking with Mobile Devices 520 ...

Страница 533: ...he machine from mobile devices via remote control to confirm printing status and change the settings of the machine Connecting with Mobile Devices P 522 Connecting Directly Access Point Mode P 523 Utilizing the Machine through Applications P 525 Managing the Machine by the Remote Control P 540 Depending on your mobile device the machine may not operate correctly Linking with Mobile Devices 521 ...

Страница 534: ...connected mobile devices etc from here Connecting with Wireless LAN Just as connecting a computer to the machine connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router Connecting to a Wireless LAN P 24 Connecting Directly Directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly without using wireless LAN It is possible to immediately connect to the machine wirelessly even outside of a ...

Страница 535: ...ly Access Point Mode Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order Set the machine to Access Point Mode Preferences Network Direct Connection Settings set Use Direct Connection to On When connecting using Bluetooth LE press Preferences Network Bluetooth Settings set Use Bluetooth to On When connecting using NFC refer to the NFC Kit User s Guide Put the machine into the c...

Страница 536: ...e and the mobile device Press Disable on the Direct Connection screen Connection with the mobile device stops While connecting via direct connection you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the mobile device you are using You can connect with up to five mobile devices using direct connection If a wireless connection from a mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while th...

Страница 537: ...s and procedures see the Canon website http www canon com Printing by Mopria The machine also supports Mopria Using Mopria enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android using common operations and settings even if manufacturers and models differ For example if you are using printers supporting Mopria made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria that is located in a...

Страница 538: ...iguring AirPrint Settings You can register information including the name of the machine and installation location that is used for identifying the machine The settings required for using AirPrint can be configured remotely using the Remote UI Configuring Settings Using the Remote UI 1 Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Settings Registration ...

Страница 539: ...istered in Device Information Settings Device Management in Management Settings Settings Registration the registered name is displayed Latitude Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed Longitude Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed 5 Restart the machine Turn OFF the machine wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON Configuring Settings from...

Страница 540: ...s that support AirPrint Displaying the Screen for AirPrint You can display the screen for AirPrint on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view information about consumables such as paper and toner cartridge Further you can configure security function settings Displaying from a Mac 1 Click System Preferences in the Dock on the desktop Printers Scanners 2 Select the machine ...

Страница 541: ...e used for TLS Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS P 604 Key and Certificate Settings Enables you to generate and install a key and certificate or request a certificate to be issued Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS P 604 Checking Consumables and the Device Version You can check information regarding the paper sources of the machine the amount of toner remaining for each color an...

Страница 542: ...e machine are connected to the same LAN An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB Printing from an iPad iPhone or iPod touch 1 Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Apple device For how to make sure of this see Setting up the Network Environment P 19 For information on the Direct...

Страница 543: ...rk Environment P 19 2 Add the machine to the Mac from System Preferences Printers Scanners If the machine has already been added for scanning or sending faxes this operation is not required 3 Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box How to display the print dialog box differs for each application For more information see the instruction manual for the application you are ...

Страница 544: ...et Use Network Link Scan to On TCP IP Settings Use Network Link Scan P 745 A firmware update may also be required Updating the Firmware P 699 You cannot scan while settings for operations are being made or while the machine is performing any operation whatsoever Scanning from a Mac 1 Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac For how to make sure of this see Setting up the Ne...

Страница 545: ... The Scanner screen is displayed 6 Configure the scan settings as necessary 7 Click Scan The document is scanned and the image is displayed Linking with Mobile Devices 533 ...

Страница 546: ...ke sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac For how to make sure of this see Setting up the Network Environment P 19 2 Add the machine to the Mac from System Preferences Printers Scanners If the machine has already been added for printing or sending faxes this operation is not required 3 Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box How to display the print ...

Страница 547: ...6 Click Fax Fax sending starts Linking with Mobile Devices 535 ...

Страница 548: ...same LAN If the machine is turned ON it may take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled Make sure that the machine is configured to enable operations from a computer even when no department ID and password are entered For printing make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and the machine has sufficient toner leve...

Страница 549: ...ess A Google account is required to use Google Cloud Print If you do not have a Google account create one on the Google website Checking the Settings of the Machine Check the following before configuring cloud printing Make sure that the IPv4 address is specified for the machine and that the machine is able to communicate with computers on a network Connecting to a Wireless LAN P 24 Connecting to ...

Страница 550: ...he machine delete its registration before registering it again 7 Click the URL link displayed for URL for Registration 8 Follow the instructions on the screen to register the machine Printing can now be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print such as Google Chrome Gmail and Google Docs For information on the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print check the Google C...

Страница 551: ...or Google Chrome Before registration is complete the following confirmation screen will appear on the display of the machine Press Yes to complete the registration For information on registration methods see the manual of your device or the Google Cloud Print home page Linking with Mobile Devices 539 ...

Страница 552: ... the machine on the Web browser to start the Remote UI Prior to operation confirm the IP address set for the machine Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv4 Address P 34 Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv6 Address P 37 If it is unknown ask your network administrator 1 Start the Web browser of the mobile device 2 Enter http the IP address of the machine in the address entry column For a smart...

Страница 553: ...Settings 585 Using Department IDs to Manage Printing or Remote Scanning via Computer 587 Configuring Personal Folders 588 Using ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 591 Deleting User Setting Information 592 Configuring the Network Security Settings 594 Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls 596 Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings 597 Specifying MAC Addresses in Firewall Settings 600 Setting a P...

Страница 554: ... Request CSR 671 Managing Stored Files 674 Managing the Logs 680 Importing Exporting the Setting Data 682 Importing Exporting All Settings 684 Importing Exporting the Settings Individually 688 Backing Up Restoring Data 694 Updating the Firmware 699 Setting Scheduled Updates 700 Displaying Messages from the Administrator 702 Installing System Options 704 Synchronizing Settings for Multiple Canon Mu...

Страница 555: ...e that the machine is used safely Configuring the Basic Management System Applying a Security Policy to the Machine P 545 Managing Users P 556 Configuring the Network Security Settings P 594 Managing Hard Disk Data P 724 Limiting Risks from Negligence Operation Errors and Misuse Restricting the Machine s Functions P 616 Increasing the Security of Documents P 629 Ensuring Effective Management Manag...

Страница 556: ...em Options P 704 Initializing All Data Settings P 727 This machine is compliant with IEEE Std 2600 2008 hereinafter referred to as IEEE 2600 a global information security standard for multifunctional peripherals and printers IEEE 2600 P 729 Managing the Machine 544 ...

Страница 557: ...tiple settings related to security policy can be managed in batch via the Remote UI and a dedicated password can be set up so that only the information security administrator is able to modify the settings Before configuring these settings make sure that the Remote UI is set up to use TLS Starting the Remote UI P 648 The purpose of the security policy settings is to manage all functions and settin...

Страница 558: ... Confirm Security Policy page is displayed 4 Click Password Settings 5 Enter a password and click OK Use alphanumeric characters or symbols for the password Make sure that the password is entered correctly and enter the new password again in Confirm To change the password Enter the current password in Old Password and the new password in New Password then enter the new password again in Confirm an...

Страница 559: ...your local authorized Canon dealer If a password is set it will be required for authentication in order to initialize the machine After authentication is performed and the machine is initialized the password will be deleted Initializing All Data Settings P 727 Managing the Machine 547 ...

Страница 560: ... Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click Security Settings Security Policy Settings 4 Click Security Policy Settings The setting precautions are displayed Make sure to read and understand the contents If no password has been configured Using a Password to Protect the Security Policy Settings P 546 read the contents and click OK to proceed to step 6 5 Enter the...

Страница 561: ...evice You can import and export the machine s security policy settings By applying the same policy to multiple devices you can manage all of the devices in your organization using identical settings Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 682 Only Canon devices that are compatible with security policy settings The security policy settings can only be imported if the security policy setting password...

Страница 562: ...tures for SMS WebDAV server functions In SMB Server Settings the Require SMB Signature for Connection and Use SMB Authentication options are set to On and Use TLS in WebDAV Server Settings is set to On When the machine is used as an SMB server or WebDAV server digital certificate signatures are verified during communication SMB Server Settings P 742 WebDAV Server Settings P 798 Always verify serve...

Страница 563: ... Print Settings is set to Off It is not possible to perform RAW printing RAW Print Settings P 743 Restrict FTP port port number 21 In FTP Print Settings Use FTP Printing is set to Off It is not possible to perform FTP printing FTP Print Settings P 743 Restrict WSD port port number 3702 60000 In WSD Settings Use WSD Use WSD Browsing and Use WSD Scan Function are all set to Off It is not possible to...

Страница 564: ...Management Use User Authentication for Authentication Management is set to On Picture Login in Use User Authentication is set to Off Login Screen Display Settings is set to Displ When Dev Operation Start Restrict Job from Remote Device without User Auth is set to On Allow unregistered users to log in as Guest User for Login for Unregistered Users is set to On and Guest Authentication Mode becomes ...

Страница 565: ...ed three or more times consecutively Prohibit Use of 3 or More Identical Consecutive Char P 819 Force use of at least 1 uppercase character Use at Least 1 Uppercase Character is set to On Passwords are required to include at least one uppercase alphabetic character Use at Least 1 Uppercase Character P 819 Force use of at least 1 lowercase character Use at Least 1 Lowercase Character is set to On P...

Страница 566: ... a USB memory device and store it in a secure place to prevent loss or theft The security functions provided by TPM do not guarantee complete protection of the data and hardware Log You can periodically survey how the machine is used by requiring logs to be recorded Force recording of audit log Save Operation Log is set to On Display Job Log is set to On Retrieve Job Log with Management Software i...

Страница 567: ...97 Display Print When Storing from Printer Driver P 797 Forced Hold P 800 Print When Storing from Printer Driver P 797 Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception P 354 Sending Receiving Policy Limit the sending operations for destinations and limit how received data is processed Allow sending only to registered addresses In Limit New Destination the Fax E Mail I Fax and File options...

Страница 568: ... manage groups depending on the device used for authentication User Management Functions User management can provide the advantages described below To protect important data and reduce costs you can limit access to the machine and define the range of operations that are available to users Preventing Unauthorized Use by Third Parties Because machine usage is limited to approved users information le...

Страница 569: ...tions Optimizing the Settings for Each User Various settings can be saved for each user and applied at login Users can create Personal buttons in the Quick menu and they can specify a Personal folder on the network It is also possible for the machine to remember passwords once they have been entered enabling users to log in again without entering the password Associating User Accounts with Keychai...

Страница 570: ...elow can be used for personal authentication management Each type of authentication device requires a different environment and settings Confirm your system environment before configuring Specifications P 1029 Local Device This Machine User information is managed on the database inside the machine User information is registered and edited via the control panel or the Remote UI When the local devic...

Страница 571: ...ce can log in to the machine IC Card Authentication This method uses an IC card for user authentication To log in users simply touch an IC card to the reader eliminating the need to remember a user name and password Optional equipment is required in order to use this function For more information contact your local authorized Canon dealer Mobile Authentication Perform user authentication with a mo...

Страница 572: ...information on the local device and specify the authentication server Registering User Information in the Local Device P 561 Registering Server Information P 565 Select the user authentication system Configuring the Authentication Functions P 571 Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing Faxing Remote Scanning via a Computer P 580 Make sure to log out after you finish using the Remote UI If...

Страница 573: ...isabling Administrator Administrator is registered as the default administrator name user name This user cannot be deleted but it can be disabled after adding a user with Administrator privileges Logging in as an Administrator P 15 4 Click Add User To edit user information Click Edit for the user information that you want to edit make the necessary changes and click Update To delete user informati...

Страница 574: ...ress Enter the e mail address that the user is using on devices such as computers When sending scanned documents this address will be displayed along with the sender s name This address is also used when sending documents by using Send to Myself Icon Specify the icon image that the user selects when logging in via Picture Login Use an image that will be easy to find when displayed in a list It is ...

Страница 575: ...at are available to general users along with the ability to change settings related to basic functions such as copying printing sending and receiving NetworkAdmin Allows operations that are available to general users along with the ability to change network related settings ID to Register for IC Card 1 ID to Register for IC Card 2 Verification Value When using IC card authentication specify the ca...

Страница 576: ...edure enables you to register user information just one time Specifying Timing to Apply enables you to reflect user information at a desired time If the user information cannot be reflected at the specified time because the machine is turned OFF or is completely in sleep mode the information is reflected when the machine recovers Check for unregistered Department IDs If you click Check Unregistere...

Страница 577: ...uct a connection test as necessary 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click User Management Authentication Management 4 Click Server Settings Edit 5 Set the authentication server and domain information Use Active Directory Select the check box when using Active Directory Set Domain List Managing the Machine 5...

Страница 578: ...duces the amount of time it takes for the same user to log in next time Use LDAP server Select the check box when using an LDAP server Period Before Timeout Specify the time limit for attempting to connect to the authentication server and the time limit for waiting for a response When Save authentication information for login users is enabled if you cannot log in within the time limit specified he...

Страница 579: ...er of reissues and PIN Login Name Displayed As E Mail Address Specify the data fields attribute names for the login name display name and e mail address of each user account on the Active Directory server Example sAMAccountName cn mail 5 Click Connection Test to confirm that connection is possible and then click Add To edit server information Click Edit for the server information that you want to ...

Страница 580: ...authentication information Clear the check box to allow anonymous access to the LDAP server only if the LDAP server is set to allow anonymous access When using the user name and password for authentication select the check box and enter values for User Name and Password Starting Point for Search Specify the location level to search for user information when LDAP server authentication is performed ...

Страница 581: ...in via the control panel Select the Save user information when using keyboard authentication check box to save the information of users who log in using keyboard authentication to the cache After the settings are configured the saved authentication information can be used for login even if the machine is unable to connect to the server Change the Retention Period setting as necessary User Attribut...

Страница 582: ...o match the criteria The Conditions settings when using Active Directory servers Canon Peripheral Admins is set in advance as the Administrator user group Assign different privileges to the other groups created on the server 7 Click Update 8 Restart the machine Restarting the Machine P 657 LINKS Registering User Information in the Local Device P 561 Configuring the Authentication Functions P 571 U...

Страница 583: ...gistering User Information in the Local Device P 561 Registering Server Information P 565 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click User Management Authentication Management 4 Click Basic Settings Edit 5 Select the check box for Use the user authentication function and specify the required settings Select the ...

Страница 584: ...or Picture Login The risk of unauthorized logins can be reduced by hiding the icons as doing so requires users to enter the user name and password in order to log in with administrator privileges User with Administrator Role Select the check box to display the icons for users with administrator privileges When the check box is cleared the icons for the administrators are hidden Administrator Selec...

Страница 585: ... authentication is selected automatically Also make sure to specify the settings for keyboard authentication Using IC card authentication Configure the settings below when using IC card authentication Authentication Functions to Use Select the check box for IC Card Authentication Authentication Select the user authentication device Managing the Machine 573 ...

Страница 586: ...eir card etc Set the expiration period of the temporary card accordingly To configure this function specify the following settings in advance If you deselect the check box the associations of all temporary cards are canceled Use the user authentication function is set to On Picture Login in Authentication Functions to Use is set to Off IC Card Authentication in Authentication Functions to Use is s...

Страница 587: ...n destination for keyboard authentication If the user information on the server is changed after a user has been registered to the machine the user information in the machine is not automatically updated Register the IC card again to reflect the latest information An IC card cannot be registered if the user information retrieved from the server contains characters that cannot be used by the machin...

Страница 588: ...ead from the IC card as the user name Select the check box to automatically enter the card ID in User Name on the login screen when IC card authentication is available Configuring detailed settings for authentication functions You can configure detailed settings for the personal authentication functions Authentication Mode Select the authentication mode to use for Remote UI login When Guest Authen...

Страница 589: ...hared folder FTP server WebDAV server Advanced Box Integrated authentication is valid while the session is valid Use department ID as user group Select the check box to use Department IDs as the user groups Registering User Information in the Local Device P 561 to which users are registered Default Role When Registering User Select the role to apply to users in situations such as when no privilege...

Страница 590: ...when you start using the machine or after a function button is pressed If after a function button is pressed is selected you can specify the functions that require user login Functions that are not specified are available to unregistered users 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click User Management Authentic...

Страница 591: ...gin screen for Login Screen Background Settings You can specify a background image for the login screen 6 Click Update LINKS Registering User Information in the Local Device P 561 Registering Server Information P 565 Using Personal Authentication to Manage Printing Faxing Remote Scanning via a Computer P 580 Managing the Machine 579 ...

Страница 592: ...4 via a computer This can provide greater security as the machine does not accept these operations unless the user is identified Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Restrict Job from Remote Device without User Auth On OK Apply Set Changes Yes LINKS Registering User Information in the Local Device P 561 Registering Server Information P 565 Configuring the Authentication Fu...

Страница 593: ... of pages that each group can use for copying or printing which can help reduce costs Setting the Department ID Management P 582 Personal Folder Users who log in with personal authentication management can create a Personal folder for individual use A Personal folder can be specified as the send destination for scanned documents and it can be created in a shared folder or on a file server Register...

Страница 594: ...that are to be managed and assign users to each one Registering User Information in the Local Device P 561 After assigning users to Department IDs enable Department ID Management To perform the same type of management for printing or sending faxes from a computer configure the additional required settings Administrator privileges are required in order to configure these settings Managing the Machi...

Страница 595: ...ministrator Registering User Information in the Local Device P 561 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings User Management System Manager Information Settings 3 Make the necessary changes to the System Manager settings and press OK System Manager ID Enter a number of 7 digits or less for the new System Manager ID System Manager PIN Enter a number of 7 digits or less for the new System Manager PIN and ...

Страница 596: ...LINKS Configuring the Department ID Management Settings P 585 Registering User Information in the Local Device P 561 Managing the Machine 584 ...

Страница 597: ...Information in the Local Device P 561 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings User Management Department ID Management 3 Press On Department ID Management is enabled To disable Department ID Management press Off Registering Department IDs and PINs 1 Press Register PIN 2 Press Register To edit Department ID settings Select the Department ID that you want to edit and press Edit to display the Edit scree...

Страница 598: ... to use for copying scanning and printing You can also make entering seven digits a requirement for Department IDs and PINs For more information contact your local authorized Canon dealer 4 Press OK 4 Press OK To check the page counts If you want to check the total number of pages used by each Department ID for copies prints and scans including faxes press Page Totals on the screen displayed in st...

Страница 599: ...Computer to Scan Remote Scan Windows P 464 Use this function when you would like to improve security or monitor the number of pages that are printed 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings User Management Department ID Management 3 Select Off for the functions that you want to manage then press OK If Off is selected a Department ID must be entered when executing a corresponding job Managing the Machin...

Страница 600: ... folders Creating Folders in Any Location Specified by Users Users create a Personal folder in any location they desire This enables each user to send documents to a folder in a familiar location Creating Folders in a Home Folder Specified by the Administrator Users create a Personal folder inside a parent folder home folder specified by the administrator Personal folders are easier to manage beca...

Страница 601: ... Home Folder Set 2 Specify the home folder and press OK Protocol Select the protocol to use when sending scanned documents to the Personal folder Host Name Enter the host name or IP address of the computer where you want to create the home folder Folder Path Enter the folder path for the home folder For example enter users public share for a home folder created inside a subfolder named share in th...

Страница 602: ...se Login Server 2 Select the authentication information to use and press OK To use a separate user name and password for the Personal folder press Use Authentication Info of Each User to add a check mark Remove the check mark to use the same user name and password entered at login If a check mark is added to this item a user name and password must be registered for each user Registering a Personal...

Страница 603: ...er Use ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM On OK Apply Set Changes Yes If you set this function to On the following settings in Settings Registration are disabled Setting a PIN for Address Book Restricting New Destinations Similar restrictions can be set for roles using the ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM For details see ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Administrator Guide Even if you change this setting from Off to On the...

Страница 604: ...tomatically delete user setting information when the maximum amount of information that can be registered has been reached Action When Maximum Number of Users Exceeded P 812 For information on the maximum amount of user setting information that can be registered see Specifications P 1029 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click User Setting Information Management Service on the p...

Страница 605: ...lete All User Group Setting Information Yes Deleting the setting information for individual user groups 1 Click Select User Group and Delete Setting Information 2 Select the check box for the user group with the setting information that you want to delete and click Delete Yes LINKS Configuring the Personal Authentication Management Settings P 558 Managing the Machine 593 ...

Страница 606: ...ide greater security by using a proxy server for connections outside the network such as when browsing websites Setting a Proxy P 602 TLS Encrypted Communication TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web browser or an e mail application TLS enables secure network communication when accessing the machine in a variety of situations su...

Страница 607: ...ser Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result If authentication fails a LAN switch or an access point blocks access from the outside of the network The machine can connect to an 802 1X network as a client device Configuring the IEEE 802 1X Authentication Settings P 613 Managing t...

Страница 608: ...ering to only allow communication with devices that have a specific IP address or MAC address you can reduce the risk of unauthorized access by outside third parties Administrator or NetworkAdmin privileges are required in order to configure these settings Managing the Machine 596 ...

Страница 609: ...4 Select Outbound Filter or Inbound Filter To restrict data sent from the machine to a computer select Outbound Filter To restrict data received from a computer select Inbound Filter To restrict data communication but allow only ICMP communications such as PING commands etc set Always Allow Sending Receiving Using ICMP to On 5 Set Use Filter to On select Default Policy then press Register For Defa...

Страница 610: ... Prefix Length Setting exception addresses for the outbound filter 1 Select the IP address input method and enter the exception addresses 2 Press OK Setting exception addresses for the inbound filter 1 Select the IP address input method and enter the exception addresses 2 Press Next 3 Set the port number if necessary and press OK Select whether to specify a port number You can configure detailed c...

Страница 611: ... Checking the blocked communication requests in the log To display a log of communication requests blocked by the firewall press Preferences Network Firewall Settings IP Address Block Log The log of blocked communication requests can be exported from the Remote UI in CSV file format Exporting a Log as a File P 680 LINKS Specifying MAC Addresses in Firewall Settings P 600 Managing the Machine 599 ...

Страница 612: ...lt Policy select Reject to only allow communication with devices that have a MAC address specified in Exception Addresses in the next step or select Allow to reject communication with them If Reject is selected for Default Policy the restrictions do not apply to sending to multicast or broadcast addresses 5 Enter the exception addresses and press OK Specify the MAC addresses to designate as except...

Страница 613: ...LINKS Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings P 597 Managing the Machine 601 ...

Страница 614: ...s 3 Set Use Proxy to On configure the necessary settings and press OK Server Address Enter the address of the proxy server to use Specify the IP address or host name depending on your environment Port Number Enter the port number of the proxy server to use Use Proxy within Same Domain Select On if you want to use the proxy server even when communicating with devices in the same domain Set Authenti...

Страница 615: ...4 Press Apply Set Changes Yes Managing the Machine 603 ...

Страница 616: ... and certificate that you generate yourself generate the key and certificate before performing the procedure below Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication P 606 If you want to use a key and certificate that you acquire from a certification authority CA register the key and certificate before performing the procedure below Registering a Key and Certificate P 666 1 Press 2 Press...

Страница 617: ...arts and the settings are applied LINKS Starting the Remote UI P 648 Distributing the Device Information to Other Canon Multifunction Printers P 714 Setting E mail I Fax Communication P 62 Setting Advanced Box to Public P 66 MEAP P 1071 Managing the Machine 605 ...

Страница 618: ... Generating a Key and CSR P 671 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings Device Management Certificate Settings Generate Key Generate Network Communication Key 3 Configure the necessary items for the key and press Next Key Name Enter a name for the key Use a name that will be easy to find when displayed in a list Signature Algorithm Select the hash algorithm to use for the signature The available hash ...

Страница 619: ...erver is not used Managing keys and certificates You can check the detailed settings or delete keys and certificates on the screen that is displayed when you press Management Settings Device Management Certificate Settings Key and Certificate List If the list of keys and certificates is not displayed press Key and Certificate List for This Device to display it If is displayed the key is corrupted ...

Страница 620: ...ortions of IP packets Key exchange protocol This machine supports Internet Key Exchange version 1 IKEv1 for exchanging keys based on the Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol ISAKMP For the authentication method set either the pre shared key method or the digital signature method When setting the pre shared key method you need to decide on a passphrase pre shared key in advance...

Страница 621: ...ied to IP packets sent to and received from the IPv4 address of the communication peer All IPv6 Addresses IPSec is applied to IP packets sent to and received from the IPv6 address of the communication peer IPv4 Manual Settings Specify the IPv4 address to apply IPSec to Select Single Address to enter an individual IPv4 address Select Address Range to specify a range of IPv4 addresses Enter a separa...

Страница 622: ...rt of the communication peer in Remote Port Press Specify by Service Name to use service names when specifying the ports that IPSec applies to Select the service in the list press Service On Off to set it to On and press OK 4 Press OK 6 Configure the authentication and encryption settings 1 Press IKE Settings 2 Configure the necessary settings IKE Mode Select the operation mode for the key exchang...

Страница 623: ... strength 3 Press OK 7 Configure the IPSec communication settings 1 Press IPSec Network Settings 2 Configure the necessary settings Validity Set a period of validity for the generated IKE SA and IPSec SA Make sure to set either Time or Size If you set both the period of validity ends when either value is reached PFS If you set the Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS function to On the secrecy of the encry...

Страница 624: ... at the top If you want to change the order of priority select a policy in the list and press Raise Priority or Lower Priority If you do not want to send or receive packets that do not correspond to the policies select Reject for Receive Non Policy Packets 9 Press OK 10 Press Apply Set Changes Yes Managing IPSec policies You can edit policies on the screen displayed in step 3 To edit the details o...

Страница 625: ...t be specified in this setting so that the authentication server can authenticate the machine Register these items before configuring the settings Registering a Key and Certificate P 666 This authentication method cannot be used in combination with the other methods EAP TTLS EAP Tunneled TLS Only the authentication server sends a certificate A CA certificate must be registered on the machine to ve...

Страница 626: ...y settings Selecting EAP TLS 1 Press On for Use TLS and press Key and Certificate 2 In the list select the key and certificate to use and press Set as Default Key Yes 3 Press OK Selecting EAP TTLS 1 Press On for Use TTLS 2 Select MSCHAPv2 or PAP and press OK 3 Enter the user name and password Press User Name or Password and enter the information If you enter a name for User Name disable Same User ...

Страница 627: ...e for User Name disable Same User Name as Login Name If you want to set User Name to the same login name that was entered in step 3 press Same User Name as Login Name Confirm is displayed when you enter a password and press OK For confirmation enter the password again and press OK 5 Press OK 6 Press Apply Set Changes Yes Managing the Machine 615 ...

Страница 628: ...everyone so that only the users who know the number can access the destination Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions P 617 Restricting Printing from a Computer You can prohibit all users from printing documents from a computer or only allow printing if the user is authorized on the machine You can also configure the machine so that only Encrypted Secure Print documents can be pr...

Страница 629: ...users from editing destination information or you can restrict the available sending destinations to reduce the risk of information leakage You can also prevent documents from being sent to unintended recipients by requiring users to enter the fax number twice for confirmation before sending Managing the Machine 617 ...

Страница 630: ...s Book can be set to require users to enter a PIN in order to add new entries to the Address Book or edit existing entries This can reduce the risk of unauthorized editing of the Address Book Note however that even if a PIN is set for the Address Book a user who logs in with Administrator privileges can add and edit entries without entering the required PIN 1 Press 2 Press Set Destination Address ...

Страница 631: ...r the correct access number Follow the procedure below to enable the access number registration function If the access number registration function is enabled users cannot specify a destination using Previous Settings Set Destination Manage Address Book Access Numbers On OK After configuring this setting register the access numbers in the Address Book Hiding the Address Book Set whether to hide th...

Страница 632: ...LINKS Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 188 Registering Destinations via the Remote UI P 658 Managing the Machine 620 ...

Страница 633: ... that are described below may not be available when ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is enabled Using ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM P 591 Restricting New Destinations P 621 Restricting E Mail Destination to Send to Myself P 622 Restricting File Send Destination to Personal Folder P 622 Restricting the Domain of Send Destination P 622 Restricting New Destinations The destinations that can be specified when send...

Страница 634: ...ication can only send scanned documents to their Personal folder Configuring Personal Folders P 588 Function Settings Send Common Settings Restrict File TX to Personal Folder On OK Restricting the Domain of Send Destination You can restrict e mail and I fax destinations so that only addresses in a specific domain are available When a domain is specified you can also set whether to allow sending to...

Страница 635: ...ng faxes to prevent misdialing This setting can also be configured with DeviceAdmin privileges Function Settings Send Fax Settings Confirm Entered Fax Number On OK Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer You can prohibit users from sending faxes from a computer Sending Faxes from Your Computer PC Fax P 364 This setting can also be configured with DeviceAdmin privileges Function Settings Send Fax S...

Страница 636: ...sting function which enables users to send a fax to multiple recipients in succession Function Settings Send Fax Settings Restrict Sequential Broadcast When Fax Dest Included On OK Apply Set Changes Yes Restricting Sending from Log You can prohibit users from being able to specify a previously used destination from the log After configuring this setting previously used destinations cannot be selec...

Страница 637: ...mputer You can prohibit users from printing documents from a computer However even when printing from a computer is prohibited you can allow users to save documents in the temporary storage space of the machine Mail Box as well as print documents saved in the Mail Box Function Settings Printer Restrict Printer Jobs On Select the restriction exceptions OK Configuring the Forced Hold Printing Settin...

Страница 638: ...P Address Specify a particular IP address as the condition You can also specify a range of IP addresses Input Method Specify a particular printing protocol as the condition Job Action Select how to handle documents that match the conditions When Hold is selected you can set ID for Substitution to specify the user name output to the log when printing Select Cancel to discard the document 3 Set the ...

Страница 639: ...w printing of Encrypted Secure Print documents from a computer which can prevent information leakage due to unprotected print data With this setting documents cannot be printed using normal printing operations Users are required to enter a password on the machine when printing Encrypted Secure Print documents Printing Documents Retained in the Machine Forced Hold Printing P 396 Function Settings P...

Страница 640: ...well as for restricting the ability to save scanned documents on memory media or print data from memory media Administrator or DeviceAdmin privileges are required in order to configure these settings Function Settings Store Access Files Memory Media Settings Use Scan Print Function Select Off for Use Scan Function or Use Print Function OK Apply Set Changes Yes LINKS Working with Data in Memory Med...

Страница 641: ...ment Printing User Information on Documents P 631 Forced Secure Watermark You can configure the machine to always embed invisible text such as CONFIDENTIAL or TOP SECRET in the background of printed or copied documents The embedded text becomes visible when the documents are copied alerting users to unauthorized duplication or the risk of information leakage Embedding Invisible Text Forced Secure ...

Страница 642: ...al signatures to scanned documents The digital signature is added using a key and certificate mechanism which enables you to identify the device and or user that created the document while ensuring that the data has not been altered Adding a Digital Signature to Sent Files P 642 Managing the Machine 630 ...

Страница 643: ...ese settings 1 Press 2 Press Function Settings Common Print Settings Forced Print of Recognition Information 3 Press On and select the functions that forcibly print the user information In Target Function press On for each function that you want to apply this setting to 4 Specify the print position and original s orientation and press OK Press the arrow buttons to select the print position To prec...

Страница 644: ...LINKS Configuring the Forced Hold Printing Settings P 625 Managing the Machine 632 ...

Страница 645: ...e this function System Options P 1121 1 Press 2 Press Function Settings Common Print Settings Secure Watermark Settings Forced Secure Watermark If the Document Scan Lock function is enabled press Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock Forced Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock instead of Secure Watermark Settings Forced Secure Watermark 3 Select the functions for which Forced Secure Watermark is enab...

Страница 646: ...d press OK Set the text style To add a background pattern such as polka dots or mesh select the desired pattern in the Background Pattern drop down list To rotate the text and print it sideways press Print Vertically To print white text on a colored background press White Letters on Colored Background 6 Press OK If you want to configure Secure Watermark for additional functions return to step 3 Yo...

Страница 647: ...LINKS Embedding the TOP SECRET Text Secure Watermark P 301 Common P 760 Print Settings Secure Watermark Doc Scan Lock Managing the Machine 635 ...

Страница 648: ...dure restriction conditions and tracking information Select the code that suits the type of multifunctional printer that you use and your system of management Also note that it is not possible to use both TL code and QR code at the same time TL Code TL code embeds scan lock information using dots that are printed in the entire background of the document This enables the information to be retained ...

Страница 649: ...addition the tracking information is updated each time the document is copied enabling you to analyze the information for the most recent copy operation It is also possible to only embed the tracking information without prohibiting copying Selecting the Code to Use You cannot use both TL code and QR code at the same time Select the code that you want to use Function Settings Common Document Scan L...

Страница 650: ...ction is enabled press Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock Forced Secure Watermark Document Scan Lock instead of Document Scan Lock Settings Forced Document Scan Lock 3 Select the functions for which to enable Document Scan Lock with TL code Press Set or Forced Doc Scan Lock for the functions that you want to use TL code for When Set or Forced Doc Scan Lock is selected for Access Stored Files the ...

Страница 651: ...you change the password If you want to allow copying and only embed the tracking information press Doc Scan Lock Information Allow All OK A TL code that allows copying is printed on the document 5 Press OK If you want to configure additional functions to use Document Scan Lock with TL code return to step 3 You can adjust the size and density of the dots used in the TL code Try adjusting these sett...

Страница 652: ...k instead of Document Scan Lock Settings Forced Document Scan Lock 3 Select the functions for which to enable Document Scan Lock with QR code Press Set or Forced Doc Scan Lock for the functions that you want to use QR code for When Set or Forced Doc Scan Lock is selected for Access Stored Files the QR code is embedded in stored files when they are printed You can press Forced Secure Watermark Docu...

Страница 653: ...on and specify where to print the QR code You can also configure settings so that copies can only be made when a QR code is printed in the original document Doc Scan Lock Operation Settings Document Scan Lock QR Code Settings P 770 LINKS Common P 760 Print Settings Secure Watermark Doc Scan Lock Using TL Code to Restrict Copying P 638 Managing the Machine 641 ...

Страница 654: ...gnature needs to be created on the machine Generating a Device Signature Certificate P 643 User Signature The user signature is linked with personal authentication management functions enabling the recipient of a scanned document to verify who created it As with the device signature the user signature enables the recipient to check whether the document was altered after the signature was added A s...

Страница 655: ...ertificate Settings Key and Certificate List Key and Certificate List for This Device If is displayed the key is corrupted or invalid You can update the key and certificate by configuring the settings again If you select Device Signature Key and press Certificate Details detailed information about the device signature certificate is displayed You can also press Verify Certificate on this screen to...

Страница 656: ...to scanned documents that are sent in a particular file format Adding a Digital Signature P 457 A system option is required in order to use this function System Options P 1121 You may not be able to register some types of keys and certificates Specifications P 1029 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click Dev...

Страница 657: ...ep 4 If you log in with Administrator privileges the keys and certificates for all user signatures are displayed For users who do not log in with Administrator privileges only the key and certificate of the logged in user are displayed Click a login name to display detailed information about the certificate To delete keys and certificates select the ones that you want to delete and click Delete OK...

Страница 658: ...Machine This section describes how to check the status of copied printed sent and received documents as well as error information and the remaining amount of paper Checking the Status and Logs P 652 Other Functions Available Using the Remote UI This section describes various other convenient functions that can be performed via computer using the Remote UI such as editing the Address Book checking ...

Страница 659: ...oxy server You cannot access the machine via a proxy server If a proxy server is used in your environment configure your Web browser to bypass the proxy server and access the machine directly Managing the Machine 647 ...

Страница 660: ... Start the Web browser 2 Enter the IP address of the machine and press the ENTER key on the computer keyboard Enter http IP address of the machine in the address input field When using an IPv6 address enclose the IP address portion in brackets Example http fe80 2e9e fcff fe4e dbce If the Remote UI does not start If the login screen is not displayed in step 3 of this procedure clear the Web browser...

Страница 661: ...ou use the Back button Remote UI Screen The portal page shown below is displayed when you log in to the Remote UI This section describes the items displayed on the portal page and the basic operations Some display items and functions are only available if you log in with Administrator privileges When multiple users perform operations with the Remote UI at the same time the most recently performed ...

Страница 662: ... Setting Data P 682 You can use either the control panel or the Remote UI to change most machine settings but some settings can only be changed using one or the other Basic Tools You can perform operations such as printing documents or registering editing destinations Managing Stored Files P 674 Directly Printing Files without Opening Them P 402 Registering Destinations via the Remote UI P 658 Man...

Страница 663: ...Settings Registration P 731 Managing the Machine 651 ...

Страница 664: ...rints P 652 Checking the Status of Sent Received Documents P 653 Checking the Status of Stored Documents P 654 Checking the Job Log P 654 Checking the Machine Status P 655 Checking the Status of Copies Prints You can check the status of documents that are waiting to be copied or printed You can also output a document before the others or cancel a document Start the Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel ...

Страница 665: ... the document Checking the Status of Sent Received Documents You can check the status of faxes and e mails that are waiting to be sent faxes that have been received and faxes that are waiting to be forwarded You can also cancel the process for sending and receiving documents Start the Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Job Status under Send or Receive Function selection Select the function that you w...

Страница 666: ...Monitor Cancel Job Status under Store Cancel Document storing is canceled The canceled document is deleted and cannot be recovered Document icon Click the icon to display detailed information about the document Checking the Job Log You can display a log for documents that were copied printed sent received or stored Start the Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Job Log Managing the Machine 654 ...

Страница 667: ... on your machine model and optional equipment Checking the Machine Status You can check a variety of information about the machine such as error information the amount of remaining paper and toner information about attached optional equipment and the total number of pages that have been printed up to now Start the Remote UI Status Monitor Cancel Select the item that you want to check LINKS Managin...

Страница 668: ...Starting the Remote UI P 648 Managing the Machine 656 ...

Страница 669: ...e Remote UI Settings Registration Device Management Remote Shutdown Start Restarting the Machine Start the Remote UI Settings Registration Restart Device Perform Restart OK If optional equipment is not recognized after restart The machine may not recognize optional equipment after it is restarted If this happens turn OFF the power of the optional equipment and then turn it back ON LINKS Starting t...

Страница 670: ...dress List 10 or Address List for Administrators Personal Address List is for the exclusive use of the logged in user and is only available when personal authentication management is enabled Address List for Administrators is only available to administrators who log in with Administrator or DeviceAdmin privileges If the page for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN and click OK If you want to...

Страница 671: ...roup 2 Enter a name for the group in Group Name and click Select Destination for Member List 3 Select the check box for the destinations that you want to register to the group and click OK 4 Click OK Registering a name for the address list Click Register Address List Name or Register Change Address List Name enter the name and click OK Checking editing destination details You can click the Type ic...

Страница 672: ...in which to register the destination User Group Address List 01 to User Group Address List 50 2 Click Public View Settings 3 Select the group in which to share the address list and click OK 4 Click Register New Destination or Register New Group 5 Register the necessary information and click OK Registering to a one touch button 1 Click Address List One Touch 2 Click Not Registered or an unregistere...

Страница 673: ...r the necessary information and click OK For more information on the information to register see Registering a Destination in a One Touch Button P 200 LINKS Registering Destinations P 186 Restricting Use of the Address Book P 618 Managing the Machine 661 ...

Страница 674: ... Registering Users Register the users to share with Registering User Information in the Local Device P 561 If you are using Server Authentication proceed to step 2 Registering a Group to Share Register a user group Registering User Groups P 664 Setting the Group Share Destination Specify the group created in step 2 in Public View Settings from the address list in which to register the destination ...

Страница 675: ... To add new users to an existing group set the destination group when registering the users in step 1 Managing the Machine 663 ...

Страница 676: ...hentication Management User Group Management 4 Click Add Group Local Device Users or Add Group Other Users Select Add Group Other Users if Server Authentication is set Adding Groups to a Local Device 1 Enter the group ID and user group name 2 Select the users to include in the user group and click Add 3 Click Add Adding Groups to an Authentication Server 1 Enter the group ID user group name attrib...

Страница 677: ...Managing the Machine 665 ...

Страница 678: ...d to specify the key and certificate in the settings for each communication method However an X 509 DER format CA certificate does not need to be specified in the settings for each communication method You can use it simply by registering it to the machine TLS encrypted communication Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS P 604 IPSec Configuring the IPSec Settings P 608 IEEE 802 1X Configurin...

Страница 679: ... detailed settings or delete keys and certificates on the screen displayed in step 4 If is displayed the key is corrupted or invalid If is displayed the certificate for the key does not exist Click a key name to display detailed information about the certificate You can also click Verify Certificate on this screen to check whether the certificate is valid To delete a key and certificate select the...

Страница 680: ...ck Start Installation 7 Register the CA certificate Select the CA certificate that you want to register and click Register Managing CA certificates You can check the detailed settings or delete CA certificates on the screen displayed in step 4 Click to display detailed information about the CA certificate You can also click Verify Certificate on this screen to check whether the CA certificate is v...

Страница 681: ...l page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click Device Management S MIME Certificate Settings 4 Click Register S MIME Certificate 5 Register the S MIME certificate Click Browse specify the file S MIME certificate to register and click Register Managing S MIME certificates You can check the detailed settings or delete S MIME certificates on the screen displayed in step 4 Click to display detailed information...

Страница 682: ...te UI Screen P 649 3 Click Device Management Certificate Revocation List CRL Settings 4 Click Register CRL 5 Register the CRL Click Browse specify the file CRL to register and click Register Managing CRLs You can check the detailed settings or delete CRLs on the screen displayed in step 4 Click to display detailed information about it You can also click Verify CRL on this screen to check whether t...

Страница 683: ...cate to a Key P 672 Generating a Key and CSR You can generate a key and CSR on the machine You can also display the CSR data on the screen and export it as a file 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click Device Management Key and Certificate Settings 4 Click Generate Key 5 Click Key and Certificate Signing Re...

Страница 684: ...r is not used 7 Click OK The CSR data is displayed If you want to save the CSR data to a file click Store in File and specify the save location The key that generated the CSR is displayed on the key and certificate list screen but you cannot use it by itself To use this key you need to register the certificate that is later issued based on the CSR Registering a Certificate to a Key P 672 Registeri...

Страница 685: ...5 Click Register Certificate 6 Register the certificate Click Browse specify the file certificate to register and click Register Managing the Machine 673 ...

Страница 686: ... Mail Box You can also edit stored documents by deleting specific pages 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Access Received Stored Files on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 On the Mail Box page click the number of the desired Mail Box If the page for entering a PIN is displayed enter the PIN and click OK You can also specify a Mail Box by entering its number in Box N...

Страница 687: ...tiple files 2 Click Select Destination select the destination and click OK You can click Move to Top Move Up Move Down or Move to Bottom to change the order in which files are sent You can click Settings in Set Details to change the send settings You can also change detailed settings of the file in File Settings Scanning P 406 If you select the check box for Delete File After Sending files are aut...

Страница 688: ...Select the number of the destination Mail Box in Target Box and click Start Changing a file name 1 Click a Type icon or file name 2 Click Change File Name enter the new name in File Name and click OK Deleting pages from a file 1 Click a Type icon or file name 2 Select the check box for the pages that you want to delete and click Delete Page OK You can also click Delete Pages Consecutively and spec...

Страница 689: ...erform the desired operation Click the Type icon to display detailed information about the document Printing a document 1 Select the check box for a document that you want to print and click Print You can select multiple documents 2 Click Start Printing Documents are automatically deleted after they are printed Forwarding a document 1 Select the check box for a document that you want to forward an...

Страница 690: ...ng a check mark to Set PIN To configure Memory Lock settings You can set whether to receive faxes and I faxes in the Memory RX Inbox by clicking Memory Lock Settings on the screen displayed in step 3 Managing Documents Temporarily Stored in Confidential Fax Inbox You can print or delete faxes and I faxes that are temporarily stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the R...

Страница 691: ...le 1 Select the check box for the file that you want to delete 2 Click Delete OK To change the settings of a Confidential Fax Inbox You can change the name and PIN for the selected Confidential Fax Inbox by clicking Settings on the screen displayed in step 3 LINKS Making Simple Edits to Files P 492 Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception P 354 Keeping Received Documents Private P...

Страница 692: ... Management Export Clear Audit Log Audit Log Information Click Start for Audit Log Collection When generating a network connection log mail box authentication log mail box document operation log or machine management log click Device Management Save Audit Log select the check box for Save Audit Log click OK Apply Setting Changes When generating an Advanced Space operation log click Advanced Box Se...

Страница 693: ... logs from device after export before clicking Export If you then click Cancel exporting is canceled and the logs are deleted even if they were not finished being exported as files Deleting the Logs You can delete all of the collected logs Start the Remote UI Settings Registration Device Management Export Clear Audit Log Delete Audit Logs Delete Yes LINKS Starting the Remote UI P 648 Configuring t...

Страница 694: ...sult in data loss or cause the machine to malfunction Do not import or export while the machine is processing other operations Before importing or exporting make sure that the machine is not processing any other operations such as printing or copying Do not import or export in different display languages If the display language differs between the exporting machine and the importing machine the se...

Страница 695: ...ing Synchronization P 709 2 To import data for existing users groups back up the data and delete the data for the users groups that will be imported from the server machine Specifying Detailed Synchronization Settings Server Machine or Server Client Machine P 712 3 Import the data to add to the client machine that has synchronization stopped 4 Synchronize the client machine with the server machine...

Страница 696: ...e Remote UI with Administrator privileges imageRUNNER ADVANCE series multifunctional printers or other models that support the import export of all settings Exporting All Settings P 684 Importing All Settings P 685 Exporting All Settings 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click Data Management Export 4 Select...

Страница 697: ... specify where to save the data To export all setting data without using a computer You can export all setting data to memory media such as a USB memory device Import Export Export to USB Memory P 816 Importing All Settings You can import all setting data that was exported to a computer When importing the previously configured setting values are overwritten Note however that some machine models ma...

Страница 698: ...mporting machine or if no password has been set for the importing machine If no password has been set for the importing machine the password configured for the exporting machine is automatically set to the importing machine 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click Data Management Import 4 Click Browse and spe...

Страница 699: ...Import Export Result Report in the previous step click Settings Registration Data Management Import Export Results Create Report to export the import results To import all setting data without using a computer You can import all setting data from memory media such as a USB memory device Import Export Import from USB Memory P 816 Managing the Machine 687 ...

Страница 700: ...porting Settings Individually P 690 Exporting Settings Individually 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click Data Management and select the settings to export When exporting address lists 1 Click Address Lists in Import Export Individually 2 Click Export If the page for entering a PIN is displayed enter the P...

Страница 701: ...is setting is configured the items for entering the password are displayed on the Export Address Lists screen If a password has been set the data can only be imported if the correct password is entered To edit data exported in the CSV format To edit an exported CSV file use a CSV file editor or text editor If you open a CSV file in Microsoft Excel phone numbers will not be recognized as strings an...

Страница 702: ...e on screen instructions to specify where to save the data Importing Settings Individually 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click Data Management and select the settings to import When importing address lists 1 Click Address Lists in Import Export Individually 2 Click Import Managing the Machine 690 ...

Страница 703: ...for LDAP format files ldif or select CSV Format for CSV format files csv Decrypt Address List Authentication Information When importing encrypted files select the check box and enter the same password that was entered when the setting data was exported When importing device settings forwarding settings Address Book send function favorite settings 1 Click Device Settings Forwarding Settings Address...

Страница 704: ...hen the setting data was exported When importing Web Access favorites 1 Click Web Access Favorites in Import Export Individually 2 Click Import 3 Click Browse and specify the setting data to import Only 20 favorites are imported in the order that they were registered starting from the top When importing printer settings 1 Click Printer Settings in Import Export Individually 2 Click Import 3 Click ...

Страница 705: ...and specify the file to import 4 Click Start Importing OK The machine may need to be restarted depending on the settings to import Restarting the Machine P 657 LINKS Importing Exporting All Settings P 684 Restricting Use of the Address Book P 618 Managing the Machine 693 ...

Страница 706: ...Data may be lost if a problem occurs with the hard disk Periodically back up export sensitive data Please note that Canon is not liable for any damages caused by loss of data Connecting an external hard disk When using an external hard disk to back up or restore data it is recommended that you connect it to the USB port on the right side of the machine Front Side P 76 For more information on the e...

Страница 707: ...settings 4 Configure the necessary settings When backing up to an external hard disk Backup Location Select USB HDD Folder Path Enter the path to the folder on the external hard disk in which to save the backed up data Encrypt Backup Data If you select the check box and enter a password you can encrypt the backed up data The password specified here will be required when restoring the encrypted bac...

Страница 708: ...lder Path If the backup folder is at a level below add the rest of the path that follows Make sure that the user limit of the specified folder is set to allow two or more users If the user limit is set to allow one user you will not be able to restore the backed up data properly Encrypt Backup Data If you select the check box and enter a password you can encrypt the backed up data The password spe...

Страница 709: ...ed or added since all the stored data was backed up Changes always backs up data based on differences from All as opposed to the last Changes backup After performing backup you can click Back Up Restore Log on the screen displayed in step 7 and check the results of the backup in Result If the A server error has occurred message is displayed the network settings may not be configured properly Check...

Страница 710: ...stored are erased If authentication management is performed for Advanced Box users Setting Advanced Box to Public P 66 you need to pay particular attention when restoring the backed up data on a different machine First export the Advanced Box user information Next import it to the machine on which to restore the data and then perform the backup operation Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 682 ...

Страница 711: ...achine data and settings in case the firmware update is not performed properly Backing Up Restoring Data P 694 Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 682 1 Start the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click License Other Register Update Software 4 Click Manual Update 5 Click Browse select the firmware update to use and c...

Страница 712: ...ck Settings Registration on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click License Other Register Update Software 4 Click Scheduled Update Settings Edit 5 Select the check box for Enable scheduled update settings and configure the necessary settings Update Schedule Confirm Select the cycle Biweekly or Weekly a day Sun to Sat and the time The time is displayed in 24 hour notation The firmware check...

Страница 713: ... is entered you can identify which device status the e mail is about If previously downloaded firmware has not been applied by scheduled update the next scheduled update is not performed If Scheduled Update is set a firmware update is applied at the specified time after the new firmware is downloaded from the distribution server After application is complete the machine automatically restarts 6 Cl...

Страница 714: ...e portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click License Other Message Board Support Link 4 Enter the message and click OK Enable Status Display To display the message at the bottom of the touch panel display select the check box and enter the message in Message Use this setting for displaying operational tips and other low priority messages Enable Pop up Window To display the message in a pop up wind...

Страница 715: ...le notice Remote UI If you select the check box the message shown in the pop up window is also displayed on the Remote UI portal page Canceling the message display Clear the check boxes for Enable Status Display Enable Pop up Window and Remote UI If you also want to delete the message contents remove the text that was entered in the Message text boxes LINKS Timer Energy Settings P 738 Managing the...

Страница 716: ...nt to test communication message is displayed 4 Press Yes The results of the communication test are displayed If NG is displayed check that the LAN cable is connected and the network settings are configured properly Setting up Using the Setup Guide P 7 If you cannot connect to the network register the license online When Registration Cannot Be Performed over the Network P 705 2 Press 3 Press Manag...

Страница 717: ...icense key Follow the on screen instructions and enter the license access number and serial number to obtain the license key 2 Press 3 Press Management Settings License Other Register License 4 Enter the license key 5 Press Enable OK 6 Press Apply Set Changes Yes Registering a license for a MEAP application You may also need to register a license when using a MEAP application For more information ...

Страница 718: ...e Client Machine Up to 10 machines including the server machine can be synchronized Synchronized values may not be reflected depending on the optional products and the machine configuration A server machine can either be used as a server machine that does not synchronize its own data or as both a server and client machine server client machine Procedure for Synchronizing Specify synchronization as...

Страница 719: ...lient Machine P 712 To change the scope of sharing etc after starting synchronization shut down all the client machines change the settings and start all the client machines again Specifying Detailed Synchronization Settings Server Machine or Server Client Machine P 712 Synchronization starts after the client machines are restarted When a client machine starts and connects to the server machine th...

Страница 720: ...hentication settings see the instructions for the login application For group management settings it is recommended that the settings in one machine are exported and imported into the other machines When Department IDs are used for group management set the same Department IDs for each machine To synchronize the information regarding the network places for keychains the order that the network place...

Страница 721: ...the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Synchronize Custom Settings on the portal page Remote UI Screen P 649 3 Click Change Connection Destination 4 Specify the required settings Service Select Start to use the machine as the server machine Service Select Start to use the machine as a client machine To use the machine as a server client machine select Start for Service in both Synchron...

Страница 722: ... the server machine In the following cases synchronization can be set without performing step 5 When the number of machines to synchronize is 10 or fewer including the server machine as long as the machines are within the same router When Use User Authentication is set to On on the server machine see Use User Authentication P 808 and User Authentication is set as the login service see Changing Log...

Страница 723: ...ine fails Simple Synchronization Settings Synchronization of custom settings can be started from the control panel for Canon multifunction printers within the same router For the server machine Press Management Settings Device Management set Synchronize Custom Settings Server to Enable For a client machine Press Management Settings Device Management set Synchronize Custom Settings Client to Enable...

Страница 724: ...itions left blank to display all the user data If client machines are started and connected the data in the server machine is prioritized when synchronizing the user data registered in both the server machine and client machines To use the user data in a connected client machine delete the corresponding user data from the server machine with this setting before starting the client machine Confirm ...

Страница 725: ...d disk fails Restore Enables you to restore synchronization data that has been backed up 4 Restart the machine to start synchronization Turning OFF Restarting the Machine P 657 This operation is not required for the server machine Data backed up to Device is automatically deleted when the next backup restore operation is performed The data is deleted even if the next backup restore operation is pe...

Страница 726: ... Settings Registration P 731 If both the host and client machines are imageRUNNER ADVANCE series models the device information can be distributed It is also possible to receive some setting information from models other than those in this series However some information may not be distributed properly Device Management Device Information Distribution Settings P 810 Some device information may not ...

Страница 727: ...authentication when device information is received configure the necessary settings on the host and client machines Performing User Authentication when Distributing Device Information P 718 Distribute the device information Distributing the Device Information P 720 On the host and client machines check the results of device information distribution Checking the Results of Device Information Distri...

Страница 728: ...tination and press OK Press Display Host Name to display the host names for the multifunctional printers shown in Destination Registering destinations manually When destinations clients cannot be searched automatically you can register them manually by entering the IP address or domain name 1 Press Register 2 Enter the IP address or domain name of a destination client and press OK When entering th...

Страница 729: ...K LINKS Performing User Authentication when Distributing Device Information P 718 Distributing the Device Information P 720 Checking the Results of Device Information Distribution P 723 Managing the Machine 717 ...

Страница 730: ...main based on the authentication device 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings Device Management Device Information Distribution Settings Set MEAP Authentication 3 Configure the necessary information and press OK User Name Password Enter the user name and password of an administrator with Administrator privileges Make sure that this administrator is registered as a user on the client machine and on t...

Страница 731: ...ation P 565 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings Device Management Device Information Distribution Settings Use MEAP Authentication When Receive 3 Select On and press OK OK 4 Press Apply Set Changes Yes Managing the Machine 719 ...

Страница 732: ...o malfunction The setting update screen is displayed on the client machine that receives the device information and no operations can be performed until the update is complete It is recommended that you distribute the device information at a time when there are no users Distributing the Device Information Manually P 720 Distributing Automatically at a Specified Time P 721 Distributing the Device I...

Страница 733: ...to Distribution 3 Select Everyday or Specify Days then specify the distribution times For Everyday select a number and enter a time For Specify Days select a day and enter a time 4 Press Next 5 Press On for the information to distribute and press Next If On is selected for Settings Registration Value the screen for setting whether or not to distribute the Network Settings device information is dis...

Страница 734: ...ons to receive device information for When the machine is used as a client machine you can restrict the functions to receive information for by setting Restrict Receiving for Each Function in Receiving Settings to Off Restoring the previous device information You can perform operations on the client machine to restore the device information that existed before the update was performed However you ...

Страница 735: ...vice Management Device Information Distribution Settings Communication Log 3 Check the communication log and press OK The log of previously distributed device information is displayed in a list OK indicates that device information was distributed received properly NG indicates that distribution was canceled or an error occurred To display the details of an item in the list select the item and pres...

Страница 736: ...tification given to the Canon MFP Security Chip 2 10 ensures that results of the standardized test show the conformity of the test subject with the prescribed standards HDD data encryption on the machine may not be able to protect data from all unauthorized activity Exercise caution when managing data Encrypted data cannot be read even if you remove the hard disk and install it in another Canon mu...

Страница 737: ...in the Mail Box Address Book information or copy and print log information Initializing All Data Settings P 727 1 Press 2 Press Management Settings Data Management HDD Data Complete Deletion 3 Press Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion On OK 4 Specify how to delete the data Setting the deletion timing 1 Press Timing of Deletion 2 Select the deletion timing and press OK Select During Job to delete data...

Страница 738: ... with Random Data Data is overwritten once or three times with random data DoD Standard Data is overwritten three times The first time is with a fixed value the second is with a complement of the fixed value and the third is with random data 3 Press Apply Set Changes Yes Managing the Machine 726 ...

Страница 739: ...achine cannot be used during the initialization process Before performing initialization Back up your important data or export it as a file Data saved on the machine Backing Up Restoring Data P 694 Machine setting information Importing Exporting the Setting Data P 682 User authentication information registered in the local device for personal authentication management Registering User Information ...

Страница 740: ...d the Initialize All Data Settings Report is printed When the A security policy is applied to this device message is displayed a password must be entered by the security administrator For more information contact your security administrator Applying a Security Policy to the Machine P 545 Although the job log information can be deleted by initializing all data settings the result of printing the In...

Страница 741: ...gs and export them from the Remote UI Managing the Logs P 680 Completely deleting unnecessary data from the hard disk HDD Complete Deletion Unnecessary data can be deleted from the hard disk by overwriting with random data multiple times Managing Hard Disk Data P 724 Protecting the various types of data and confidential information stored on the hard disk 2 Hard disk data encryption Encryption is ...

Страница 742: ...tenance 753 Adjust Image Quality 754 Adjust Action 756 Maintenance 758 Function Settings 759 Common 760 Copy 772 Printer 774 Send 775 Receive Forward 788 Store Access Files 797 Print 800 Hold 802 Set Destination 803 Management Settings 807 User Management 808 Device Management 810 License Other 814 Data Management 816 Security Settings 818 Settings Registration Table 822 Settings Registration 730 ...

Страница 743: ...evice Settings When User Authentication Managing Users P 556 is enabled Personal Settings and Device Settings are displayed on the screen after you log in with Administrator privileges by pressing If you select Personal Settings and change the items that can be personalized settings are registered as the personal settings for the user who is logged into the machine List of Items That Can Be Person...

Страница 744: ...ttings P 738 This section describes the timer settings and energy settings Network P 741 This section describes the network settings External Interface P 751 This section describes the USB settings Accessibility P 752 This section describes settings for improving accessibility such as the speed of repetition when keys are held down and the ability to reverse the contrast of the touch panel display...

Страница 745: ... A5R STMTR Paper Selection Preferences Paper Settings When A5R or STMTR paper is loaded in the paper drawer you can set the size to use for the operation Paper Type Management Settings Preferences Paper Settings You can register edit various customer paper types user defined paper types besides the default paper types registered in the machine Managing Paper Types You can edit only user registered...

Страница 746: ... 4 Press OK Register Favorite Paper Multi Purpose Tray Preferences Paper Settings You can easily specify paper settings by registering paper frequently used in the multi purpose tray in a button Favorite Paper can be easily recalled from the screen displayed when paper is loaded Registering Frequently Used Paper Size and Type for the Multi purpose Tray P 145 Multi Purpose Tray Defaults Preferences...

Страница 747: ...u press Copy Changing the Settings Quickly Express Copy Screen P 311 Display Fax Function Preferences Display Settings You can set the machine to display the Fax function on the Main Menu screen If you choose to display the Fax function you can also select whether to display Fax in Scan and Send Doing so enables you to send to fax e mail and I fax destinations at the same time Store Location Displ...

Страница 748: ...e remaining paper loaded in a paper source is low No of Copies Job Duration Status Preferences Display Settings The number of copies specified and the approximate time before the current job completes are displayed on the bottom line of the touch panel display The accuracy of the approximate times that appear on the bottom line of the touch panel display may vary depending on the status of the mac...

Страница 749: ...play the IP address on the counter information screen Display Scan for Mobile Preferences Display Settings You can set whether to enable the Scan for Mobile setting which sends scanned data to mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets Display Mobile Portal Preferences Display Settings You can set whether to display Mobile Portal on the Main Menu screen Display QR Code on Mobile Portal Prefere...

Страница 750: ...tion Quick Startup Settings for Main Power Preferences Timer Energy Settings If you set this function to On you can reduce the time it takes until you can perform operations on the screen and scan originals after the power is turned ON When this function is enabled Standby power is consumed even when the power is turned OFF A tone sounds when turning the power ON OFF However the machine may not be...

Страница 751: ...d that the default value is used for this setting Sleep Mode Energy Use Preferences Timer Energy Settings You can set the amount of energy that the machine consumes when it is in the Sleep mode If the machine is connected to a computer using a USB cable depending on the timing for entering the sleep mode the machine may be unable to receive data correctly Reactivate the machine from the sleep mode...

Страница 752: ... activated in response to the user s operations You can save energy and lower noise by not activating unnecessary functions Use Motion Sensor Preferences Timer Energy Settings When the motion sensor detects a person near the machine the machine exits the Sleep mode automatically You can adjust the accuracy for detecting people by changing the sensor sensitivity If you set Sensor Sensitivity to Low...

Страница 753: ...rk TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings Specify the IPv4 address Setting an IPv4 Address P 33 DHCP Option Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings Specify the optional settings for DHCP Using a DHCP Server P 45 PING Command Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings Tests whether the IPv4 address is set correctly Conducting a Connection Test for an IPv4 Address P 34 Use IPv6 Pref...

Страница 754: ...gs P 42 DNS Host Domain Name Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings DNS Settings Specify the host name and domain name of the machine Making DNS Settings P 42 DNS Dynamic Update Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings DNS Settings Specify whether to perform the automatic update when the mapping between the host name and IP address is changed on an environment such as DHCP Making DNS Set...

Страница 755: ...data cannot be received due to a communication error etc SNTP Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Specify settings for Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP Making SNTP Settings P 57 FTP Print Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Specify settings for FTP printing To use FTP printing press On and set User Name and Password as necessary Use UTF 8 to Display Name of FTP Print Job Prefere...

Страница 756: ...work Communication P 606 or Registering a Key and Certificate for Network Communication P 666 To use the IPP authentication function by setting Use Authentication to On the user information of the machine is used as the user and password for IPP authentication Make sure to register the user information in advance when using the IPP authentication function Registering User Information in the Local ...

Страница 757: ...using the V4 printer driver IPSec Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Specify the IPSec settings Configuring the IPSec Settings P 608 SIP Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Specify the SIP settings For information on using SIP Settings see the IP FAX Expansion Kit User s Guide Use Network Link Scan Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Specify whether to use Network Link Scan Appl...

Страница 758: ...Function Preferences Network Specify whether to spool print jobs that are sent to the machine in the hard disk of the machine Waiting Time for Connection at Startup Preferences Network Specify the waiting time for connecting to a network from when the machine starts Setting the Wait Time When Connecting to a Network P 41 Ethernet Driver Settings Preferences Network Specify the Ethernet driver sett...

Страница 759: ...ettings IPv6 Address Filter Specify the inbound filter Specifying IP Addresses in Firewall Settings P 597 Always Allow Sending Receiving Using ICMPv6 Preferences Network Firewall Settings IPv6 Address Filter Specify whether to always allow ICMPv6 communication Outbound Filter Preferences Network Firewall Settings MAC Address Filter Specify the outbound filter Specifying MAC Addresses in Firewall S...

Страница 760: ...omm is enabled when Low is selected in Sleep Mode Energy Use Wireless LAN Settings Preferences Network Wireless LAN Specify the wireless LAN settings Connecting to a Wireless LAN P 24 Wireless LAN Information Preferences Network Wireless LAN Displays the setting information of wireless LAN Check the settings and information of the wireless LAN P 24 Power Save Mode Preferences Network Wireless LAN ...

Страница 761: ...ame as User Name for Print Jobs Preferences Network Direct Connection Settings Specify whether to display the login name as the user name of print jobs that are printed using direct connection access point mode Use Bluetooth Preferences Network Bluetooth Settings Specify whether to use a Bluetooth connection If you set this to On Compensate for Network Comm is enabled when Low is selected in Sleep...

Страница 762: ... Connected Device Information Preferences Network Bluetooth Settings Displays a list of MAC addresses for paired Bluetooth devices Settings Registration 750 ...

Страница 763: ...ou may need to set this to On To check whether you need to set this to On see the manual for the MEAP application you are using or contact your local authorized Canon dealer Use MEAP Driver for USB Storage Device Preferences External Interface USB Settings You can set whether to use the MEAP driver for USB external storage Depending on the type of MEAP application that uses USB external memory dev...

Страница 764: ... hold down a key on the touch panel display as well as the interval between repetitions Reversed Display Color Preferences Accessibility You can invert the screen colors of the touch panel display If you find it hard to view the display even after adjusting the brightness try specifying this setting Enable Screen Magnification Preferences Accessibility On the Main Menu screen and the Basic Feature...

Страница 765: ...o adjust image quality for copying and printing Adjust Action P 756 This section describes the copy and print finishing settings such as adjusting the saddle stitch position Maintenance P 758 This section describes how to use the auto cleaning function for the main unit and feeder Settings Registration 753 ...

Страница 766: ...djustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Tone Settings If the color of the printing is significantly different from the original document this correction adjusts the printing so that it more closely matches the original document Adjusting Color Tone P 874 Register Correction Pattern Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Tone Settings To create an adjus...

Страница 767: ...rs more saturated when performing color printing Making Colors More Vivid P 880 Fine Adjust Zoom Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality If the size of the image copied is significantly different from the original document fine adjustment is performed so that the printing more closely matches the size of the original document Adjusting Image Size P 881 Dither Pattern Settings Adjustment Mainte...

Страница 768: ...ust Action If you notice that the saddle stitch position of the paper is not exactly in the middle of the booklet you can make adjustments to the saddle stitch position to compensate for this error Adjust the folding position of the paper and the saddle stitch position at the same time Adjusting the Saddle Stitch Position P 885 Adjust Saddle Stitch Fold Position Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Actio...

Страница 769: ...You can set the time until stapling is performed after inserting paper when using manual stapling Settings Registration 757 ...

Страница 770: ...of the image is missing execute Clean Inside Main Unit Cleaning the Interior P 835 Clean Feeder Adjustment Maintenance Maintenance If streaks appear on originals scanned with the feeder or paper that is printed execute Clean Feeder Cleaning the Feeder P 831 Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method Adjustment Maintenance Maintenance Start the video that shows how to clean the platen glass Settings Re...

Страница 771: ...the copy settings Printer P 774 This section describes how to specify printer settings Send P 775 This section describes how to specify scan and send settings Receive Forward P 788 This section describes how to receive E mail and fax settings Store Access Files P 797 This section describes the settings for scanning originals and printing stored files Print P 800 This section describes the print se...

Страница 772: ...s Common Paper Feed Settings When using paper with different front and reverse sides such as paper with a logo printed on it you can set this to Print Side Priority to print the first page to the front side for both one sided and two sided printing without having to change the paper orientation The settings for Automatic Paper Selection and Auto Drawer Switching are disabled for paper sources with...

Страница 773: ...ob when multiple jobs are printed consecutively Job Separator Between Jobs Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings This enables you to insert the specified paper at the start of each job when multiple jobs are printed consecutively Job Separator Between Copies Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings This enables you to insert the specified paper each number of copy sets to divide the...

Страница 774: ...ing of another job may start depending on its settings Text Photo Priority When Recognized as B W by ACS Function Settings Common Print Settings You can set the quality to use when an original is detected to be black and white with auto color selection 2 Sided Printing Function Settings Common Print Settings Output Report Default Settings You can specify the 2 Sided Printing for printing reports s...

Страница 775: ...to Copy Set Numbering you can add User Name Date and Text on the printout Forced Print of Recognition Information Function Settings Common Print Settings You can force to print the user ID date IP address or serial number of the machine on the printout Printing User Information on Documents P 631 Embedding Invisible Text Forced Secure Watermark P 633 IPv6 addresses cannot be printed Forced Secure ...

Страница 776: ...s the relative contrast of the hidden text and the background Standard Value Settings Sets the density of the background Latent Area Density Sets the density of the text Load A3 A4 LTR or 11 x 17 size plain or heavy paper when making sample prints Sample Print The sample print includes the hidden text and the background for each relative contrast value The area within the frame on the sample print...

Страница 777: ...and if you decrease the value the background gets lighter Adjust TL Code Function Settings Common Print Settings Secure Watermark Doc Scan Lock You can adjust the density of the TL code to be embedded in the document Using TL Code to Restrict Copying P 638 QR Code Print Position Function Settings Common Print Settings Secure Watermark Doc Scan Lock You can specify the position of a QR code Using Q...

Страница 778: ...er priority is given to scanning speed or to noise reduction when the original is scanned from the feeder Streak Prevention Function Settings Common Scan Settings You can set whether to detect and prevent streaks when scanning originals When On is selected extremely thin lines may be detected as streaks Speed Image Quality Priority for B W Scan Function Settings Common Scan Settings You can set wh...

Страница 779: ...istration has elapsed If Auto Reset Time is set to 0 the machine automatically goes offline after approximately two minutes You can specify the time period in which you are logged out and the touch panel display returns to the default setting automatically Image Quality Level for Limited Color Compact Function Settings Common Generate File If you select PDF Low Color XPS Low Color Compact as the f...

Страница 780: ...Encrypted PDF mode at the same time when sending a file Trace Smooth Settings Function Settings Common Generate File You can change the recognition rate of line drawings of the original when creating a file with outline graphics If you increase the value in Graphics Recognition Level the data size also increases It is recommended that you first use Normal and if desirable results are not obtained ...

Страница 781: ...tions cannot be set if Format PDF to PDF A is set to On Encryption Reader Extensions Visible Signature Optimize PDF for Web Function Settings Common Generate File You can create a PDF that displays only the pages that are already downloaded even when a file is still being downloaded This setting is disabled when sending a fax or I fax If you set Optimize PDF for Web to On this setting can be used ...

Страница 782: ...ettings are not reflected You can analyze the embedded information using the Document Scan Code Analyzer for MEAP that is supplied with the Document Scan Lock Kit For more information see the manual for Document Scan Code Analyzer for MEAP Document Scan Lock QR Code Settings Function Settings Common Doc Scan Lock Operation Settings You can configure the settings for QR code Information Used for LD...

Страница 783: ... method for accessing an SMTP server Information Used for File TX Browsing Authentication Function Settings Common Set Authentication Method You can specify the authentication method for accessing a file server Settings Registration 771 ...

Страница 784: ...f this setting is set to On the machine can automatically switch between Collate Page Order and Offset for the finishing mode when originals are placed in the feeder This is useful when making multiple sets of copies because you do not need to remember to select the Finishing mode If a finisher is attached Collate Page Order and Offset are set However if no finisher is attached only Collate Page O...

Страница 785: ...u can restrict usage of the color mode full color Speed Priority for Copying from Feeder Function Settings Copy You can give a priority to speed over accuracy when copying from feeder Job Separator Between Groups Function Settings Copy When copying two copies or more with Group Same Pages in Finishing you can insert sheets between each page group If you select On select a paper source Settings Reg...

Страница 786: ...unction Settings Printer Specify the printer settings For more information see Setting the Machine PS PCL UFR II Printer Restrict Printer Jobs Function Settings Printer If this setting is set to On you can restrict jobs from the printer driver PDL Selection Plug and Play Function Settings Printer Select default Page Description Language PDL Settings Registration 774 ...

Страница 787: ...an select whether to display a confirmation screen when recalling Favorite Settings Default Screen Function Settings TX Common Settings You can specify the screen to display when Scan and Send or is pressed Restrict Address Book Use Function Settings TX Common Settings You can change the settings registered as default for the Scan and Send function Change Default Settings Function Settings TX Comm...

Страница 788: ...ed to 100 when printing the report and a maximum of 2 000 when sending the report TX Terminal ID Function Settings TX Common Settings You can select whether to add the sender information to the top of a sent document when sending a fax I fax Information such as the fax number name and I fax address of the machine is printed enabling the recipient to check who sent the document The settings of the ...

Страница 789: ...y the gamma value to use when converting scanned RGB image data to YCbCr You can reproduce the image with the optimal image quality at the recipient by setting an appropriate gamma value This setting is disabled for the following file formats PDF Compact XPS Compact PDF Trace Smooth Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX Function Settings TX Common Settings You can divide data into chunks when sendi...

Страница 790: ...lowing three ways to ensure that users cannot specify the destination by entering text Destinations registered in the address book and one touch buttons Destinations set in Favorite Settings and Send to Myself Destinations that can be searched for with an LDAP server Restricting the Entry of New Destinations 1 Press 2 Press Function Settings TX Common Settings Limit New Destination 3 Select the fu...

Страница 791: ...rsonal folder for individual use A Personal folder can be specified as the send destination for scanned documents and it can be created in a shared folder or on a file server Configuring Personal Folders P 588 Settings for Sent Document Backup Function Settings TX Common Settings You can save a copy of a sent fax in a specified file server The copy is converted into an electronic file such as PDF ...

Страница 792: ...Specify Authentication User as Sender to On the e mail address registered for the login user is displayed as the sender s name in the From field for the recipient regardless of the login service being used Communication Settings Function Settings TX E Mail I Fax Settings You can specify the settings for a mail server and an authentication method that you are using for e mails I faxes Setting E mai...

Страница 793: ...as well as confirm the CN Common Name If you do not verify the certificate TLS communication is performed even with an invalid certificate If there is a problem with the certificate SMTP sending will fail Confirm TLS Certificate for POP RX Function Settings TX E Mail I Fax Settings You can check whether the TLS server certificate is valid when receiving with POP You can verify the validity of the ...

Страница 794: ...agement in the From field as the sender of received e mail Allow Unregistered Users to Send E Mail Function Settings TX E Mail I Fax Settings When the machine is in use with personal authentication management you can select whether to allow the sending of an e mail from a user whose e mail address is not registered in the machine If Off is selected users with their e mail addresses registered can ...

Страница 795: ...esses that are stored with an access number do not appear Default Screen Function Settings TX Fax Settings You can specify the screen to display when Fax or is pressed Restrict Address Book Use Function Settings TX Fax Settings You can select whether to hide the Address Book and one touch buttons on the Fax Basic Features screen etc to restrict use of the Address Book Change Default Settings Funct...

Страница 796: ... the number of seconds to pause when sending faxes Some overseas dialing may not be successful when dialing the international access code country code and the destination s telephone number all at once In such cases inserting a pause after the international access code can make it easier to connect Pauses entered at the end of dialed fax numbers are always 10 seconds long Auto Redial Function Sett...

Страница 797: ...intable depending on the paper type Register Unit Telephone Number Function Settings TX Fax Settings Set Line Line X You can register the fax number to use when the fax is used on the machine The registered fax number is printed on paper at the recipient as the sender information when you send a fax Fax Line Settings P 60 Register Unit Name Function Settings TX Fax Settings Set Line Line X You can...

Страница 798: ... a PBX Private Branch Exchange it is necessary to set the access method You can set the PBX type to Prefix or Hooking If you register the outside line access number in the R key you can easily access the outside line Confirm Entered Fax Number Function Settings TX Fax Settings To prevent sending a fax to an incorrect destination you can select whether to display an entry confirmation screen when e...

Страница 799: ...hine Select Priority Line Function Settings TX Fax Settings Remote Fax Settings You can specify the line to use when sending remote faxes Use IP Fax Function Settings TX Fax Settings Remote Fax Settings You can select whether to use IP faxes IP Fax Communication Mode Settings Function Settings TX Fax Settings Remote Fax Settings You can specify the communication mode to use when sending IP faxes U...

Страница 800: ...eived document There are four printing methods Switch A The image is printed over two sheets of paper that have the same combined size as the received document Switch B The image is printed with blank space on paper that has the same width as the received document Switch C The image is reduced and printed on paper that differs in width from the received document Switch D The image is printed on pa...

Страница 801: ...ocated Print RX Page Footer Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings You can select whether to print information such as reception time and page number at the bottom of received documents YCbCr RX Gamma Value Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings You can print received I fax documents in the appropriate quality This setting is disabled when receiving faxes Interrupt and Print ...

Страница 802: ...nd proceed to step 4 Receive Method drop down list Select the reception method for the forwarding settings to display in the list Search You can search for forwarding settings using a keyword To reset the results press Clear Forward without Conditions You can specify the forwarding destination when forwarding settings are not registered or none of the set forwarding conditions are met E Mail Prior...

Страница 803: ... Inbox If you set the Memory Reception function to Off received files are printed File Name Enter a name to assign to forwarded documents If the filename is not set the first 24 characters of the forwarding condition name are entered as the filename You can also change the filename Forwarded To Set the forwarding destination for received documents Select Address Book to forward to other devices or...

Страница 804: ...g destination If the selected destination is a group address which contains a WebDAV server the document is not forwarded to the WebDAV server You cannot select multiple destinations To forward to multiple destinations select a group address Set Register Confidential Fax Inboxes Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings Set Fax I Fax Inbox You can assign a name for each Confidential Fax In...

Страница 805: ...g or deleting them from the Memory RX Inbox Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception P 354 Use I Fax Memory Lock Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings Set Fax I Fax Inbox You can select whether to save incoming I faxes in the Memory RX Inbox of the machine without printing Memory Reception This function enables you to check saved documents before printing or deleting t...

Страница 806: ... Set Fax I Fax Inbox You can specify the time to deactivate the Memory Reception function The machine will automatically cancel the Memory Reception mode at the specified time Setting the End Time for Memory Reception 1 Press 2 Press Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings 3 Press Set Fax I Fax Inbox 4 Press Memory Lock End Time and specify the required settings Everyday Set the time tha...

Страница 807: ...box of the machine Forwarded documents can be printed later Saving Received Documents in the Machine Memory Reception P 354 Always Send Notice for RX Errors Function Settings Receive Forward Common Settings You can select whether to notify the sender that an I fax was not received successfully ECM RX Function Settings Receive Forward Fax Settings You can receive faxes using the Error Correction Mo...

Страница 808: ...ngs Receive Forward Fax Settings You can set an ITU T standard password If a subaddress is not set in a document that was received from another party using the ITU T standard a reception password check takes place If the password found does not match the password set with this setting or if a password is not attached to the document the document is not received Priority is given to the subaddress ...

Страница 809: ...es Common Settings Access Stored Files Settings You can change the settings registered as default for the Access Stored Files function Limit Box PIN to 7 Digits Restrict Access Function Settings Store Access Files Common Settings If you set this setting to On users are forced to set a seven digit PIN thus enhancing security The PIN for User Inboxes can set using at least one digit Set Register Mai...

Страница 810: ...Store Access Files Advanced Box Settings You can delete all Personal Spaces in the Advanced Box Initialize Shared Space Function Settings Store Access Files Advanced Box Settings You can delete all folders and files stored in the Shared Space of the Advanced Box Prohibit Writing from External Function Settings Store Access Files Advanced Box Settings For users that accessed the machine via a compu...

Страница 811: ...or a Windows server as an external reference Connecting to the Other Devices P 68 Protocol for External Reference Function Settings Store Access Files Network Settings You can select the protocol to use when accessing the Advanced Box of another imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machine or a Windows server which is opened externally Connecting to the Other Devices P 68 Confirm TLS Certificate for Network...

Страница 812: ...int Specify whether to determine print jobs of a login user by user name domain name or only user name Depending on your environment if print jobs are not correctly determined as My Jobs they can be correctly determined as jobs of the login user by selecting Off and excluding domain name Display Other User Jobs Function Settings Print Specify whether to display the jobs from users other than the a...

Страница 813: ...job within the same group Documents with the same group information as the logged in user are displayed Groups are distinguished by Department ID If you log in with Administrator privileges when the System Manager ID is registered other user s jobs may not be displayed Settings Registration 801 ...

Страница 814: ...ettings Hold You can set the time that has to elapse before hold jobs are automatically deleted Held jobs are automatically deleted after a certain period of time or if the job ticket is edited or a job operation is performed Store PS PDF Data to Hold Function Settings Hold You can set to store PS PDF data jobs which are executed with LPR protocol in the Hold Queue Settings Registration 802 ...

Страница 815: ...t Destination You can rename each address list Register One Touch Set Destination You can register destinations to the one touch buttons of the machine Registering a Destination in a One Touch Button P 200 Change Default Display of Address Book Set Destination You can specify the type of the Address Book to display when you press Address Book on the Fax Basic Features screen or the Scan and Send B...

Страница 816: ...stination If you set this setting to On you can select whether to automatically start searching for destinations when accessing an LDAP server from the machine All users with fax numbers or e mail addresses registered are displayed as the search results Confirm TLS Certificate for LDAP Server Access Set Destination You can select whether to verify SSL certificates when connected to an LDAP server ...

Страница 817: ...y Name and Attribute Name and press OK Close You cannot edit or delete names e mail addresses fax numbers organizations or organizational units Settings for Search by Name When Using LDAP Server Set Destination You can specify the attribute used when searching an LDAP server for destinations by name using Search by Name Configuring to Search by Name for LDAP Searches 1 Press 2 Press Set Destinatio...

Страница 818: ...the destination when sending a fax to a destination obtained from a Remote Address Book Make Address Book Open Set Destination Acquire Remote Address Book You can select whether to open the Address Book of this machine to another imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machine on a network Use URI When Registering New Fax Destination Set Destination You can set whether to enable specification of a URI address ...

Страница 819: ...ormation about the hardware and operations as well as various data required when using the machine functions License Other P 814 You can register licenses and configure the settings related to the software and system options available for the machine Data Management P 816 You can configure settings to utilize the machine settings or data such as address lists or to manage the hard disk securely Se...

Страница 820: ...elect how to register users in the machine for Picture Login Configuring the User Login Methods and Authentication Devices P 571 Display Administrators Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Picture Login Select whether to display the icons of administrators on the login screen for Picture Login You can select the settings for all of the administrators and the administrator ...

Страница 821: ...rict Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Select whether to restrict use of particular functions when personal authentication management is enabled Configuring the User Login Methods and Authentication Devices P 571 Restrict Job from Remote Device without User Auth Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Select whether to apply personal authentication...

Страница 822: ...y A B of the finisher Finisher Saddle Stitch Unit Management Settings Device Management Limited Functions Mode Select whether to disable the saddle stitcher unit of the finisher Finisher Puncher Management Settings Device Management Limited Functions Mode Select whether to disable the puncher unit that is installed in the finisher Confirm Device Signature Certificate Management Settings Device Man...

Страница 823: ...the Touch Panel Display P 94 Save Audit Log Management Settings Device Management Select whether to start log recording For information on the types of logs see Specifications P 1029 Starting Log Recording P 680 Specifications P 1029 If this is set to On the Adjust Time P 738 setting cannot be used Retrieve Network Authentication Log Management Settings Device Management Select whether to start lo...

Страница 824: ...However it is also necessary to enable this setting in a single machine to function as the server for the multifunction printers performing synchronization Starting Setting Synchronization P 709 Enable Use of Personal Settings Management Settings Device Management Manage Personal Settings Select whether to enable users that are logged into the machine to register their personal settings such as th...

Страница 825: ...tialization of Administrator Password Management Settings Device Management Specify whether to restrict operations of Initialize Admin Password Counter Device Information Device Info Other Restrict Special Mode Operations Management Settings Device Management Select whether to restrict use of Special Mode which is provided for the purpose of maintenance by service representatives Settings Registra...

Страница 826: ... need to configure the key and certificate before setting this setting to On Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS P 604 Changes made for this setting are also applied to Use TLS in Remote UI P 814 Confirm TLS Certificate Using MEAP Application Management Settings License Other MEAP Settings Select whether to verify TLS server certificates and their common names CN when TLS communication is ...

Страница 827: ...ng ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM P 591 Register Update Software Management Settings License Other You can install system options MEAP applications in the machine Installing System Options P 704 Start Setup Guide Management Settings License Other You can follow the wizard instructions to configure the machine s initial settings Setting up Using the Setup Guide P 7 Allow Use of Print Function from Mobile...

Страница 828: ...the hard disk Removing Unnecessary Data from the Hard Disk P 725 Timing of Deletion Management Settings Data Management HDD Data Complete Deletion Select when to delete unnecessary data Removing Unnecessary Data from the Hard Disk P 725 Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode Management Settings Data Management HDD Data Complete Deletion You can set the Deletion mode and how many times to erase the dat...

Страница 829: ...administrator from being able to back up the TPM key If a third party takes the TPM backup key you will not be able to restore the TPM key For the purpose of enhanced security the TPM key can only be backed up once If the TPM settings are enabled make sure to back up the TPM key on to a USB memory device and store it in a secure place to prevent loss or theft The security functions provided by TPM...

Страница 830: ...rtain number of consecutive invalid login attempts This setting does not apply to authentication with a Department ID or PIN or authentication for the Mail Box Users may be blocked from logging in before a specified number of consecutive invalid login attempts if login operations are performed on Windows or other operating systems or from applications that use FTP IPP SNMPv3 SMB or WebDAV Prohibit...

Страница 831: ...Settings Authentication Password Settings Password Settings You can set a password expiration period to force users to periodically change their password in order to prevent the simplification of passwords This setting applies to personal authentication management not to Department ID and PIN Prohibit Use of 3 or More Identical Consecutive Char Management Settings Security Settings Authentication ...

Страница 832: ...anagement not to Department ID and PIN Use at Least 1 Symbol Management Settings Security Settings Authentication Password Settings Password Settings You can restrict passwords so that only passwords which include at least one symbol can be registered This setting applies to personal authentication management not to Department ID and PIN Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption Management Settings Security...

Страница 833: ... For information on the algorithms prohibited when this setting is set to On see Specifications P 1029 Settings Registration 821 ...

Страница 834: ...le lists the following contents Each setting displayed in Settings Registration Setting values Factory default setting values Settings that can and cannot be set with administrator privileges Settings that can be set from the Remote UI Settings affected by Device Information Distribution Settings that can be batch imported from the Remote UI Settings Registration 822 ...

Страница 835: ...bles 861 Emptying the Punch Waste Optional 863 Emptying the Punch Waste in the Staple Finisher 864 Emptying the Punch Waste in the Booklet Finisher 866 Emptying the Punch Waste in the Inner Finisher 868 Adjusting Print and Finish Quality 869 Adjusting Gradation 871 Adjusting Color Tone 874 Adjusting Density 876 Correcting Uneven Density 877 Correcting Color Mismatch 879 Making Colors More Vivid 88...

Страница 836: ...Consumables 898 Maintenance 824 ...

Страница 837: ...ions to take during maintenance see Important Safety Instructions in the FAQ Guide and Options P 1088 Basic Cleaning Regular Cleaning P 827 Emptying the Punch Waste Optional P 863 Replacing Consumables Replacing the Toner Cartridge P 838 Replacing the Waste Toner Container P 844 Replacing the Stamp Cartridge P 848 Replacing the Staples Optional P 851 Consumables P 898 Checking the Remaining Amount...

Страница 838: ... Other Maintenance and Adjustment Adjusting Print and Finish Quality P 869 Printing Reports and Lists P 889 Checking the Number of Pages for Copy Print Fax Scan P 888 Maintenance 826 ...

Страница 839: ...able you to use the machine comfortably and safely Clean the machine in the order indicated by to below Exterior Cleaning the Exterior P 828 Platen glass Cleaning the Platen Glass P 829 Feeder Cleaning the Feeder P 831 Interior Cleaning the Interior P 835 Dust proof glass Cleaning the Dust Proof Glass P 836 Maintenance 827 ...

Страница 840: ...n turn the power OFF even if the machine is executing an operation but this may cause the operation to be interrupted or data to become damaged 2 Wipe the surface of the machine Wet a soft cloth with water or diluted mild detergent wring the cloth out well and wipe the machine Wait until the moisture has completely dried before proceeding to the next step 3 Insert the power plug into the power out...

Страница 841: ...ting an operation but this may cause the operation to be interrupted or data to become damaged 2 Open the feeder 3 Wipe the reverse side of the feeder and the platen glass Wipe the platen glass Wipe the platen glass with the included cleaning cloth Wipe the reverse side of the feeder If you cannot remove the dirt wet a soft cloth with water and wring it out well then wipe the reverse side of the f...

Страница 842: ...ld detergent and wring it out well then wipe the machine with it Afterwards wipe the machine with a soft and dry cloth 4 Gently close the feeder 5 Insert the power plug into the power outlet and turn the power ON Turning ON the Machine P 90 Maintenance 830 ...

Страница 843: ...from the power outlet Turning OFF the Machine P 91 Check the operation status of the machine before turning the power OFF You can turn the power OFF even if the machine is executing an operation but this may cause the operation to be interrupted or data to become damaged 2 Pull the lever and open the feeder cover 3 Clean the rollers inside the feeder cover Maintenance 831 ...

Страница 844: ...Gently close the feeder cover 5 Open the feeder 6 Wipe the document feed scanning area the thin and long glass area on the platen glass side Wipe the area with the included cleaning cloth If you cannot remove the dirt wet a soft cloth with water and wring it out well then wipe the machine with it Afterwards wipe the machine with a soft and dry cloth Maintenance 832 ...

Страница 845: ...lever to open the document feed scanning area cover Gently open the cover so that you do not damage the platen glass Open the inner cover Wipe the document feed scanning area the thin and long glass area Wet a soft cloth with water and wring it out well then wipe the machine with it Afterwards wipe the machine with a soft and dry cloth Maintenance 833 ...

Страница 846: ...et and turn the power ON Turning ON the Machine P 90 If streaks still appear on paper If streaks still appear on the paper follow the procedure below to execute Clean Feeder Adjustment Maintenance Maintenance Clean Feeder Start It takes approximately 20 seconds to clean the feeder When a message indicating that cleaning is complete is displayed try using the feeder to copy an original to check if ...

Страница 847: ...aks appear on printed paper or part of the image is missing execute Clean Inside Main Unit Adjustment Maintenance Maintenance Clean Inside Main Unit Start When cleaning is complete check whether the problem has been resolved Maintenance 835 ...

Страница 848: ...the machine before turning the power OFF You can turn the power OFF even if the machine is executing an operation but this may cause the operation to be interrupted or data to become damaged 2 Open the front cover of the main unit Hold the left and right edges of the front cover of the main unit when opening it 3 Slide the cleaning stick to the right to remove it The cleaning stick is stored in th...

Страница 849: ...oles to clean them 5 When cleaning is complete return the cleaning stick to its original position Return the cleaning stick to the front cover of the main unit with its tip on the left side 6 Close the front cover of the main unit 7 Insert the power plug into the power outlet and turn the power ON Turning ON the Machine P 90 Maintenance 837 ...

Страница 850: ...nt of toner remaining Checking the Toner Level P 861 When the Message Is Displayed When the toner in the toner cartridge has run out the message Replace the toner cartridge XXXX is displayed Press the icon on the bottom right of the screen and follow the instructions on the screen to replace the toner cartridge Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge P 839 The XXXX in the message indicates the...

Страница 851: ...wing procedure When replacing multiple toner cartridges at the same time replace them in the order black yellow magenta cyan 1 Open the toner replacement cover Hold the left and right edges of the cover when opening it 2 Select the toner to replace and press Remove Toner Cartridges The toner that needs replacement is automatically selected If you press Remove Toner Cartridges the replacement cover...

Страница 852: ... screen to perform the operation again from step 1 If you select a color with toner remaining a confirmation message is displayed To cancel replacing the toner press No to deselect that color 3 Pull out the toner cartridge Make sure to avoid applying shocks to the toner cartridge by hitting it against something etc Doing so may cause the toner to leak 4 Remove the new toner cartridge from its box ...

Страница 853: ... the toner cartridge face down Doing so may prevent the toner from being supplied properly 6 Install the new toner cartridge Before installing the toner cartridge confirm that the color of the toner cartridge and the color indicated on the small cover are the same With the flat surface of the toner cartridge facing down slide the toner cartridge into the small cover as far as it will go Maintenanc...

Страница 854: ...g was interrupted because toner ran out it will automatically resume when you replace the toner cartridge Even if cyan magenta or yellow toner runs out you can continue to print in black and white as long as black toner remains but the printing quality will drop If you want to continue printing in black and white do not replace the toner cartridge until printing is complete If the color and densit...

Страница 855: ...Adjusting Color Tone P 874 Maintenance 843 ...

Страница 856: ...nsumables P 898 You can check the current amount of space remaining in the waste toner container Checking the Space Remaining in the Waste Toner Container P 861 When a Message Is Displayed When The waste toner is nearly full Replacement is not yet needed is displayed The waste toner container is almost full You can continue printing for a while without replacing it Quickly replace the waste toner ...

Страница 857: ...re 1 Open the waste toner cover Hold the left edge of the cover when opening it 2 Pull out the waste toner container After pulling out the waste toner container half way hold the handle on the top and pull it out all the way Do not tilt the waste toner container Doing so may cause the toner in the container to spill 3 Prepare a new waste toner container Remove the new waste toner container from it...

Страница 858: ...ll the new waste toner container Insert the waste toner container with the Canon logo on top of the container towards the back of the machine and push it in to load it Push the waste toner container in as far as it will go If the waste toner container is not installed correctly the container shutter may stay open when the waste toner container is removed which may cause toner to scatter Maintenanc...

Страница 859: ...6 Close the waste toner cover The used waste toner container will be collected by your local authorized Canon dealer Maintenance 847 ...

Страница 860: ...es P 898 1 Turn the power OFF and remove the power plug from the power outlet Turning OFF the Machine P 91 Check the operation status of the machine before turning the power OFF You can turn the power OFF even if the machine is executing an operation but this may cause the operation to be interrupted or data to become damaged 2 Open the feeder 3 Open the document feed scanning area cover Pull the ...

Страница 861: ...Remove the stamp cartridge Install the new stamp cartridge Push the stamp cartridge straight in until it clicks into place Installing it at an angle may cause paper jams 6 Close the stamp cover 7 Close the document feed scanning area cover until it clicks into place Maintenance 849 ...

Страница 862: ...feeder 9 Insert the power plug into the power outlet and turn the power ON Turning ON the Machine P 90 LINKS Stamping Scanned Originals for Sending P 337 Stamping Scanned Originals for Sending Saving P 445 Maintenance 850 ...

Страница 863: ...he Booklet Finisher P 854 Replacing the Staples of the Inner Finisher P 859 Copies and prints may be output to optional equipment while you are replacing the staple Take care when handling the optional equipment installed to the machine Do not remove the tape securing the staples until instructed to do so in the procedure described below For information on the product number for the staples see Co...

Страница 864: ...3 1 Open the front cover of the finisher 2 Pull out the staple case Hold the green handle on the staple case and pull it straight out 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case 4 Remove the new staple cartridge from its box Maintenance 852 ...

Страница 865: ...5 Load the new staple cartridge to the staple case 6 Hold the green handle on the staple case and push it in as far as it will go 7 Close the front cover of the finisher Maintenance 853 ...

Страница 866: ...les of the Saddle Stitcher Unit P 856 Take care not to be injured by staples Replacing the Staples of the Staple Unit 1 Open the front cover of the finisher 2 Pull out the staple case Hold the green handle on the staple case and pull it straight out 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case Maintenance 854 ...

Страница 867: ...4 Remove the new staple cartridge from its box 5 Load the new staple cartridge to the staple case 6 Hold the green handle on the staple case and push it in as far as it will go Maintenance 855 ...

Страница 868: ...the Saddle Stitcher Unit Confirm before handling If there is any paper in the booklet tray remove it 1 Open the front cover of the finisher 2 Pull out the saddle stitcher unit 3 Remove the two staple cases while pulling down the lever towards yourself Maintenance 856 ...

Страница 869: ...rtridge While holding both sides of the top of the empty staple cartridge lift up the staple cartridge to remove it 5 Remove the new staple cartridge from its box 6 Load the new staple cartridge to the staple case Maintenance 857 ...

Страница 870: ...n the saddle stitcher unit and close the front cover of the finisher 9 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Action Saddle Stitch Staple Repositioning Start Since paper is required to perform staple repositioning load A3 B4 or A4R size paper in a paper source in advance Loading Paper P 112 Maintenance 858 ...

Страница 871: ...er of the finisher 2 Pull out the staple case Pull the green handle to disengage the lock and lift the case slightly upwards while pulling it straight out 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case 4 Remove the new staple cartridge from its box Maintenance 859 ...

Страница 872: ... the staple case 6 Hold the green handle on the staple case and push it in as far as it will go 7 Close the front cover of the finisher The finisher may automatically perform dry stapling to perform staple repositioning Maintenance 860 ...

Страница 873: ...ng the Toner Level It is recommended that you check the toner level before printing a large job to determine whether or not to prepare a new toner cartridge Press check the toner level Checking the Space Remaining in the Waste Toner Container It is recommended that you check the space remaining in the waste toner container before performing a large job to determine whether or not to prepare a new ...

Страница 874: ...f booklets to determine whether or not to prepare a new staple cartridge Press Consumables Others check the remaining amount of staples Estimated remaining amount of staples When OK is displayed enough staples remain You do not need to replace the staples When Light is displayed the remaining amount of staples is small Prepare new staples so you can replace them at any time When Empty is displayed...

Страница 875: ...n the screen to empty the punch waste Emptying the Punch Waste in the Staple Finisher P 864 Emptying the Punch Waste in the Booklet Finisher P 866 Emptying the Punch Waste in the Inner Finisher P 868 Copies and prints may be output to optional equipment while you are emptying the punch waste Take care when handling the optional equipment installed to the machine Maintenance 863 ...

Страница 876: ...r 2 Pull out the punch waste tray Hold the handle and gently pull out the tray towards yourself After pulling out the punch waste tray half way place your hand underneath it and pull it out all the way 3 Empty the punch waste 4 Return the punch waste tray to its original position Maintenance 864 ...

Страница 877: ... Push the punch waste tray in as far as it will go 5 Close the front cover of the finisher Maintenance 865 ...

Страница 878: ...r 2 Pull out the punch waste tray Hold the handle and gently pull out the tray towards yourself After pulling out the punch waste tray half way place your hand underneath it and pull it out all the way 3 Empty the punch waste 4 Return the punch waste tray to its original position Maintenance 866 ...

Страница 879: ... Push the punch waste tray in as far as it will go 5 Close the front cover of the finisher Maintenance 867 ...

Страница 880: ...ndle and gently pull out the tray towards yourself After pulling out the punch waste tray half way place your hand underneath it and pull it out all the way 2 Empty the punch waste 3 Return the punch waste tray to its original position Push the punch waste tray in as far as it will go Maintenance 868 ...

Страница 881: ...that it more closely matches the original document Adjusting Density P 876 Shading Correction If the image areas of the printing have uneven density this correction adjusts the printing so that the density is even There are two methods for correcting the density densitometer correction and visual correction Correcting Uneven Density P 877 Color Mismatch Correction If the colors of printing run or ...

Страница 882: ...the saddle stitch position of the paper is not exactly in the middle of the booklet you can make adjustments to the saddle stitch position Adjusting the Saddle Stitch Position P 885 Saddle Stitch Folding Position Adjustment You can adjust the saddle stitch folding position during booklet printing Adjusting the Saddle Stitch Folding Position P 886 Paper Folding Position Adjustment You can adjust th...

Страница 883: ...dation of an image accurately and optimize reproducibility during printing Optimized information will be retained until the next accurate correction 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation 2 Select the paper to adjust and press Full Adjust If you selected Simple in Adjustment Level it is not necessary to select the paper Adjustment is applied to all paper types 3 ...

Страница 884: ... adjustment print the test page four times and scan it each time it is printed Quick Adjustment This adjustment maintains the optimized status that was acquired by Full Adjust If the result of this adjustment is not satisfactory perform Full Adjust 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation 2 Select the paper to adjust and press Quick Adjust If you selected Simple in...

Страница 885: ...djustment If the room environment dramatically changes after registering the adjustment paper the gradation density and color may not be able to be correctly adjusted by performing auto gradation adjustment using the registered adjustment paper In this case register the adjustment paper again Since this may cause poor color balance make sure to perform auto gradation adjustment full adjustment aft...

Страница 886: ...y Auto Correct Color Tone Settings 2 Press Auto Correct Color Tone Yes If you have not performed auto gradation adjustment full adjustment press No to execute it Adjusting Gradation P 871 3 Press Start Correcting To perform color adjustment based on an adjustment standard registered in advance select the adjustment standard in Change Corr Pattern For information on creating a new adjustment standa...

Страница 887: ...olor Tone Settings 2 Press Register Correction Pattern Yes If you have not performed auto gradation adjustment full adjustment press No to execute it Adjusting Gradation P 871 3 Select the destination to register the new adjustment standard press Next 4 Select the paper press Next select the paper source and press OK 5 Press Start Printing A test page is printed 6 Place the test page on the platen...

Страница 888: ...sity of the output paper and that of the original follow the procedure below to adjust the density 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Density 2 Adjust the density 3 Press OK LINKS Basic Copy Operations P 210 Basic Operations for Sending Faxes P 319 Basic Operations for Scanning Originals P 411 Maintenance 876 ...

Страница 889: ...l densitometer and enter the measured density values to correct the density of halftone areas 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Correct Shading Densitometer Correction 2 Press Start Printing A test page is printed 3 Measure the test page with a densitometer Measure marks 1 to 7 printed on the test page and make a note of the density values that are detected 4 Press Fine Adjust fo...

Страница 890: ...tput Test Page Start Printing A test page is printed 3 Visually check the test page to determine the density adjustment values Range of Marks Printed The range of marks printed for each color may be 6 to 6 or 5 to 5 depending on the paper size used for the test page 4 Press Fine Adjust for each color 5 Enter the density values Enter the density values according to the results that you visually che...

Страница 891: ...ismatch 13WK 0LK Perform the following correction when color mismatch color misregistration occurs in printing 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch 2 Press Start Maintenance 879 ...

Страница 892: ... printing 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Full Color Printing Vividness Settings 2 Select the level Standard prints with the same color as the original Level 1 prints with more saturated colors than the original Level 2 prints with even more saturated colors 3 Press OK Maintenance 880 ...

Страница 893: ...ion finely adjusts that copying result to more closely match the size of the original 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Fine Adjust Zoom 2 Adjust the image size Adjust the magnification of the horizontal width X and vertical width Y 3 Press OK LINKS Basic Copy Operations P 210 Maintenance 881 ...

Страница 894: ...nables the gradations and curves of the printed image to be reproduced more smoothly 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Dither Pattern Settings 2 Select the dither pattern Pattern 1 The default setting Pattern 2 This setting enhances reproduction of edge areas of the printed image Pattern 3 This setting enhances reproduction of highlight areas of black and white images Pattern 4 T...

Страница 895: ... Since this may cause poor color balance make sure to perform auto gradation adjustment full adjustment after changing the settings Adjusting Gradation P 871 Maintenance 883 ...

Страница 896: ...the strength and density of the color balance 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Color Balance 2 Select the paper type 3 Adjust the color balance 4 Press Fine Adjust Density 5 Select the color to adjust then adjust the density 6 Press OK Maintenance 884 ...

Страница 897: ...let you can make adjustments to compensate for this error Adjust the folding position of the paper and the saddle stitch position at the same time 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Action Change Fold Stitch Position 2 Select the paper size you want to adjust 3 Adjust the saddle stitch position 4 Press OK Close LINKS Basic Copy Operations P 210 Making Booklets P 254 Optional Equipment P 1090 Ma...

Страница 898: ... the paper are not exactly in the middle of the booklet use this setting to adjust the saddle stitch fold placement 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Action Adjust Saddle Stitch Fold Position 2 Adjust the folding position 3 Press OK LINKS Basic Copy Operations P 210 Making Booklets P 254 Optional Equipment P 1090 Maintenance 886 ...

Страница 899: ... of the paper are not exactly in the intended position use this setting to adjust the fold position 1 Press Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Action Adjust Fold Position 2 Select the paper 3 Adjust the folding position 4 Press OK LINKS Basic Copy Operations P 210 Making Booklets P 254 Optional Equipment P 1090 Maintenance 887 ...

Страница 900: ...ption Number of pages copied and printed Total indicates the number of all printed pages copying printing from computers printing received faxes etc Large refers to A3 or larger size of standard paper Small refers to A4 or smaller size of standard paper Number of pages scanned and sent Items are classified by the destination transmission destination or saving destination of scans as follows and th...

Страница 901: ...ent ID To print this list you need to log in with Administrator privileges Logging into the Machine P 104 Management Settings User Management Department ID Management On Page Totals Print List Select the items to print Start Printing In this report the numbers are based on copied or printed sides of the page For example the count is 1 if you print on one side of a page and the count is 2 if you pr...

Страница 902: ...ator privileges the jobs of all users are displayed 1 Press 2 Display the usage history of each function and print a list Copy print log 1 Press Copy Print Job Log 2 Select the items you want to print and press Print List 3 Press Yes Sending receiving log 1 Press TX or Receive Job Log 2 Select TX or Receive from the list and press Communication Management Report 3 Press Start Printing Maintenance ...

Страница 903: ...r or not to print the list automatically Communication Management Report P 892 Fax sending receiving log 1 Press TX or Receive Job Log 2 Select Fax from the list and press Fax Activity Report 3 Press Start Printing If you select Output Spec No of Transm in step 3 you can specify the number of log results that appear in the list You can specify whether or not to print the list automatically Fax Act...

Страница 904: ...ace is reached You can also configure the setting to print the report at a specified time Function Settings TX Common Settings Communication Management Report Set the report OK You cannot configure the settings for the Communication Management Report while Display Job Log in Management Settings is set to Off In addition if you change Display Job Log in Management Settings from Off to On Auto Print...

Страница 905: ... Fax Activity Report Set the report OK You cannot configure the settings for the Fax Activity Report while Display Job Log in Management Settings is set to Off In addition if you change Display Job Log in Management Settings from Off to On Auto Print 40 Transmissions and Specify Print Time in the Fax Activity Report automatically changes to Off Display Job Log P 811 You can manually print a Fax Ac...

Страница 906: ... received fax is saved in the Confidential Fax Inbox You can also configure the setting so that the report is not printed Function Settings Receive Forward Fax Settings Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report Set the report OK Even though Off is set in this setting if Fax RX Report P 894 is enabled a report is printed when a fax is saved in the Confidential Fax Inbox Printer Report You can print and chec...

Страница 907: ...ng a List of Settings Information and settings registered in the machine such as registered destinations send receive settings fax settings forwarding conditions files in a Mail Box etc can be printed as a list Address Lists You can print a list of destinations registered in the Address Book or in one touch buttons Set Destination Address Lists Select the address book or one touch buttons to print...

Страница 908: ... a list of the settings configured for Network in Preferences in the setting menu Preferences Network Output Report Yes System Information list You can print a list of information such as MEAP applications and licenses You are required to log in with Administrator privileges to print this list Management Settings License Other MEAP Settings Print System Information Yes Device Information Distribut...

Страница 909: ...nistrator privileges to print this list Set Destination Register LDAP Server Print List Yes IPSec Policy List You can print a list of IPSec policy settings registered in the machine You are required to log in with Administrator privileges to print this list Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPSec Settings Print List Yes Maintenance 897 ...

Страница 910: ...e front cover of the machine and the one on the package of the genuine toner are the same Model name Genuine Canon toner imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560i C5550i C5540i C5535i Canon NPG 71 Toner Black Canon NPG 71 Toner Cyan Canon NPG 71 Toner Magenta Canon NPG 71 Toner Yellow Canon NPG 71L Toner Cyan Canon NPG 71L Toner Magenta Canon NPG 71L Toner Yellow Not available in some regions Be careful of count...

Страница 911: ...se the dedicated replacement staples for this machine Also note that the product number of the staples to use differs according to the finisher Finisher name Genuine Canon staples Staple Finisher Y1 Booklet Finisher Y1 Inner Finisher H1 Staple P1 Booklet Finisher Y1 Staple Cartridge Y1 Maintenance 899 ...

Страница 912: ...Waste Toner Container WT 202 Maintenance 900 ...

Страница 913: ...a Local Authorized Canon Dealer Is Displayed 923 Countermeasures for Each Message 925 Countermeasures for Each Error Code 955 Clearing Paper Jams 977 Paper Jams in the Feeder 980 Paper Jams in the Main Unit 983 Paper Jams in a Paper Source 988 Paper Jams in a Finisher Optional 995 Paper Jams in the Staple Finisher 996 Paper Jams in the Booklet Finisher 999 Paper Jams in the Inner Finisher 1004 Cle...

Страница 914: ...problem do you have If the Machine Does Not Operate P 904 Cannot Print P 906 Problems with Printing Results P 907 Problems with Faxes P 911 Problems with Scanning P 912 Problems with the Network P 913 A Message or a Number Starting with an Error Code Is Displayed P 922 Problems with Security P 917 Problems with MEAP P 918 Other Problems P 920 Troubleshooting 902 ...

Страница 915: ... When a paper jam staple jam occurs Clearing Paper Jams P 977 Clearing Staple Jams Optional P 1007 Troubleshooting 903 ...

Страница 916: ...t light up even though the power switch is ON check the power plug Is lit If it is lit press to cancel the Sleep mode Is the machine connected to a computer correctly Check the network connection of the machine and the computer Setting up the Network Environment P 19 If the machine does not respond to computer operations Restart the machine If the machine does not respond even though its power is ...

Страница 917: ...login screen is displayed Log in as a registered user When the authentication screen login screen is displayed you must log in as a registered user to continue operating the machine Logging into the Machine P 104 Troubleshooting 905 ...

Страница 918: ...he Machine Forced Hold Printing P 396 Is a message displayed on the touch panel display A message is displayed on the touch panel display when an error or a problem occurs while operating the machine A Message or a Number Starting with an Error Code Is Displayed P 922 Is Auto Select set to No To switch to the appropriate operation mode change all items or the items you are using to Yes Setting the...

Страница 919: ... P 908 The printed image is displaced or skewed Are the paper guides misaligned Match the paper guides with the paper loaded in the paper source Images are uneven or faint Is the paper damp Replace the paper with paper that is not damp Are the gradation and density set appropriately Perform gradation adjustment Adjusting Gradation P 871 Black streaks appear Is the document feed scanning area dirty...

Страница 920: ...at is facing up Load the paper again if it is incorrectly orientated Loading Paper P 112 Images are not printed in the intended size Do the original size and size of the paper that is loaded match Replace the paper that is loaded with paper of the size you want to print on Match Output Size in the printer driver with the size of paper to print on The orientation does not match on both sides of the...

Страница 921: ...driver set Orientation to the same orientation you set in step 1 3 While checking the print preview set Page Layout Page Order 1 sided 2 sided Booklet Printing Binding Location Page Order is displayed when Page Layout is set to 2 on 1 or higher Orientation Portrait Orientation Landscape Binding Location Short Edge Troubleshooting 909 ...

Страница 922: ...Binding Location Long Edge Troubleshooting 910 ...

Страница 923: ... and change it if it is incorrect Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book P 198 Editing the Registered Destinations in One Touch Buttons P 203 If you are using an optical line or an IP phone line Communication errors may occur depending on the line quality For more information contact your service provider You may be able to reduce communication errors by lowering the transmission ...

Страница 924: ...n One Touch Buttons P 203 Cannot send scanned documents via e mail Is the information for the destination correct Change the settings registered in the address book or one touch buttons Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book P 198 Editing the Registered Destinations in One Touch Buttons P 203 Are the settings for the SMTP server or DNS server correct If no e mail can be sent set t...

Страница 925: ...S server is on the network that the machine is connected to check whether the information for devices connected to an external network is registered on the DNS server and whether it is correct Cannot recognize the machine from a computer If the IP address of the computer where the Remote UI and utility software are executed is not allowed for sending and receiving in Firewall Settings the informat...

Страница 926: ...ot use a proxy for in the proxy server settings of the Web browser Is communication with computers restricted in the firewall If the Remote UI cannot be displayed because the settings are incorrect set IPv4 Address Filter IPv6 Address Filter or MAC Address Filter to Off from the control panel of the machine Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls P 596 Network P 741 IPv4 Address Filter Networ...

Страница 927: ...nected to the network If you cannot connect to a wireless LAN P 915 If you cannot connect to a wireless LAN Check the status of the computer Is setup of the computer and wireless LAN router complete Are any of cables of the wireless LAN router power cable LAN cable etc disconnected Is the wireless LAN router turned ON If the problem is still not resolved Turn all the devices off and then on again ...

Страница 928: ...nnection by Specifying Detailed Settings P 29 ANY rejection is enabled An automatically generated WEP key hexadecimal is set The stealth function is enabled A wireless LAN router function for refusing connections if the device trying to connect has ANY or blank set for the SSID If it is necessary to change the settings on the wireless LAN router side If the wireless LAN router is set as follows ch...

Страница 929: ...eselecting the check box Deselect the check box and change the corresponding settings from the button or from Settings Registration in the Remote UI Cannot import security policy settings Have you set a different security policy password from the source device Remove the password in the destination device or set the same password as the source device Using a Password to Protect the Security Policy...

Страница 930: ...ication with the UDP protocol using port 53 but the data may be processed with the TCP protocol if it exceeds a certain size Connecting to an Active Directory server fails when Windows Server firewall is set an error message indicating that the authentication server is not operating is displayed Communication with the Active Directory server is blocked by the firewall Stop blocking the default por...

Страница 931: ...dialog box and click OK Startup is slow A host that name resolution cannot be performed for an address that cannot be identified is set in the SRV record retrieved with automatic domain retrieval The DNS server set in the machine is not found or cannot communicate Check the settings and communication environment If a standby time for network connections is set on the machine change the setting Set...

Страница 932: ...ipment or system options that they require are not installed The buttons displayed on the screen have been changed For the Main Menu press Display All and search for the desired button For a Basic Features screen press Options and search for the desired button Customizing the Main Menu P 154 Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 162 The settings are managed with security policy settings To chang...

Страница 933: ...s by changing the machine settings For more information contact your local authorized Canon dealer The setting for K size paper is not displayed You can use K size paper by changing the machine settings For more information contact your local authorized Canon dealer Troubleshooting 921 ...

Страница 934: ...or a number starting with an error code is displayed on the details screen for job log or a communication management report refer to the following to check the remedy A Message Saying to Contact a Local Authorized Canon Dealer Is Displayed P 923 Countermeasures for Each Message P 925 Countermeasures for Each Error Code P 955 Troubleshooting 922 ...

Страница 935: ...er than 10 seconds after the Main Power indicator turns off and then turn the power ON again Note that data waiting to be processed is erased when you turn the power OFF 2 If the message is still displayed prepare the following information Product name imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560i C5550i C5540i C5535i The dealer where you purchased the machine The problem the specific operation you performed and the...

Страница 936: ...le when the Print function is limited Fax Scan Scanner Web Access Tutorial MEAP Application Quick Menu Status Monitor Cancel Remote UI Functions available when the Scan function is limited Access Stored Files Fax I Fax Inbox Print Hold Web Access Tutorial MEAP Application Quick Menu Status Monitor Cancel Remote UI The following screen is displayed when you select a function that is limited with th...

Страница 937: ...error occurred for You can perform the following printing 33 WORK FULL Could not print because the dedicated work memory was insufficient Cancel printing initialize the printer to increase the free memory and then try printing again However note that initializing the printer will erase all the data in the memory of the machine Canceling Printing P 385 Setting the Machine PS PCL UFR II Printer Pres...

Страница 938: ...ata that could not be registered will not be printed correctly For information on divided printing see Print D1 Polygon Buffer Full Could not draw because data could not be registered to the polygon buffer Press Skip Error and continue printing However the data that could not be registered will not be printed correctly For information on the polygon buffer see Print D0 nn error nn is two alphanume...

Страница 939: ...played after restarting the machine make a note of the message and contact your local authorized Canon dealer FM SC WORK MEM ERROR n n is a single alphanumeric character The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem Restart the machine If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine make a note of the message and contact your local authorized Canon dealer FM ALIGN...

Страница 940: ...icate sent from the RADIUS server Check the content of the server certificate of the RADIUS server IEEE 802 1X error The certificate is incorrect An error occurred when using the server certificate sent from the RADIUS server as a CA certificate for validation Check the content of the server certificate of the RADIUS server and the CA certificate registered in the machine Registering a CA Certific...

Страница 941: ... to your environment The proxy server does not support TLS encrypted communication If the WebDAV client connects to the internet via a proxy set TLS on the proxy server side Cannot delete the default key because it is in use by TLS or other settings Check the settings The key and certificate you are trying to delete is being used in TLS encrypted communications or the Restrict Receiving for Each F...

Страница 942: ...tinuously sending with FTP or Windows SMB Try again after waiting a while Check the TCP IP The TCP IP of the machine is not operating Check the IP address DHCP and Auto IP settings in TCP IP Settings Setting an IPv4 Address P 33 XPS Print Range Error There are no pages that can be processed in the specified range for printing Specify a correct page range XPS Image Data Error Failed to extend the i...

Страница 943: ...ot be found Check the wireless LAN settings Check the settings and information of the wireless LAN P 24 Cannot start this application because system resources memory threads sockets file descriptors disk space or screen size required to start the application may not be available Resources The application cannot be used because the required system resources such as memory and disk space may not be ...

Страница 944: ...ould not be downloaded because an unknown error occurred Use the Back button to return to the previous page Could not delete authentication information because an error occurred The authentication information could not be deleted because an unknown error occurred Contact your local authorized Canon dealer No response Could not send because an error occurred in the server Check whether the server i...

Страница 945: ...nchronize Custom Settings An error occurred An error occurred during synchronization startup Confirm that the address of the destination server is correct for the synchronization of custom settings client If the synchronization of custom settings client is complete restart synchronization Restart the machine If the problem is not resolved even after restarting the machine check whether 1 you can p...

Страница 946: ...include both IPv4 and IPv6 if IPv6 is prioritized and the client machine disables IPv6 the client machine cannot connect via search Enter the IPv4 address for the destination server address If the synchronization of custom settings client is complete restart synchronization and then restart the machine A toner cartridge with the wrong item name is inserted If this toner cartridge is used informati...

Страница 947: ...nd thin glass strip is dirty Clean the document feed scanning area Cleaning the Feeder P 831 Return the originals to their correct order then press the Start key Scanning stopped because an unknown problem occurred in the feeder Scan the original again from the first page Return the originals to their correct order then press the Start key The data size of the scanned original exceeds the limit Se...

Страница 948: ...ying The certificate is invalid Register the correct certificate and specify the settings again Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS P 604 Registering a Key and Certificate for Network Communication P 666 This CRL is invalid The certificate revocation list CRL may be corrupt or a signing algorithm not supported by the machine may be used Register the correct certificate revocation list CRL ...

Страница 949: ...xpired The certificate may have expired Check the expiration date of the certificate registered in the machine If the certificate has expired register a valid certificate Registering a Key and Certificate for Network Communication P 666 The date and time set on the machine may be incorrect Check the date and time setting of the machine Setting the Date Time P 17 The specified application cannot be...

Страница 950: ...whether the WebDAV server settings are correct The disk space of the WebDAV server is insufficient for the request from the WebDAV client Make sufficient disk space for the request available on the WebDAV server The appropriate paper size A4 is not available Paper of the optimal size selected with Automatic Paper Selection has not been loaded Load paper of the displayed size Paper Drawer Auto Sele...

Страница 951: ...can only be installed to certain devices Install an application that is supported by the machine The contents of the specified file are incorrect or information is missing Check the file The specified file is not a license file Check whether the specified file is a license file The specified file contains insufficient information Check the content of the file Cannot find the specified application ...

Страница 952: ... of one of the inserted toner cartridges may be incorrect Make sure to check the status of the inserted container which is displayed in the area within the frame To continue using the toner cartridge press I Agree If you select this option the operation of the machine is not guaranteed To replace the toner cartridge press Cancel If you are not sure about the remedies contact your local authorized ...

Страница 953: ...e blocked by the filter Check whether the gateway address set in TCP IP Settings is correct Setting an IPv4 Address P 33 Could not send An error occurred in the WebDAV server or proxy server Check the settings for the WebDAV server or proxy server The target file or directory does not allow access from outside Check whether the WebDAV server settings are correct Check whether the destination is co...

Страница 954: ... connect it again restart the machine Connecting to a Wired LAN P 23 The DNS server is not set correctly Check whether the address of the DNS server is set correctly in IPv4 or IPv6 Making DNS Settings P 42 The proxy server is not set correctly Check the proxy server settings An error occurred while communicating with the time stamp server Check whether the time stamp server is operating normally ...

Страница 955: ...Editing the Quick Menu P 171 Cannot import because the number of buttons for registration has exceeded the upper limit Buttons cannot be registered while importing because the maximum number of personal buttons shared buttons has been exceeded Delete unnecessary personal buttons shared buttons and import the data again Could not retrieve the device information details Do you want to register the d...

Страница 956: ... machine Replacing the Toner Cartridge P 838 Cleaning the drum Wait a moment The machine is cleaning the drum Printing will automatically resume when the adjustment is complete Wait a while Load staples into the saddle stitch unit The staple case in the saddle stitcher unit of the optional equipment has run out of staples Replace the staple case of the saddle stitcher unit Replacing the Staples Op...

Страница 957: ...lict with the IP address of another device Setting an IPv4 Address P 33 Could not perform the operation because a network error occurred Writing from an external source is not allowed Set Prohibit Writing from External for the destination to Off You tried to save a file directly under a shared space or personal space Files cannot be saved directly under the shared space share or personal space use...

Страница 958: ...ste Optional P 863 Remove the original from the feeder You are using a function that cannot be used when an original is placed in the feeder Place the original on the platen glass The alignment function of the finisher needs to be checked Contact your service representative Printing is still possible The paper alignment function of the finisher is broken Restart the machine If the message is still...

Страница 959: ...ontact your local authorized Canon dealer PDL DLG Unknown Error The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem Restart the machine If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine make a note of the message and contact your local authorized Canon dealer PDL DLG Memory Full The work memory was insufficient when the system was processing data in particular graphic pro...

Страница 960: ...e to an unknown problem Restart the machine If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine make a note of the message and contact your local authorized Canon dealer PDL IMG Refer Data Err The TIFF or JPEG data includes data that cannot be processed with the machine Cancel printing initialize the printer to increase the free memory and then try printing again However note that initi...

Страница 961: ...etting the Machine PS PCL UFR II Printer Press Skip Error and continue printing However the data that caused the error will not be printed PDL nn Rendering Error nn is the module name The printer stopped operating normally due to an unknown problem Restart the machine If the message is still displayed after restarting the machine make a note of the message and contact your local authorized Canon d...

Страница 962: ...rized Canon dealer PDL XPS Initialize Error An unknown error such as not being able to retrieve memory during initialization occurred Restart the machine and try again If the message is still displayed make a note of the message and contact your local authorized Canon dealer PDL XPS Rendering Error An error occurred in the rendering system Restart the machine and try again If the message is still ...

Страница 963: ... staple case in the staple unit of the optional equipment has run out of staples Replace the staple case Replacing the Staples Optional P 851 Wireless LAN communication error Turn main power OFF and ON An unknown error occurred when configuring the wireless LAN connection Restart the machine Wireless LAN comm error Check Wireless LAN Information An unknown error occurred when configuring the wirel...

Страница 964: ...ls after copying is complete Scanning will be canceled because the memory is full Wait a moment then try again When using the Copy function scanning was canceled because the memory became full while scanning the original Press OK to return to the Basic Features screen Scan the remaining originals after the current copy operation is complete Scanning will be canceled because the memory is full Do y...

Страница 965: ...that is loaded Paper settings can be specified for all the paper sizes and types set in the paper drawers and multi purpose tray in Preferences Paper Settings Specifying Paper Size and Type P 137 The paper settings of the driver or application differ from the paper that is loaded Check the paper settings on the Printing Preferences screen of the printer driver and if the paper settings are incorre...

Страница 966: ...mation for the LDAP server set the correct settings according to the settings registered in the LDAP server Registering Server Information P 565 Cannot store the password because the number of passwords stored for each user has reached the limit The login user password cannot be registered because the maximum number of passwords has been exceeded Delete unnecessary password information Troubleshoo...

Страница 967: ... 711 P 961 712 P 961 713 P 961 715 P 961 716 P 961 751 P 961 752 P 962 753 P 962 755 P 962 759 P 962 761 P 963 762 P 963 763 P 963 766 P 963 767 P 963 769 P 964 770 P 964 771 P 964 772 P 964 773 P 965 801 to 999 801 P 965 802 P 965 804 P 965 805 P 966 806 P 966 807 P 966 809 P 966 810 P 966 813 P 967 818 P 967 819 P 967 820 P 967 821 P 967 822 P 967 827 P 967 828 P 967 829 P 967 830 P 968 832 P 96...

Страница 968: ...for 35 seconds Check that the other party can communicate and try sending again The device of the other party is not a model that supports G3 Check the device of the other party 009 Paper has run out Load paper Loading Paper P 112 The paper deck paper drawer is not inserted correctly Insert the paper deck paper drawer in all the way Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer P 114 010 Paper has run out Loa...

Страница 969: ...x Specify another destination and try sending again When sending to a destination registered in the address book sending could not be performed because the destination was deleted from the address book while the machine was waiting to send Specify another destination and try sending again Sending from the fax driver is not allowed Set Allow Fax Driver TX to On and try sending again Restricting the...

Страница 970: ...nd was not found in memory Scan the original again and try sending again Select direct sending when sending again Could not send to multiple destinations because the machine had insufficient free memory Delete unnecessary documents and error documents to free up space Divide the document into two or more parts and then try sending the document again Lower the resolution and try sending again 040 W...

Страница 971: ...hat the subaddress and password of the machine and the device of the other party match and try sending again 084 Cannot perform polling reception because the password is not supported by the device of the other party Perform polling reception without using a password 099 The operation was canceled before it was complete Perform the operation again An error occurred because the power of the machine...

Страница 972: ...tely rather than all at once 703 Could not write because the image area of the memory is full Try sending again after the other sending is complete Delete unnecessary files in the Mail Box and Fax I Fax Inbox If there is still a problem restart the machine Turning ON the Machine P 90 704 An unknown error occurred when retrieving destination information from the address book Check the destination s...

Страница 973: ...te for user signatures again Registering a User Signature Certificate P 644 Check whether an expired certificate or revoked certificate is being used In addition check whether the certificate chain is invalid 716 The destination public key certificate could not be found Register the destination public key certificate in the machine Registering an S MIME Certificate P 669 Check whether an expired c...

Страница 974: ...incorrect or the e mail address or domain name is not set Check the SMTP server name e mail address and domain name settings in Communication Settings Setting E mail I Fax Communication P 62 753 A TCP IP error Socket or Select error etc occurred when sending e mail or when sending a fax from a remote fax client machine Check the status of the network cable and connector If there is still a problem...

Страница 975: ...rror occurred because the license file was corrupt or the password of the license file was incorrect Check whether the license file is corrupt If the license file is corrupt set it again Common P 760 Generate File Time Stamp Settings Set a password for the license file again Common P 760 Generate File Time Stamp Settings 766 The certificate to use when sending a PDF XPS file with a digital signatu...

Страница 976: ... occurred when validating the TLS server certificate when accessing another server because Confirm TLS Certificate for Network Access is set to On Check whether the CA certificate used to sign the TLS server certificate of the Advanced Box of the other imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machine disclosed as a WebDAV server is registered in the machine Check whether the TLS server certificate of the Advanc...

Страница 977: ...er Check whether SMTP is operating normally the status of the network the destination settings and the status and settings of the file server You sent to a destination that does not have write privileges Check the destination settings A file with the same name existed when sending to a file server that does not allow files to be overwritten Change the settings of the file server to enable files to...

Страница 978: ...ver directory or send to a directory that you have access privileges for Alternatively contact your administrator 809 When sending to an SMB server a file with the same name already exists and overwriting of files is not allowed Change the filename and try sending again Change the settings of the SMB server to enable files to be overwritten Alternatively contact the server administrator 810 A POP ...

Страница 979: ...andled was received The BASE64 or uuencode is invalid Tell the other party to check the settings and send again 821 Data that cannot be handled was received A TIFF analysis error occurred Tell the other party to check the settings and send again 822 Data that cannot be handled was received The image cannot be decoded Tell the other party to check the settings and send again 827 Data that cannot be...

Страница 980: ...g E mail I Fax Communication P 62 Making DNS Settings P 42 Setting an IP Address P 32 DSN mail could not be sent due to a problem with the mail server or DNS server Check the status of the mail server and DNS server 833 MDN Message Disposition Notification mail could not be sent because the TCP IP settings were not specified Check Communication Settings DNS Settings and IP Address Settings Setting...

Страница 981: ...gs 842 The mail server requested authentication using a client certificate for e mail and I fax transmission Set Allow TLS POP or Allow TLS SMTP TX in Communication Settings to Off Setting E mail I Fax Communication P 62 Change mail server settings so that a client certificate is not requested Sending could not be performed because a validation error occurred when validating the TLS server certifi...

Страница 982: ...Communication Settings Setting E mail I Fax Communication P 62 Check the POP authentication settings of the POP server Select Standard or APOP in POP Auth Method in Communication Settings If the problem is not resolved set POP Authentication Before Sending to Off in Communication Settings and switch the communication settings to something other than POP before SMTP Setting E mail I Fax Communicati...

Страница 983: ...ebDAV a response indicating that authentication failed was received from the destination received HTTP Error 401 Unauthorized Check the user name or password Check the WebDAV server security settings 870 When sending with WebDAV a response indicating that the request was rejected was received from the destination received HTTP Error 403 Forbidden Try sending again after waiting a while Check the d...

Страница 984: ...hen sending with WebDAV a response indicating that the size of the data was too large was received from the destination received HTTP Error 413 Request Entity Too Large Check the WebDAV server settings 877 When sending with WebDAV a response indicating that the URI host name and path to folder was too long was received from the destination received HTTP Error 414 Request URI Too Long Check the Web...

Страница 985: ...munication with an upstream server failed was received from the proxy server received HTTP Error 504 Gateway Timeout Check the WebDAV server settings Check the proxy server settings 883 When sending with WebDAV a response indicating that the server does not support the necessary functions to execute the request was received from the destination received HTTP Error 505 HTTP Version Not Supported Ch...

Страница 986: ... are automatically printed when POP Interval is set to a value other than 0 minutes or the machine is set to receive error mails via SMTP Setting E mail I Fax Communication P 62 Ask whether the other party received the transmission as necessary 918 Could not recognize the QR code in the original Check whether the QR code is in the correct position and scan the original again 919 A syntax error or ...

Страница 987: ...ing and the number of sheets 932 The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled with the Eco Staple Free mode has been exceeded Stapling with the Eco Staple Free mode may be able to be performed by reducing the number of sheets Check the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled with the Eco Staple Free mode and execute again 933 The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled has been excee...

Страница 988: ...paper that can be stapled together was exceeded Check the maximum number of sheets of paper that can be stapled together and execute the job again You can specify the procedure to perform when there are too many sheets to staple at once Action When Too Many Sheets to Staple P 762 937 The document was output without being saddle stitched because the maximum number of sheets of paper that can be sad...

Страница 989: ...l of the paper to ensure that pieces do not remain Do not forcibly remove jammed originals and paper from the machine Forcibly removing them may cause damage to the parts of the machine etc If you cannot remove the paper contact your local authorized Canon dealer When all paper jams are cleared Immediately remove your hands from the machine and optional equipment so that your clothing and hands do...

Страница 990: ...pe setting see Loading Paper P 112 to set the paper type again Do pieces of paper remain in the machine Pieces of paper may remain in the machine after removing a paper jam Open the location where the paper was jammed and remove any pieces of paper do not forcibly pull the paper when removing it Paper Jam Locations For information on the paper jam locations and the method for clearing paper jams s...

Страница 991: ... the location you check Even in this case follow the instructions on the screen to check all the locations The screen indicating that there is a paper jam is repeatedly displayed until you clear the paper jam If you press Close on the screen indicating that there is a paper jam you may be able to continue to perform operations and specify settings without immediately removing the paper jam Do not ...

Страница 992: ... 1 Remove the originals in the original supply tray 2 Check whether an original is jammed in the feeder cover Pull the lever to open the cover If an original is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow If you cannot remove the jammed original proceed to the next step without forcibly removing it Troubleshooting 980 ...

Страница 993: ...mmed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 4 After removing all jammed originals close the feeder cover 5 Lift up the feeder and check if there is a jammed original Lift up the feeder and check the position indicated by If an original is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 981 ...

Страница 994: ...6 Return the feeder to its original position Continue following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Troubleshooting 982 ...

Страница 995: ...e 1 Check whether paper is jammed in the multi purpose tray If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 2 Open the upper right cover and lower right cover of the main unit When you lift up the lever both the upper right cover and lower right cover of the main unit open at the same time 3 Check whether paper is jammed in the output unit Hold the green lever and open the outp...

Страница 996: ...the arrow Close the output unit 4 Check whether paper is jammed in the reversing unit If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 5 Check whether paper is jammed in the duplexing unit entrance If paper is jammed in the upper area gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 984 ...

Страница 997: ...ea gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 6 Check whether paper is jammed in the fixing unit Hold the green lever and open the fixing unit If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 985 ...

Страница 998: ... paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction where the most paper is protruding 8 Check whether paper is jammed in the multi purpose tray paper supply area If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 9 Check whether paper is jammed between the main unit and the upper right cover or lower right cover of the main unit If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direc...

Страница 999: ...e upper right cover and lower right cover of the main unit until they click Continue following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Troubleshooting 987 ...

Страница 1000: ...e handling If the optional paper deck is installed pull it away from the machine Clearing Paper Jams in Paper Drawers 1 1 Check whether paper is jammed in the paper drawer 1 Open the paper drawer If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Push the paper drawer in until it clicks When closing the paper drawer be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in p...

Страница 1001: ...er of the paper drawer until it clicks 3 Check whether paper is jammed in the paper drawer Open the paper drawer If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Push the paper drawer in until it clicks When closing the paper drawer be careful not to get your fingers caught as this may result in personal injury Troubleshooting 989 ...

Страница 1002: ...led pull it away from the machine 1 Check whether paper is jammed in the upper right cover or lower right cover of the paper drawer Open the upper right cover and lower right cover of the paper drawer When the Cassette Feeding Unit is attached When the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit is attached If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow When the Cassette Feeding Unit ...

Страница 1003: ...ght cover of the paper drawer until they click 3 Check whether paper is jammed in the paper drawer Open the paper drawer If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow When the Cassette Feeding Unit is attached When the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit is attached Troubleshooting 991 ...

Страница 1004: ...e following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Clearing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck 1 Press and pull the paper deck away from the main unit 2 Check whether paper is jammed in the side of the paper deck If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 992 ...

Страница 1005: ...the arrow 4 Connect the paper deck to the machine Make sure that the paper deck is securely connected to the machine If the paper jam message is no longer displayed after connecting the paper deck proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams 5 Press to open the paper deck Troubleshooting 993 ...

Страница 1006: ...ether paper is jammed If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Check carefully as the paper may be jammed in a location that is difficult to see 7 Gently close the paper deck Continue following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Troubleshooting 994 ...

Страница 1007: ...the paper jam location on the screen and follow the procedure in the reference indicated below to remove the paper Paper Jams in the Staple Finisher P 996 Paper Jams in the Booklet Finisher P 999 Paper Jams in the Inner Finisher P 1004 Confirm before handling Remove any paper loaded in a tray Troubleshooting 995 ...

Страница 1008: ...3WK 0RX 1 Check whether paper is jammed in the finisher Open the front cover of the finisher Lift up the output tray paper supporter of the main tray Turn the green knob to feed the jammed paper to the main tray side Troubleshooting 996 ...

Страница 1009: ...rection of the arrow 2 Check whether paper is jammed in the delivery unit Open the escape delivery guide If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Lift up the first flapper If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 997 ...

Страница 1010: ... Open the cover of the buffer pass unit 5 Check whether paper is jammed If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 6 Close the cover of the buffer pass unit Continue following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Troubleshooting 998 ...

Страница 1011: ...13WK 0RY 1 Check whether paper is jammed in the finisher Open the front cover of the finisher Lift up the output tray paper supporter of the main tray Turn the green knob to feed the jammed paper to the main tray side Troubleshooting 999 ...

Страница 1012: ...rection of the arrow 2 Check whether paper is jammed in the delivery unit Open the escape delivery guide If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Lift up the first flapper If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 1000 ...

Страница 1013: ...inal position Lower the escape delivery guide 3 Turn the green knob about 10 times If you do not turn the knob the jammed paper may tear when the saddle stitcher unit is pulled out 4 Pull out the saddle stitcher unit Troubleshooting 1001 ...

Страница 1014: ...ull it out in the direction of the arrow 6 Return the saddle stitcher unit to its original position 7 Close the front cover of the finisher 8 Open the cover of the buffer pass unit 9 Check whether paper is jammed If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow Troubleshooting 1002 ...

Страница 1015: ...10 Close the cover of the buffer pass unit Continue following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Troubleshooting 1003 ...

Страница 1016: ...ed in output tray of the finisher If paper is jammed gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow 2 Open the front cover of the finisher 3 Hold the lever and slide the inner finisher to the left 4 Check whether paper is jammed in the inner finisher Troubleshooting 1004 ...

Страница 1017: ...e direction of the arrow Return the guide to its original position When the Puncher Unit is attached If paper is jammed in the 2nd output area gently pull the jammed paper out in the direction of the arrow 5 Return the inner finisher to its original position Troubleshooting 1005 ...

Страница 1018: ...6 Close the front cover of the finisher Continue following the instructions on the screen to proceed with the interrupted operation or continue clearing paper jams Troubleshooting 1006 ...

Страница 1019: ...le jams see Important Safety Instructions in the FAQ Guide and Optional Equipment P 1090 Staple Jams in the Staple Finisher P 1008 Staple Jams in the Booklet Finisher P 1010 Staple Jams in the Inner Finisher P 1014 Copies and prints may be output to optional equipment while you are clearing staple jams Take care when handling optional equipment that is installed Confirm before handling When cleari...

Страница 1020: ...ver of the finisher 2 Pull out the staple case Hold the green handle on the staple case and pull it straight out 3 Remove any jammed staples from the staple case Lift up the knob on the staple case Remove all jammed staples and exposed staples Troubleshooting 1008 ...

Страница 1021: ... original position 4 Hold the green handle on the staple case and push it in as far as it will go 5 Close the front cover of the finisher The finisher may automatically perform dry stapling to perform staple repositioning Troubleshooting 1009 ...

Страница 1022: ... in the Saddle Stitcher Unit P 1011 Clearing Staple Jams in the Staple Unit 1 Open the front cover of the finisher 2 Pull out the staple case Hold the green handle on the staple case and pull it straight out 3 Remove any jammed staples from the staple case Lift up the knob on the staple case Troubleshooting 1010 ...

Страница 1023: ... 4 Hold the green handle on the staple case and push it in as far as it will go 5 Close the front cover of the finisher The finisher may automatically perform dry stapling to perform staple repositioning Clearing Staple Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit 1 Open the front cover of the finisher Troubleshooting 1011 ...

Страница 1024: ...out the saddle stitcher unit 3 Remove the two staple cases while pulling down the lever towards yourself 4 Remove any jammed staples from the staple case Lower the knob on the staple case Troubleshooting 1012 ...

Страница 1025: ... to be injured by staples 5 Install the two staple cases to the saddle stitcher unit 6 Gently return the saddle stitcher unit to its original position 7 Close the front cover of the finisher After clearing a staple jam make sure to adjust the staple position Saddle Stitch Staple Repositioning P 756 Troubleshooting 1013 ...

Страница 1026: ...er is jammed in the output tray gently pull it out 2 Open the front cover of the finisher 3 Pull out the staple case Hold the green handle on the staple case and pull it straight out 4 Remove any jammed staples from the staple case Troubleshooting 1014 ...

Страница 1027: ...eturn the knob on the staple case to its original position 5 Hold the green handle on the staple case and push it in as far as it will go 6 Close the front cover of the finisher The finisher may automatically perform dry stapling to perform staple repositioning Troubleshooting 1015 ...

Страница 1028: ... 1037 Staple Finisher Y1 1039 Booklet Finisher Y1 1041 Inner 2way Tray J1 1044 Copy Tray J2 1045 Copy Card Reader F1 1046 Super G3 FAX Board AS1 1047 System Environment 1048 Send Function 1051 Network Environment 1053 Printer Settings 1054 Advanced Box Functions 1055 Available Paper 1056 Management Functions 1062 Restrictions When Connecting to ColorPASS imagePASS 1069 MEAP 1071 Installing MEAP Ap...

Страница 1029: ... 3 Hole Puncher Unit A1 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 1106 Inner 2way Tray J1 1110 Copy Tray J2 1111 Platen Cover Type W 1112 Copy Card Reader F1 1113 ADF Access Handle A1 1115 Removable HDD Kit 1116 System Options 1121 List of Items That Can Be Personalized 1125 Driver Software Used with This Machine 1127 Manuals and Their Contents 1129 Using User s Guide 1130 Screen Layout of User s Guide 1131 Viewing ...

Страница 1030: ...ment copy scan etc Specifications P 1029 Enhancing Functions of the Machine Refer to this section when you use the MEAP application the dedicated application for enhancing functions MEAP P 1071 Using Optional Equipment See this section to check the optional equipment and the system options to use the machine more efficiently Options P 1088 Optional Equipment P 1090 System Options P 1121 Referencin...

Страница 1031: ...ing User s Guide P 1135 Others This section describes basic OS operations and includes disclaimers copyright information and other information Third Party Software P 1020 Feature Highlights P 1021 Driver Software Used with This Machine P 1127 Basic Windows Operations P 1139 Notice P 1145 Appendix 1019 ...

Страница 1032: ...Third Party Software 13WK 0F3 For information related to third party software click the following icon s Appendix 1020 ...

Страница 1033: ...0F4 This section highlights some of the unique features of the machine which are grouped into the four categories listed below Efficient Eco friendly Operations Enhanced Security Custom User Settings So Much More Appendix 1021 ...

Страница 1034: ...ple you can scan multiple documents with different settings and then merge them into a single document for copying In addition you can use the Direct Print function to print directly from a computer or network without a printer driver such as when you are away from your office When scanning originals you can enjoy stress free operations thanks to features such as the ability to skip blank pages as...

Страница 1035: ...mputer without printing them out first which helps the environment by reducing the amount of paper you use For more information see the following Entering Sleep Mode P 184 Inner Finisher H1 Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B1 Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B1 P 1104 Staple Finisher Y1 Booklet Finisher Y1 Buffer Pass Unit L1 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A1 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 P 1106 Sending Faxe...

Страница 1036: ...hening the authentication functions To prevent user impersonation by strengthening the password and lockout settings add a check mark to the items below Authentication Password Operational Policy Display Warning When Default Password Is in Use Authentication Password Operational Policy Prohibit Use of Default Password for Remote Access Authentication Password Settings Policy Set minimum number of ...

Страница 1037: ...they can use In addition you can set a variety of restrictions on the functions that are available to each individual user For more information see the following Configuring the Forced Hold Printing Settings P 625 Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions P 617 Registering Destinations in the Address Book P 188 Restricting the Machine s Functions P 616 ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Admin...

Страница 1038: ...lowing Configuring Accessibility Settings Personal Settings P 179 Registering Buttons on the Quick Menu P 166 Customizing the Basic Features Screen P 162 Creating Personal Address Lists and Personal Folders Each individual user can register destinations in their own address list and create their own folder for storing scanned documents For more information see the following Registering Destination...

Страница 1039: ...Web Access Options P 1088 Using the Hold Function to Manage and Edit Large Amounts of Documents You can hold documents in the temporary storage Hold space inside the machine before they are printed which lets you output a sample print before printing a large volume of documents You can also print documents in the order of their priority or you can print them after checking the finishing settings F...

Страница 1040: ...mation distribution function or by importing and exporting the settings between machines Furthermore you can connect to the machine from a mobile device such as a smartphone or tablet and use an app to print and scan documents This ability to connect to various devices provides greater convenience For more information see the following Using as a Simple File Server P 477 Working with Other Devices...

Страница 1041: ...Specifications 13WK 0F9 Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release Appendix 1029 ...

Страница 1042: ...1 8 mm Sheet book three dimensional objects up to 2 kg Copy Size Paper Sizes Max 320 x 457 2 mm 1 Min 98 x 139 7 mm 1 Margin Top 4 0 mm Left and Right 2 5 mm Bottom 2 5 mm Paper Weight Paper Drawer 52 to 256 g m2 Multi Purpose Tray 52 to 300 g m2 Paper Type For information on paper sizes and types for each paper source see Available Paper P 1056 Warm Up Time After Powering ON 30 seconds 2 Returnin...

Страница 1043: ...e 50 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5540i Full Color 40 Black and White 40 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5535i Full Color 35 Black and White 35 Magnification Regular Paper Size Same Ratio 1 1 0 5 Enlargement 115 122 141 200 400 Reduction 86 81 70 61 50 25 Zoom 25 to 400 in 1 increments Paper Feeding System Capacity Paper Drawer 550 sheets x 2 80 g m2 680 sheets x 2 64 g m2 Multi Purpose Tray 100 sheets 80 g m2 120 s...

Страница 1044: ...takes 4 seconds until the key operation on the touch panel display is available after turning on the main power of the machine Depending on the situations the machine does not startup quickly 3 Activation time may vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used 4 The copy speed on A4 size plain paper on one side printing is measured during continuous copying ...

Страница 1045: ... m2 Original Tray Capacity 150 sheets 80 g m2 Original Scanning Speed A4 Copying 600dpi page minute 1 sided scanning Full Color 60 Black and White 80 2 sided scanning Full Color 80 Black and White 150 Scanning 300dpi page minute 1 sided scanning Full Color Black and White 80 2 sided scanning Full Color Black and White 160 1 Long Original 431 8 to 630 mm 2 Originals weighing from 38 g m2 to 157 g m...

Страница 1046: ... each paper source see Available Paper P 1056 Paper Sizes Max 304 8 x 457 2 mm Min 98 x 182 mm Paper Weight 52 to 256 g m2 Paper Drawers Capacity 550 sheets x 2 80 g m2 640 sheets x 2 64 g m2 Dimensions W x D x H Weight 620 mm x 700 mm x 251 mm Approximately 22 5 kg Appendix 1034 ...

Страница 1047: ...n on paper sizes and types for each paper source see Available Paper P 1056 Paper Sizes A4 Paper Weight 52 to 256 g m2 Paper Drawers Capacity 2 450 sheets 80 g m2 2 850 sheets 64 g m2 Dimensions W x D x H Weight 620 x 700 x 251 mm Approximately 30 kg Appendix 1035 ...

Страница 1048: ... see Available Paper P 1056 Paper Sizes A4 and B5 Paper Weight 52 to 256 g m2 Paper Drawers Capacity 2 700 sheets 80 g m2 3 000 sheets 64 g m2 Dimensions W x D x H Weight 344 mm x 630 mm x 440 mm Approximately 31 kg Installation Space Including the Main Unit W x D 969 x 742 mm Appendix 1036 ...

Страница 1049: ...t paper sizes 250 sheets or height 26 mm Collate Offset and Group Offset mode A4 B5 500 sheets or 52 mm in height A3 B4 A4R B5R 250 sheets or height 26 mm Staple Corner Double mode A4 and B5 30 sets or height 52 mm A3 B4 and A4R 30 sets or height 26 mm Staple Eco mode A4 30 sets or height 52 mm A3 30 sets or height 26 mm Staple Max Stapling Capacity 2 Staple Corner Double A4 and B5 50 sheets 90 g ...

Страница 1050: ...ons W x D x H Weight 466 x 525 x 225 mm Approximately 8 6 kg Installation Space Including the Main Unit W x D 1 066 x 742 mm 1 For 81 4 g m2 paper only Capacity varies in other cases 2 When the standard staple cartridge is attached The maximum stapling capacity may vary depending on the paper type and weight Appendix 1038 ...

Страница 1051: ...up mode A4 B5 A5 and A5R 3 000 sheets or height 423 mm 2 305 mm x 457 mm 320 mm x 450 mm A3 B4 A4R and B5R 1 500 sheets or height 216 mm With different paper sizes 1 500 sheets or 216 mm in height 3 Collate Offset and Group Offset mode A4 B5 3 000 sheets or height 423 mm 2 A3 B4 A4R 1 500 sheets or height 216 mm Corner Stapling and Double Stapling A4 and B5 200 sets total 3 000 sheets or 423 mm in...

Страница 1052: ...5 x 623 mm x 1 095 mm 1 142 mm 5 Approximately 31 kg Installation Space Including the Main Unit W x D 1 585 x 742 mm when the auxiliary tray is extended 1 For 81 4 g m2 paper only Capacity varies in other cases 2 Thin 52 to 59 g m2 1 500 sheets or 216 mm in height 3 Only with A4 and B5 3 000 sheets or 423 mm in height 4 When the standard staple cartridge is attached The maximum stapling capacity m...

Страница 1053: ...A4 B5 A5 and A5R 3 000 sheets or height 423 mm 2 305 mm x 457 mm 320 mm x 450 mm A3 B4 A4R and B5R 1 500 sheets or height 216 mm With different paper sizes 1 500 sheets or 216 mm in height 3 Collate Offset and Group Offset mode A4 and B5 3 000 sheets or height 423 mm 2 A3 B4 and A4R 1 500 sheets or height 216 mm Corner Stapling and Double Stapling A4 and B5 200 sets total 3 000 sheets or 423 mm in...

Страница 1054: ...9 g m2 3 sheets 210 to 220 g m2 Max Saddle Folding Capacity 3 sheets 52 to 105 g m2 1 sheets 106 to 256 g m2 Paper Sizes 304 8 x 457 2 mm to 195 x 270 mm Dimensions W x D x H Weight 537 mm 637 mm 6 x 623 mm x 1 095 mm 1 142 mm 6 Approximately 57 kg Installation Space Including the Main Unit W x D 1 585 x 742 mm when the auxiliary tray is extended 1 For 81 4 g m2 paper only Capacity varies in other...

Страница 1055: ... 6 When the auxiliary tray is extended Appendix 1043 ...

Страница 1056: ...m Paper Weight 52 to 300 g m2 Paper Type All the paper that can be fed Capacity Lower Tray Tray A 250 sheets 80 g m2 1 Upper Tray Tray B 100 sheets 80 g m2 Dimensions W x D x H Weight 427 x 407 x 76 mm Approximately 0 6 kg 1 When A4 or smaller size paper is used Appendix 1044 ...

Страница 1057: ...Plain Recycled Color Pre Punched Bond Heavy 1 to 5 tab and letterhead Capacity 100 sheets 80 g m2 1 Dimensions W x D x H Weight 258 x 373 x 97 mm Approximately 0 5 kg Installation Space Including the Main Unit W x D 1 067 x 742 mm when the auxiliary tray is extended 1 When A4 or smaller size paper is used Appendix 1045 ...

Страница 1058: ...c Card Readout Method Magnetic readout Magnetic Card Reading Direction Face up Store Replay Replay Dimensions W x D x H 88 x 96 x 40 mm excluding the attachment kit and cable Weight Approximately 200 g including the attachment kit and cable Appendix 1046 ...

Страница 1059: ... G3 33 6 kbps G3 14 4 kbps Compression Method MH MR MMR JBIG Transmission Type Super G3 G3 Max Sending Original Sizes A3 Receiving Paper Sizes A3 to A5R Transmission Times JBIG Approximately 2 6 seconds 1 When using an IP telephone service facsimile communication may not be performed normally via an IP telephone line It is recommended to use facsimile communication via a general telephone Public S...

Страница 1060: ...s Domino R7 0 Sendmail 8 14 4 Compatible mail receiving server software Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 SP3 Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 Lotus Domino R7 0 Qpopper 4 0 19 File servers available as destinations for file transmission FTP Windows Vista SP2 Windows Server 2008 SP2 Internet Information Services 7 0 Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 Internet Information...

Страница 1061: ...vers allowed for accessing SMB server Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 WebDAV server Windows Server 2008 IIS7 0 Windows Server 2008 R2 IIS7 5 Windows Server 2012 IIS8 0 Client computers allowed for accessing the Advanced Box Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows 10 Types of LDAP servers Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 with Active Directory Windows Server 20...

Страница 1062: ...ter Chrome 45 and later Online browsing only iOS Safari iOS 6 0 and later Android Chrome 45 and later Online browsing only 1 Before changing the settings of the machine set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript Appendix 1050 ...

Страница 1063: ...ted SMB FTP SMTP WebDAV Output Format Single Page TIFF MMR JPEG PDF XPS OOXML PowerPoint Word 1 Multi Page TIFF MMR PDF XPS OOXML PowerPoint Word 1 1 Optional Internet Intranet FAX Communication Protocol Internet FAX SMTP send POP3 receive Intranet FAX SMTP send receive Communication Mode Simple mode Full mode Max Original Size A3 Resolution Black and White 200 x 100 dpi 200 x 200 dpi 200 x 400 dp...

Страница 1064: ... 1 Available depending on settings of the other party capability setting of the receiving machine Appendix 1052 ...

Страница 1065: ...PAP Printer Access Protocol Wireless LAN Specifications Standard IEEE 802 11g IEEE 802 11b IEEE 802 11n Transmission Scheme DS SS System OFDM System Half Duplex Frequency Range 2 412 to 2 472 MHz Maximum Radio Frequency Power Transmitted 18 21 dBm Communication Mode Infrastructure Mode Access Point Mode Security Infrastructure Mode 128 104 64 40 bit WEP WPA PSK TKIP AES CCMP WPA2 PSK TKIP AES CCMP...

Страница 1066: ... left and right edges of the paper When printing in the Expand Print Region and Print mode the upper margin becomes 4 mm the lower margin becomes 2 5 mm and the side margins both become 2 5 mm The printable area is enlarged When an original has data that extends all the way to the edges even if you select Expand Print Region and Print the periphery of the data may be cut off when printing In this ...

Страница 1067: ...aracters Maximum Number of Files a Single Directory Can Hold 1000 including folders Maximum Number of Files the Advanced Space Can Hold 100 000 including folders Maximum Capacity per File 2 GB Number of Clients Allowed for Accessing SMB 64 WebDAV 3 Client OS Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows 10 Appendix 1055 ...

Страница 1068: ...r 2 3 or 4 High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A1 Paper Deck Unit F1 Multi Purpose Tray 305 0 x 457 0 mm 320 0 x 450 0 mm SRA3 A3 297 0 x 420 0 mm A4 297 0 x 210 0 mm A4R 210 0 x 297 0 mm A5 210 0 x 148 0 mm A5R 148 0 x 210 0 mm B4 257 0 mm x 364 0 mm B5 257 0 mm x 182 0 mm B5R 182 0 mm x 257 0 mm 1 You can use custom size settings ranging from 98 x 148 mm to 297 x 215 9 mm 2 You can use custom si...

Страница 1069: ...OFICIO Argentina 220 0 mm x 340 0 mm LETTER Argentina 280 0 mm x 220 0 mm LETTERR Argentina 220 0 mm x 280 0 mm LETTERR Government 203 2 mm x 266 7 mm LETTER Government 266 7 mm x 203 2 mm LEGAL Government 203 2 mm x 330 2 mm FOOLSCAP Australia 206 0 mm x 337 0 mm FOOLSCAP FOLIO 215 9 mm x 330 2 mm 1 You can use custom size settings ranging from 98 x 148 mm to 297 x 215 9 mm 2 You can use custom s...

Страница 1070: ...ustom Size 98 x 139 7 mm to 320 x 457 2 mm 1 2 Free Size 98 x 139 7 mm to 320 x 457 2 mm Yougatanaga 3 Nagagata 3 Kakugata 2 No 10 COM10 Monarch DL ISO C5 1 You can use custom size settings ranging from 98 x 148 mm to 297 x 215 9 mm 2 You can use custom size settings ranging from 98 x 182 mm to 304 8 x 457 2 mm Supported Paper Types Chlorine free paper can be used with this machine Appendix 1058 ...

Страница 1071: ...m2 Heavy 5 181 to 220 g m2 Heavy 6 221 to 256 g m2 Heavy 7 257 to 300 g m2 Recycled 1 1 64 to 75 g m2 Recycled 2 1 76 to 90 g m2 Recycled 3 1 91 to 105 g m2 Color 64 to 81 g m2 Pre punched 64 to 81 g m2 Transparency 2 121 to 220 g m2 1 You can use 100 recycled paper 2 Use only A4 transparencies made especially for this machine 3 Some types of tracing paper cannot be used 4 Tab paper can only be lo...

Страница 1072: ...9 g m2 Tab 91 to 105 g m2 4 106 to 128 g m2 4 129 to 150 g m2 4 151 to 220 g m2 4 Letterhead 106 to 163 g m2 Envelope 75 to 105 g m2 1 You can use 100 recycled paper 2 Use only A4 transparencies made especially for this machine 3 Some types of tracing paper cannot be used 4 Tab paper can only be loaded in paper drawer 2 5 This paper type can be registered when LTR LTRR or EXEC paper is loaded in a...

Страница 1073: ...cing paper labels tab or envelope If you set Heavy 6 for cover on Copy Options Booklet you cannot use the settings other than Front Cover and Back Cover to make copies Do not use the following paper when using Document Scan Lock Doing so may prevent scan lock information and tracking information from being embedded properly Highly transparent paper such as Thin Transparency Tracing and Color Paper...

Страница 1074: ...ion Standard as Kerberos encryption methods for the Active Directory authentication The encryption method that is used is automatically selected depending on the Active Directory settings When both of these methods are available AES is used When specifying an Active Directory server as an authentication server use the following ports 1 on the server To communicate with a DNS server port number 53 ...

Страница 1075: ...d IPSec The following system environment is required for IPSec Supported operating systems Windows Vista 7 Communication protocol IPv4 IPv6 Ports used for IKEv1 UDP port number 500 Applications that IPSec can be applied to Applications that uses TCP UDP ICMP ICMPv6 Multicast and broadcast packets cannot be encrypted The following keys and certificates client certificates can be used for authentica...

Страница 1076: ...y length ECDSA P256 P384 P521 Certificate format PKCS 12 2 File extension p12 pfx 1 Available only when the key algorithm is 1024 bits or more 2 Available only when installed by using the Remote UI Up to 6 keys and certificates can be registered Registration of CA Certificates The algorithms and formats of keys and CA certificates that can be registered are as follows RSA signature algorithm SHA 1...

Страница 1077: ...c key algorithm key length ECDSA P256 P384 P521 Certificate format X 509 DER PEM File extension cer pem 1 Available only when the key algorithm is 1024 bits or more Up to 2 000 S MIME certificates can be registered Registration of Certificate Revocation Lists CRL Up to 50 certificate revocation lists CRL can be registered Note however that CRL cannot be registered in the following cases The data s...

Страница 1078: ...n related to transmissions Advanced Box Save Log 8196 This log contains information related to the saving of files to the Advanced Box Network Advanced Box of other machines and Memory Media Mail Box Operation Log 8197 This log contains information related to the operations performed on data in the Mail Box the Memory RX Inbox and the Confidential Fax Inbox Mail Box Authentication Log 8199 This lo...

Страница 1079: ...d to firmware updates and backup restoration of the MEAP application etc Authentication Print Log 8207 This log contains information and the operation history related to the forced hold print jobs Setting Synchronization Log 8208 This log contains information related to the synchronization of machine settings Log for Audit Log Management 3001 This log contains information related to the starting a...

Страница 1080: ...on of custom settings server Number of synchronizable machines in a group 10 Number of synchronizable users for personalized setting values 1 000 Maximum number of users whose setting information can be saved in the machine Users 200 Groups 50 Appendix 1068 ...

Страница 1081: ...ess is not printed When Using the Advanced Box SMB cannot be used to make the Advanced Box available to the outside Use WebDAV instead If the machine is set to send URI in the detailed settings for the Advanced Box a port number 18080 when SSL TLS disabled and 18443 when SSL TLS enabled must be added to the specified path to the folder Example http 192 168 1 21 18080 share documents To specify the...

Страница 1082: ...Preferences Network is set to On In this case enter the IP address of ColorPASS imagePASS When Using the Remote UI Before starting the Remote UI configure the Network Settings items in Fiery on the control panel To start the Remote UI start the Web browser and enter the URL below The Remote UI starts when you click Launch Remote UI on the WebTools screen that is displayed http IP address of ColorP...

Страница 1083: ...called a MEAP application on the machine You can install MEAP applications and check their usage status by displaying the SMS Service Management Service from the Remote UI In order to install a MEAP application you are required to log in as an administrator Logging into the Machine P 104 Installing MEAP Applications You can install MEAP applications and configure the necessary settings to use the ...

Страница 1084: ...Managing MEAP Applications P 1076 Managing MEAP Application Licenses P 1081 Appendix 1072 ...

Страница 1085: ...on see the manual provided with each MEAP application Depending on the MEAP application it may require a specific condition for installation For more information see the user s manual for the MEAP application to be used Acquiring the License File P 1073 Installing the Application P 1074 Acquiring the License File The following information is required for acquiring a license file The license access...

Страница 1086: ...application Installing the Application 1 Log in to the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Service Management Service on the portal page 3 Click Install MEAP Application 4 Click Browse specify the application file and the license file and click OK Appendix 1074 ...

Страница 1087: ...Install Yes When the licensing screen is displayed confirm the contents and click I Accept When installation is complete the MEAP Application Management screen is displayed Depending on the MEAP application the user s manual or related software can be downloaded from the following URL http canon com fau downloads You can upgrade the MEAP application version in the same procedure as the installatio...

Страница 1088: ...plications by using the SMS from the Remote UI While you are operating on the SMS screen do not use the Back button on your Web browser the SMS screen may not operate properly 1 Log in to the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Service Management Service on the portal page 3 Configure the settings on the SMS screen Appendix 1076 ...

Страница 1089: ...information of license files before installation Change Password Normally it is not necessary to change this setting Configure this setting especially when you use the DepartmentID Authentication login service MEAP Application Setting Information Management Displays or deletes information related to MEAP application settings MEAP Application Log Management Downloads or deletes log data such as the...

Страница 1090: ...r the license file has expired or all counters set for the MEAP application exceed the maximum value Unnecessary You can use the MEAP application even if you do not have a license file If Over Limit or Invalid appears If the validity of the license file expires or a counter exceeds the maximum value the MEAP application cannot be used By adding a license you can extend the validity or increase the...

Страница 1091: ... authentication information 1 Click MEAP Application Management click an application to set the authentication information 2 Click Authentication Information Settings 3 Enter the user name and password and select the login destination 4 Click Update The Authentication information has been set Department ID ID message is displayed To cancel authentication information Click Delete Yes on the authent...

Страница 1092: ...art the machine If the Export Package of this application will be unavailable message is displayed the MEAP application you are uninstalling is linked with other applications If this MEAP application is uninstalled other applications may not be able to be used 4 When you finish the operation click Log Out When you close the SMS make sure to log out If you close the Web browser without logging out ...

Страница 1093: ...ntinue to use the MEAP application by adding a license file In addition if you want to delete a MEAP application you are required to delete the license file in advance 1 Log in to the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI P 648 2 Click Service Management Service on the portal page 3 Click MEAP Application Management and click the application to manage the license 4 Click License Management and perform ...

Страница 1094: ...ackup file on your computer before deleting the license file If you want to save you are required to disable the license file in advance 1 Click Disable Yes 2 Click Download and specify the location to save the license file The disabled license file and the license file saved on your computer can be installed on the same machine again Deleting the license file Before deleting the license file you ...

Страница 1095: ...anagement Switch in DepartmentID Authentication The status becomes Start after Restart 5 Restart the machine Restarting the Machine P 657 The machine restarts and the changed settings are reflected When DepartmentID Authentication is started If you click Service Management Service on the portal page of the Remote UI the login screen to the SMS is displayed MeapSmsLogin is set as the login password...

Страница 1096: ...stem Manager ID and PIN the ID and PIN return to 7654321 When the machine is equipped with the Copy Card Reader F1 the numbers assigned to each card 1 to 1000 by the factory default cannot be registered as the System Manager ID and PIN Enabling Department ID Management To enable Department ID Management with the DepartmentID Authentication you need to register the Department ID and PIN 1 Press Man...

Страница 1097: ...ttings that require the administrator s authority Press Log In enter System Manager ID and System Manager PIN and press Log In Logging in from the Remote UI Enter the Department ID in Department ID and PIN in PIN and click Log In When Department ID Management is not implemented When only the System Manager ID and PIN are set without Department ID Management the login methods differ between the sys...

Страница 1098: ...Set Page Limit Press On for functions to restrict Enter the number of pages OK OK OK OK Setting Department ID Management on functions other than copy print Management Settings User Management Department ID Management Register PIN Limit Functions Press On for functions to set Department ID Management on OK OK OK Deleting Department IDs Management Settings User Management Department ID Management Re...

Страница 1099: ... when using Department ID Management Management Settings User Management Department ID Management Set Allow Black White Copy Print Jobs or Allow Black White Printer Jobs to Off OK LINKS Configuring the Personal Authentication Management Settings P 558 Appendix 1087 ...

Страница 1100: ...taple Finisher Y1 Booklet Finisher Y1 Buffer Pass Unit L1 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A1 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 P 1106 Inner Finisher H1 Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B1 Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B1 P 1104 To add an output tray that is available for collating and grouping Copy Tray J2 P 1111 Inner 2way Tray J1 P 1110 To install a cover instead of a feeder Platen Cover Type W P 1112 To use...

Страница 1101: ...ard and your hands may get caught The trays of the finisher move during copying or printing Do not place anything under the trays as doing so may damage the trays Do not place anything other than output paper in the trays of the finisher as doing so may damage the trays Do not set remove the hard disk holder when the machine is performing operations Doing so may cause damage to the hard disk To se...

Страница 1102: ...Unit A1 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 P 1106 Cassette Feeding Unit AM1 Load the type of paper that you frequently use You can load paper that cannot be loaded in the paper drawer 1 such as A3 and custom size paper Cassette Feeding Unit AM1 P 1094 Staple P1 saddle stitcher unit staple cartridge This option is a staple cartridge for the saddle stitcher unit which can be installed in the Booklet Finisher Y1...

Страница 1103: ...Finisher H1 is installed Inner Finisher H1 You can perform collating grouping and stapling Corner Double with this option In addition you can manually bind with the stapler or bind without the stapler Inner Finisher H1 Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B1 Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B1 P 1104 Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B1 Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher B1 If you install the Inner 2 4 Hole Puncher B1 or Inner 2 3 Hole Puncher...

Страница 1104: ...k Unit F1 P 1101 High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A1 If you install the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A1 to the machine you have an additional large capacity cassette High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A1 P 1097 Utility Tray B1 This option provides space for placing originals Inner 2way Tray J1 This option enables paper to be output to two locations If you have installed the Copy Tray J2...

Страница 1105: ...d Rotate 90 Degrees Copy Tray J2 P 1111 Tab Feeding Attachment Kit F1 Attach the Tab Feeding Attachment Kit F1 to load tab paper into the paper drawer of the machine This option can only be attached to the Paper Drawer 2 and holds only A4 tab paper For information on the combination of options that can be installed on the machine contact your local authorized Canon dealer Appendix 1093 ...

Страница 1106: ...ou to add two paper drawers Loading different sized paper in the optional paper drawers enables reduced work for switching paper Paper drawer Load Paper Lower right cover Open this cover when clearing a paper jam inside the machine Appendix 1094 ...

Страница 1107: ...hat can be loaded differ according to the type of paper drawer FL Cassette BA1 Available Locations Paper Drawer 1 Available paper size The largest standard size that can be loaded is A4 FL Cassette AZ1 Available Locations Paper Drawer 2 3 or 4 Available paper size The largest standard size that can be loaded is A3 Appendix 1095 ...

Страница 1108: ... When loading paper of a different size into a paper drawer adjust the guides Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer P 114 For information on available paper sizes see Specifications P 1029 Appendix 1096 ...

Страница 1109: ...is cover when clearing a paper jam inside the machine Loading Paper into the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A1 If paper runs out and printing is stopped when you are printing with the staple setting do not remove the output sheets that are waiting to be stapled Printing and stapling resume after you clear the paper jam Only A4 paper can be loaded in the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A1 ...

Страница 1110: ... paper Fan the paper stack well and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges 3 Load the paper Load the paper stack with the print side face up and against the right side wall of the paper drawer Appendix 1098 ...

Страница 1111: ...ine when loading paper Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line Loading too much paper can cause paper jams If you use paper with a logo mark pay attention to the orientation when loading it in the paper source Loading Preprinted Paper P 130 4 Gently insert the paper drawer into the machine Move the paper guide to the left edge 1099 Appendix ...

Страница 1112: ...tab paper Paper which is curled must be straightened out before loading it into the paper deck unit Do not load paper into the High Capacity Cassette Feeding Unit A1 that has been previously copied onto as this may result in a malfunction or damage to the machine Always use the multi purpose tray to feed paper when you want to print onto the back of a sheet of paper 2nd side of 2 Sided copy You wi...

Страница 1113: ...n loading paper Paper deck Load Paper Loading Paper into the Paper Deck Unit F1 If paper runs out and printing is stopped when you are printing with the staple setting do not remove the output sheets that are waiting to be stapled Printing and stapling resume after you clear the paper jam The paper size of the Paper Deck Unit F1 is fixed to A4 For instructions on changing the paper size that can b...

Страница 1114: ... the paper loading position 2 Prepare the paper to load Fan the sheets several times and align the edges to facilitate feeding 3 Load the paper stack into the paper deck 4 Close the paper deck The inside lifter automatically ascends and prepares the paper deck for printing Appendix 1102 ...

Страница 1115: ...s in the empty part of the paper deck unit next to the paper stack as this may result in a malfunction or damage to the machine Also do not place items other than paper in the paper loading part of the paper deck This may cause a malfunction When A4 size paper is fixed as the loadable paper size do not load other sizes of paper such as A5 etc Loading the incorrect paper size may cause damage to th...

Страница 1116: ...taple Free The printouts are crimped and bound without using a staple You can easily split the paper by pressing the crimped part with your fingers This function is useful for saving staples and also binding printouts briefly For information on the paper sizes that can be used for Staple Free see Specifications P 1029 Depending on the usage environment and paper type the crimped part may be split ...

Страница 1117: ...e used for Staple and Hole Punch see Specifications P 1029 To replace the staple cartridge of the stapler unit see Replacing the Staples Optional P 851 For how to clear a paper jam or a staple jam see Clearing Paper Jams P 977 and Clearing Staple Jams Optional P 1007 The maximum number of bindable sheets may not be possible depending on the paper type In this case change the paper type or reduce t...

Страница 1118: ...uble Staple Free The printouts are crimped and bound without using a staple You can easily split the paper by pressing the crimped part with your fingers This function is useful for saving staples and also binding printouts briefly For information on the paper sizes that can be used for Staple Free see Specifications P 1029 Depending on the usage environment and paper type the crimped part may be ...

Страница 1119: ...ass Unit L1 Open to remove jammed paper Front cover upper Open to remove jammed paper clear a staple jam in the stapler unit and saddle stitcher unit or replace the staple cartridge If the 2 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 2 3 Hole Puncher Unit A1 or 4 Hole Puncher Unit A1 is installed open to discard punch waste Slit Insert paper to manually staple the paper You can specify the time period for the paper t...

Страница 1120: ...ddle Fold see Specifications P 1029 To replace the staple cartridge of the stapler unit or saddle stitcher unit see Replacing the Staples Optional P 851 For how to clear a paper jam or a staple jam see Clearing Paper Jams P 977 and Clearing Staple Jams Optional P 1007 The maximum number of bindable sheets may not be possible depending on the paper type In this case change the paper type or reduce ...

Страница 1121: ... Load staples into the stapler unit message appears almost all of the staples have been used To proceed replace the staple cartridge If a tray reaches the lowest position limit printing stops temporarily Remove all of the output paper from the tray to resume printing Saddle stitch The accuracy of folds may vary depending on the paper type and the number of sheets Appendix 1109 ...

Страница 1122: ...tated alternately in different directions TIPS You can install both the Inner 2way Tray J1 and Copy Tray J2 to add an extra output tray This is convenient for using a different output tray for each function including the Copy Print and Fax functions Inner Tray Paper is output to the output tray Output Paper Tray Guide Tilt up the output paper tray guide to catch the printouts Main Unit s Right Cov...

Страница 1123: ...e order of the document Group All printouts of the same original page are grouped together into sets Rotate 90 Degrees Each printout group is rotated alternately in different directions Output Tray The prints are output to this tray Auxiliary tray Pull out the auxiliary tray if you are printing on large size paper Appendix 1111 ...

Страница 1124: ...r install the Platen Cover Type W The cover enables originals placed on the platen glass to be held in place For more information contact your local authorized Canon dealer Platen Cover Type W Place the original on the platen glass and close the cover Appendix 1112 ...

Страница 1125: ...g or faxing Configuring the Department ID Management Settings P 585 Card slot Insert a control card Control card Control cards used with the Copy Card Reader F1 You can manage up to 1 000 Department IDs Inserting a card 1 Confirm that the screen to insert a control card is displayed 2 Confirm the direction of the control card and insert it into the card slot 3 Confirm that the Main Menu is display...

Страница 1126: ...ogin service including when performing Server Authentication with the Server Authentication Local Device Authentication user authentication system you cannot use the Copy Card Reader F1 Managing Users P 556 If the Main Menu screen does not appear when the control card is inserted check if the control card is inserted in the correct direction and that the control card is not damaged or prohibited f...

Страница 1127: ...ADF Access Handle A1 13WK 0HY This option helps you to close the feeder ADF access handle Hook the edge of the handle to the tip of the feeder to gently close it Appendix 1115 ...

Страница 1128: ...a lock that is commercially available for security If you use the option together with the HDD Mirroring Kit you can store data onto two hard disks System Options P 1121 If the E602 0001 message appears on the touch panel display when the machine starts a hard disk may not be set in the hard disk holder Turn OFF the machine and check that the main power indicator on the control panel is not lit an...

Страница 1129: ... HDD Kit If the front cover is locked unlock the front cover beforehand 3 Hold the handle on the hard disk holder and being careful of the orientation insert the holder 4 Close the front cover Lock the front cover if necessary Appendix 1117 ...

Страница 1130: ... the Hard Disk Holder 1 Open the right cover of the machine 2 Open the front cover of the Removable HDD Kit If the front cover is locked unlock the front cover beforehand 3 Hold the handle on the hard disk holder and remove the holder Appendix 1118 ...

Страница 1131: ...k holder with the circuit board of the HDD on the bottom Do not store the hard disk holder in the upright position as doing so may damage the holder 4 Close the front cover Lock the front cover if necessary Appendix 1119 ...

Страница 1132: ...5 Close the right cover of the machine Appendix 1120 ...

Страница 1133: ...ePASS you cannot use the Job Hold function Barcode Printing Kit This option enables you to print barcodes PCL International Font Set This option enables you to add the following fonts for a PCL printer As a result you can output using multiple languages in a SAP Unicode environment Andale and WorldType Collection J Japanese Version Andale and WorldType Collection K Korean Version Andale and WorldT...

Страница 1134: ...en using the Send function on the machine It enables you to send documents in the following formats Trace Smooth PDF The Trace Smooth mode enables you to convert the text and line drawings of a scanned image to scalable outline data The outline data Trace can be extracted and used in Adobe Illustrator The smoothing process can also be applied to the text of the outline data to make it appear less ...

Страница 1135: ...n or copy restriction information in the output when documents are copied printed and reduce the risk of confidential information being leaked It helps you to restrict scanning of the document Scan Lock function and identify the user that output the document Tracking function You can embed a QR code TL code Web Access Software The Web Access Software enables you to view Web pages from the touch pa...

Страница 1136: ...HDD Even if one fails you can access the other hard disk Connection Kit for Bluetooth LE This option enables Bluetooth communication between the machine and mobile devices NFC Kit This option enables you to easily link the machine with mobile devices You can also print simply by touching a mobile device to the machine Appendix 1124 ...

Страница 1137: ...llpaper Settings Editing the Quick Menu P 171 Shortcuts 1 Copy Register Options Shortcuts P 772 Scan and Send Register Options Shortcuts P 775 Previous Settings 1 2 3 Copy Recalling Previously Used Copy Settings Previous Settings P 310 Scan and Send Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending Saving Previous Settings P 459 Address Book Personal address lists 1 Registering Destinations via the R...

Страница 1138: ...zing Custom Settings The following items cannot be personalized but can be shared between multiple Canon multifunction printers by synchronizing custom settings Destination for sharing user group address lists Registering Destinations via the Remote UI P 658 Appendix 1126 ...

Страница 1139: ...ts and provides stable high speed printing Drivers and manuals included in the User Software CD ROM UFR II Printer Driver Color Network ScanGear 2 UFR II UFRII LT Printer Driver PCL Printer Driver Use this driver when you want to use the machine as a PCL printer Drivers and manuals included in the PCL User Software CD ROM PCL Printer Driver Canon Font manager PS Printer Driver The PS Printer Drive...

Страница 1140: ...tional Super G3 FAX Board Use this driver when you want to send faxes directly from a computer Drivers and manuals included in the FAX Driver Software CD ROM Generic FAX Driver FAX Driver Depending on your environment some functions of the driver software included in the CD ROM may not be usable The newest software is posted on the Canon web site Please verify the operating environment etc and dow...

Страница 1141: ...s to various problems in an easy to understand manner User s Guide This Manual This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed using a Web browser You can browse information by category or enter a keyword to search for pages on a specific topic Using User s Guide P 1130 Setting the Machine PS PCL UFR II Printer This manual viewable using a Web browser describes ho...

Страница 1142: ...op Page P 1131 Topic Page P 1132 Search by keyword Perform a search by entering a keyword such as fax or wireless LAN and the pages containing the keyword are displayed You can find the page you are looking for from those results You can also enter phrases such as connecting to a network The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for multiple keywords Search P 1134 If you do not ha...

Страница 1143: ...he User s Guide starts Contents The titles of chapters are displayed Click to display all items including those nested underneath other items Click to return to the original list Click to switch between the table of contents and the search display Click to specify settings such as text size layout and display method for the User s Guide Appendix 1131 ...

Страница 1144: ...on about each category The sliding display can be stopped by moving the pointer onto it Feature Highlights P 1021 Quick Help Click to view how to solve problems Notice Click to view important information you should know when using the machine Feature Highlights Provides a variety of practical examples of ways to use the machine Click to display the detailed information Click to close the window Cl...

Страница 1145: ...wing Click to go to the corresponding page To return to the previous page click Back on your Web browser When you click the icon the current page may go dark and a pop up window may appear To return to the page click Close in the pop up window Appendix 1133 ...

Страница 1146: ...ch by keyword and find the page you are looking for Enter keyword s here Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results Search result Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specified keywords From the results locate the page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page The keywords appear in bold in the pages displayed as search results Appendix...

Страница 1147: ...to operate the machine correctly and avoid damage to the machine or property Indicates a clarification of an operation or contains additional explanations for a procedure TIPS Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine Keys and buttons Keys on the control panel buttons displayed on the touch panel display and buttons on the computer screen are indicated as follows Type Example Keys o...

Страница 1148: ...User s Guide are from imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5560i with the following options installed unless otherwise specifically noted Cassette Feeding Unit AM1 Scan Print Copy In the User s Guide Scan Print and Copy are defined as follows and used accordingly Scan To copy or perform a fax transmission the content of an original is to be scanned read out Example Scan an original to be copied Scan an original t...

Страница 1149: ...int Example Print from a computer Print a website Copy The operation of scanning an original in order to print a reproduction Example Combine images to copy Copy by enlarging Copy to make a booklet Exception Copy an address book Meaning copy data Appendix 1137 ...

Страница 1150: ...Manual Display Settings 13WK 0J7 Appendix 1138 ...

Страница 1151: ...or This PC Windows Server 2003 Start select My Computer Windows 10 Click select File Explorer This PC Displaying the Printer Folder Windows Vista Start select Control Panel Printers Windows 7 Server 2008 R2 Start select Devices and Printers Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Control Panel View devices and printers Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Sta...

Страница 1152: ...aces and double click the computer set up as a print server To view computers on the network you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for computers The shared printer is displayed n Printing a Test Page in Windows You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows 1 Load A4 size paper in the multi purpose tray Loading Paper in the Mult...

Страница 1153: ... printed Checking the Bit Architecture If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32 bit or 64 bit Windows follow the procedure below 1 Display Control Panel Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Start select Control Panel Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Control Panel Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Appendix 1141 ...

Страница 1154: ...played For 64 bit versions 64 bit Operating System is displayed Viewing the Computer Name Windows Vista 7 8 10 Server 2008 Server 2012 1 Display Control Panel Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Server 2008 R2 Start select Control Panel Windows 8 Server 2012 Right click the lower left corner of the screen select Control Panel Windows 8 1 Server 2012 R2 Right click Start select Control Panel Windows 10 Pro...

Страница 1155: ...ay the System screen Click Performance and Maintenance System 3 Click the Computer Name or Network ID tab 4 Click Change or Properties Checking the LPR RAW Printer Port 1 Open the printer folder Displaying the Printer Folder P 1139 2 Right click your printer icon of the machine and click Printer properties or Properties Appendix 1143 ...

Страница 1156: ...3 Check the port settings Click the Ports tab Make sure that the correct port is selected for the printer Appendix 1144 ...

Страница 1157: ...P is a trademark of CANON Inc referring to an application platform for Canon multifunction and single function printers The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Canon is under license This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST under license from Monotype Imaging Inc UFST is a trademark of Monotype I...

Страница 1158: ...ademark of Linus Torvalds Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners The PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries Copyright 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated All ri...

Страница 1159: ...Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners Appendix 1147 ...

Страница 1160: ...ailable items are written for each item in the Settings Registration table Yes or No indicates if the settings can cannot be set in the Remote UI or are are not available for Device Information Distribution Import All Function The Import All Function item is written in the Settings Registration table Depending on whether a setting item can be batch imported A B C or No is written A B and C refer t...

Страница 1161: ...gy Settings Network External Interface Accessibility NOTE Some items can be set using the Remote UI Use the control panel of the device to set items which cannot be set using the Remote UI The names may be different on the Remote UI Preferences ...

Страница 1162: ...Pre Punched Transparency Tab 4 151 220 g m2 Color 64 81 g m2 Letterhead Custom Size Envelope Yes Yes Yes 1 No B 2 Paper Size Group for Auto Recognition in Drawer Multi Purpose Tray A B Size Inch Size Paper Drawer All Sizes A B Size Inch Size Yes Yes No No B A5R STMTR Paper Selection A5R STMTR Yes Yes No No B Paper Type Management Settings Details Edit Name Category Basis Weight Finish Type Color 2...

Страница 1163: ...eceive Job Log Receive Fax Copy Screen Display Settings Regular Copy Express Copy Yes Yes No No C Display Fax Function 1 On Off No No No No C Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function On Off Store Location Display Settings Mail Box On Off No No No No C Network On Off Memory Media On Off Switch Language Keyboard Language Keyboard Layout Yes Yes No No C Display Switch Language Keyboard Button On Off Yes ...

Страница 1164: ...0 second increments 1 to 2 to 9 minutes in one minute increments Yes Yes Yes Yes C Restrict Auto Reset Time On Off No No Yes Yes C Function After Auto Reset Initial Function Selected Function Yes Yes Yes Yes C Auto Sleep Time 10 secs 1 min 2 mins 10 mins 15 mins 20 mins 30 mins 40 mins 50 mins 1 hr 90 mins 2 hrs 3 hrs 4 hrs Yes Yes Yes Yes C Sleep Mode Energy Use Low High Yes Yes Yes Yes C Compens...

Страница 1165: ...All Function Use IPv6 On Off No Yes Yes No C Stateless Address Settings Use Stateless Address On Off No Yes Yes No C Manual Address Settings Use Manual Address On Off No Yes Yes No A Manual Address IPv6 Address 39 characters maximum No Yes Yes No A Prefix Length 0 to 64 to 128 No Yes Yes No A Default Router Address 39 characters maximum No Yes Yes No A Use DHCPv6 On Off No Yes Yes Yes C PING Comma...

Страница 1166: ... Off No Yes Yes Yes C Use WSD Scan Function On Off No Yes Yes Yes C Use FTP PASV Mode On Off No Yes Yes Yes C IPP Print Settings On Off No Yes Yes Yes C Use TLS On Off No Yes Yes No C Use Authentication On Off No Yes Yes No C Multicast Discovery Settings Response On Off No Yes Yes Yes C Scope Name No Yes Yes No C Use HTTP On Off No Yes Yes Yes C Use WebDAV Server On Off No Yes Yes Yes C TLS Settin...

Страница 1167: ...hentication Encryption Algorithm Auto Manual Settings No Yes Yes No C Authentication Encryption Algorithm Manual Settings Authentication SHA1 On Off SHA2 On Off No Yes Yes No C Encryption 3DES CBC On Off AES CBC On Off No Yes Yes No C DH Group Group 1 768 Group 2 1024 Group 14 2048 ECDH P256 ECDH P384 No Yes Yes No C IPSec Network Settings Validity Time On Off No Yes Yes No C On 1 to 480 to 65535m...

Страница 1168: ...ost On Off No Yes Yes Yes C Reject SNMP Packets While in Sleep Mode On Off No Yes Yes No C Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Format Host Resources MIB to RFC2790 On Off No Yes No No C Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import...

Страница 1169: ... Yes No C Register Up to 16 IPv4 addresses Details Edit Delete No Yes Yes No C Register Single Address Address Range First Address Last Address Specify Prefix Address Prefix Length Port Number Do Not Specify Specify Specify Port Number Add Delete No Yes Yes No C Details Edit Single Address Address Range First Address Last Address Specify Prefix Address Prefix Length Port Number Do Not Specify Spec...

Страница 1170: ...n NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Select Wired Wireless LAN Wired LAN Wireless LAN No Yes No No C Item Setting Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function WPS Push Button Mode WPS PIN Code Mode Other Set Manually Select Access Point Select the access point and s...

Страница 1171: ...Available Import All Function Use Bluetooth On Off No Yes Yes No C Set Device Name PIN Code Device Name Enter the device name PIN Code Auto Custom No Yes Yes No A Connection Timeout 0 None 1 to 20 to 30 sec No Yes Yes No C Display MAC Address Displays the MAC address No Yes Yes No No Connected Device Information Displays the information of the Bluetooth connected device No Yes Yes No No ...

Страница 1172: ...rmation Delivery Available Import All Function USB Settings Use as USB Device On Off No No Yes Yes C Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device On Off No No Yes Yes C Use MEAP Driver for USB Storage Device On Off No No Yes Yes C Use USB Storage Device On Off Yes No Yes No C External Interface ...

Страница 1173: ...be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Key Repetition Settings Standard Slightly Slow Slow Yes Yes No No C Reversed Display Color On Off Yes Yes No No C Enable Screen Magnification On Off Yes Yes No No C Accessibility ...

Страница 1174: ...C Memory RX TX End Tone On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Memory RX TX Error Tone On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Incoming Fax Ring On Off When On is selected Ring Count 1 to 2 to 99 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Other Volume Settings Entry Tone 0 to 2 to 3 Invalid Entry Tone 0 to 3 Restock Supplies Tone 0 to 3 Forgot Original Tone 0 to 3 Error Tone 0 to 2 to 3 Job Done Tone 0 to 2 to 3 Sleep Mode Tone 0 to 3 Login Tone 0 to 2...

Страница 1175: ...Adjust Image Quality Adjust Action Maintenance Adjustment Maintenance ...

Страница 1176: ...Black White Scan for Send Scan and Store Other Than Mail Box Light Dark 9 levels Color Scan for Send Scan and Store Other Than Mail Box Light Dark 9 levels Yes Yes No No C Correct Shading When Visual Correction is set Start Printing Yes Yes No No No When Densitometer Correction is set Fine Adjust Restore Initial Settings Restore Previous Settings Output Test Page Auto Correct Color Mismatch Start ...

Страница 1177: ... No Change Fold Stitch Position 1 2 00 mm to 0 00 mm to 2 00 mm in 0 25 mm increments Yes Yes No No No Adjust Saddle Stitch Fold Position 1 2 00 mm to 0 00 mm to 2 00 mm in 0 25 mm increments Yes Yes No No No Switch Finisher Puncher Mode 1 Speed Priority Precision Priority Yes Yes No No B Adjust Fold Position 1 2 00 mm to 0 00 mm to 2 00 mm in 0 25 mm increments Yes Yes No No No Time Until Staplin...

Страница 1178: ...be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Clean Inside Main Unit Start Yes Yes No No No Clean Feeder Start Yes Yes No No No Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method Displays the Cleaning Method Yes Yes No No No Maintenance ...

Страница 1179: ...Common Copy Printer Send Receive Forward Store Access Files Print Hold Web Access Function Settings ...

Страница 1180: ...thout Stapling Cancel Printing Saddle Stitch 1 Print without Stapling Cancel Printing Eco Staple Free 1 Print without Stapling Cancel Printing Yes Yes No No B Print Settings Print Priority Copy 1 2 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Printer 1 2 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Access Stored File Receive Fax Other 1 2 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Text Photo Priority When Recognized as B W by ACS Text Priority Photo Priority Yes Yes Ye...

Страница 1181: ...ings 1 to 64 1 to 7 to 64 Yes No No No A Latent Area Density 1 to 36 1 to 10 to 36 Yes No No No A Magenta Relative Contrast 7 to 1 to 7 Yes No No No A Sample Print Yes No No No No Print Settings Background Pattern None Arabesque Fans Polka Dots Stars Mesh Clouds Cherry Blossoms Leaves Yes No No No No Print Settings Size Small Medium Large Yes No No No No Print Settings Print Vertically On Off Yes ...

Страница 1182: ...Yes Yes Yes Yes C Optimize PDF for Web On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C 256 bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF Acrobat 9 0 or Equivalent Acrobat 10 0 or Equivalent Yes Yes Yes Yes C Document Scan Lock Operational Settings Use Document Scan Lock Use TL Code Use QR Code Do Not Use Yes No Yes Yes C Document Scan Lock TL Code Settings Scan Job Restriction On Off Yes No Yes Yes C Multiple Embedded Information ...

Страница 1183: ...s No No C Shortcut 3 Each mode Density Yes Yes No No C Shortcut 4 Each mode Original Type Text Photo Yes Yes No No C Shortcut 5 Each mode Unassigned Yes Yes No No C Auto Collate On Off Yes Yes No Yes B Offset at Same Time Available when Auto Collate is set to On On Off Auto Recognize Original Orientation On Off Yes Yes No Yes C Select Color Settings for Copy Use Auto Color Black White On Off Yes N...

Страница 1184: ...s UFR II UFR II PCL PCL PS PS Imaging Imaging PDF PDF XPS XPS Utility Utility Restrict Printer Jobs On Off Yes No Yes Yes C When On is selected Select Jobs to Allow Reserved Jobs Yes No Yes Yes C PDL Selection Plug and Play UFR II PCL6 PS3 UFR II V4 Fax Yes No Yes No C Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specifie...

Страница 1185: ...s Yes No No PS 1 Configuration Page Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Font List Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No RGB Test Page Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No CMYK Test Page Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No RGB Color Chart Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No CMYK Color Chart Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No 1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specified Output R...

Страница 1186: ... Medium 8 to 8 0 Low 8 to 8 0 Black High 8 to 8 0 Medium 8 to 8 0 Low 8 to 8 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Toner Save On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Resolution 1200 dpi 600 dpi Yes Yes Yes Yes B Img Compress Optimization On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes B Sharpness 3 to 3 0 Yes Yes Yes No B Sharpness Photo 2 to 2 1 Yes Yes Yes No C Trapping Trapping On Off Trapping Width Upper 0 to 3 1 pixel Lower 0 to 3 1 pixel Left 0 to ...

Страница 1187: ...rting Number 1 1 to 9999 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Number Size 1 Small 12 point Medium 24 point Large 36 point Yes Yes Yes Yes C Density 1 1 to 5 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Color 1 Yellow Magenta Cyan Black Red Green Blue Yes Yes Yes Yes B Number Position Vertical 1 Number Position Horizontal 1 8 mm to 8 mm 0 mm Yes Yes Yes Yes C Personality 1 Auto PS PCL Imaging PDF XPS Yes Yes Yes No C Mode Priority 1 None P...

Страница 1188: ...lftones Text Resolution Gradation Error Diffusion Yes Yes Yes Yes B Graphics Resolution Gradation Error Diffusion Yes Yes Image Resolution Gradation Error Diffusion Yes Yes Matching Method General Perceptual Colorimetric Vivid Photo Download Profile Yes Yes Yes No C Gray Compensation Text On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes B Graphics On Off Yes Yes Image On Off Yes Yes Paper Save On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C UFR ...

Страница 1189: ...PC8TK PC1004 PIFONT PSMATH PSTEXT ROMAN8 VNINTL VNMATH VNUS WIN30 WINARB WINBALT WINCYR WINGRK WINL1 WINL2 WINL5 Yes Yes Yes Yes C Custom Paper On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Unit of Measure 1 Millimeters inches Yes Yes Yes No C X dimension 1 98 4 mm to 1200 0 mm 457 2 mm Yes Yes Yes No B Y dimension 1 98 0 mm to 320 0 mm 320 0 mm Yes Yes Yes No B Append CR to LF Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes C Enlarge A4 Print...

Страница 1190: ... Yes No No Use Grayscale Profile On Off Yes Yes Yes No No Output Profile Text Normal Photo TR Normal TR Photo Download Profile Graphics Normal Photo TR Normal TR Photo Download Profile Image Normal Photo TR Normal TR Photo Download Profile Yes Yes Yes No No Matching Method Perceptual Saturation Colorimetric Yes Yes Yes Yes C Halftones Text Resolution Gradation Error Diffusion Yes Yes Yes Yes B Gra...

Страница 1191: ... Perceptual Colorimetric Vivid Photo Download Profile Yes Yes Yes Yes C Photo Correct Color Only Photo Optimizer PRO On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Red Eye Correction Red Eye Correction On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Red Eye Correction Level Weak Standard Strong Face Brightener Face Brightener On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Face Brightener Level Weak Standard Strong Halftones Resolution Gradation Error Diffusion Yes Y...

Страница 1192: ...b Ctd Canon Euro Standard None Download Profile Yes Yes Yes No No Use Grayscale Profile On Off Yes Yes Yes No No Output Profile Text Normal Photo TR Normal TR Photo Download Profile Graphics Normal Photo TR Normal TR Photo Download Profile Image Normal Photo TR Normal TR Photo Download Profile Yes Yes Yes No No Matching Method Perceptual Saturation Colorimetric Yes Yes Yes Yes C Halftones Text Res...

Страница 1193: ...ction Level 1 Weak Standard Strong Face Brightener Face Brightener On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Face Brightener Level 1 Weak Standard Strong Halftones Text Gradation Resolution Error Diffusion Yes Yes Yes Yes B Graphics Gradation Resolution Error Diffusion Image Gradation Resolution Error Diffusion Gray Compensation Text On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes B Graphics On Off Image On Off Grayscale Conversion 1 Text ...

Страница 1194: ...ng Description DeviceAdmin NetworkAdmin Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Initialize PCL Hard Disk Yes No Yes Yes No No No Initialize PS Hard Disk Yes No Yes Yes No No No Reset Printer Yes No Yes Yes No No No Utility ...

Страница 1195: ...h TX Image On Off Report with Color TX Image On Off When Off is selected Allow Printing from Options On Off Report with TX Image On Off Report with Color TX Image On Off Communication Management Report Print Send Every Specified No of Transm Print Send Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Number of transmissions 100 to 1000 Print Send at Specified Time Print Send Off Specify Print Time 00 00 to 23 59 Print Send ...

Страница 1196: ...ff Yes Yes Yes No C Allow TLS POP On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Allow TLS SMTP TX On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Display Auth Screen When Sending On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Specify Port Number for SMTP TX POP RX SMTP TX POP RX Yes Yes No Yes C SMTP TX 1 to 25 to 65535 POP RX 1 to 110 to 65535 S MIME Settings Encryption Settings Always Encrypt Only Encrypt If Certificate Do Not Encrypt Add Digital Signatures On Of...

Страница 1197: ... Error Only is selected Report with TX Image On Off When On is selected Report with TX Image On Off Fax Activity Report Print Send Every Specified No of Transm Print Send Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Number of transmissions 40 to 1000 Print Send at Specified Time Print Send Off Specify Print Time 00 00 to 23 59 Print Send Receive Jobs Separately 3 On Off Send Destination Set Line Line 1 to Line 4 Yes No ...

Страница 1198: ... 2 4 Line 3 4 Line 4 4 Priority TX Prohibit TX Yes Yes Yes No C Use IP Fax On Off Yes Yes Yes No C IP Fax Communication Mode Settings Use Intranet On Off Use VoIP Gateway On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Use Remote Fax On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C 1 Details Edit No Delete No 2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional products are available for use 3 Indicates items that are not displayed ...

Страница 1199: ...t Fax I Fax Inbox Set Register Confidential Fax Inboxes Box No 00 to 49 Yes Yes No Yes C Register Box Name Yes Yes No Yes 3 C PIN Yes Yes No Yes C URL Send Settings Yes Yes No Yes 3 C Initialize Yes Yes No Yes C Memory RX Inbox PIN Set PIN Confirm Yes No No No C Use Fax Memory Lock 1 On Off Yes No Yes Yes C Use I Fax Memory Lock On Off Yes No Yes Yes C Memory Lock Start Time Everyday 1 to 5 Specif...

Страница 1200: ...s No No Box Security Settings Display Print When Storing from Printer Driver On Off Yes No Yes Yes C Advanced Box Settings Unified Advanced Box Settings Off By WebDAV By SMB No Yes No Yes C Open to Public Off By WebDAV By SMB Yes Yes Yes Yes C WebDAV Server Settings Authentication Type Basic Off Use TLS On Off No Yes Yes Yes C Allow to Create Personal Space On Off Yes Yes Yes Yes C Delete All Pers...

Страница 1201: ...elete Job After Printing On Off Yes Yes Yes No C 1 Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs On Off Yes Yes Yes No C 1 2 Include Domain as User Recognition Condition On Off Yes Yes Yes No C Display Other User Jobs On Off Yes Yes Yes No C 1 Restrict Deletion of Other User Jobs On Off Yes Yes Yes No C 1 Match Case for User Name On Off Yes Yes Yes No C 1 Display Same Group User Jobs On Off Yes Yes Yes No C 1 O...

Страница 1202: ...be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery Available Import All Function Use Hold Function On Off Yes Yes No No C Time Until Hold Job Auto Delete 0 Off 1 2 3 6 12 hr 1 2 3 7 30 days Yes No No No No Store PS PDF Data to Hold On Off Yes Yes No No C Hold ...

Страница 1203: ...es Yes No No C Clear Cache Yes No Yes Yes No No No Cookie Cookie Handling Accept Block Yes Yes No No C Delete Cookies Yes No Yes Yes No No No Privacy Policy and Regulations Restrict URL Entry On Off Yes Yes No No C Restrict Add Edit Favorites On Off Yes Yes No No No Restrict Storing in Mail Box Printing On Off Yes Yes No No C Restrict File Upload On Off Yes Yes No No C Hide Screen Top Display On O...

Страница 1204: ...Settings Version Version Display Only Yes Yes No No No ...

Страница 1205: ... for LDAP Server Access On Off Yes Yes Yes No C When On is selected CN On Off Change Default LDAP Search Conditions Register Initialize Yes Yes No No C Register Edit LDAP Search Attribute Name E Mail Fax Organization Organization Unit Not Registered 1 Not Registered 2 Register Edit Delete Yes Yes Yes No B Settings for Search by Name When Using LDAP Server Name Type for Search Attribute cn commonna...

Страница 1206: ...User Management Device Management License Other Data Management Security Settings Management Settings ...

Страница 1207: ...r Two Colors Full Color Two Colors Single Color No No Yes No C Require Authentication in Settings Registration For 2 All Items Administrator Items Only No No Yes No C Functions to Restrict Print from Drivers without AMS Printer Driver Add in Restrict Do Not Restrict No No Yes No C Remote Scan Restrict Do Not Restrict No No Yes No C Restrict Job from Remote Device without User Auth On Off No No Yes...

Страница 1208: ...rinter Jobs On Off No No Yes Yes C 1 Indicates items that appear only if you are logged in as a user with privileges other than Administrator privileges when User Authentication is being used 2 Indicates items that appear only if ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is enabled 3 Indicates items that appear only if DepartmentID Authentication is set as the login service ...

Страница 1209: ...s Restrict Receiving Device Information On Off No No No No C Restore Data Settings Regist Value Department ID Address Book Web Access Favorites 2 Printer Settings Paper Information No No No No No Restrict Receiving for Each Function Settings Registration Value On Off No No No No C Department ID On Off No No No No C Address Book On Off No No No No C Web Access Favorites 2 On Off No No No No C Print...

Страница 1210: ...ete Yes Yes Yes No C 6 Display Use Location Key and Certificate Yes Yes Yes No C 6 CA Certificate List Certificate Details Version Serial Number Signature Algorithm Issued To Validity Start Date Validity End Date Issuer Public Key Certificate Thumbprint Issued To Altn Name Verify Certificate Yes Yes Yes No C 6 Delete Yes Yes Yes No C 6 Certificate Revocation List CRL CRL Details Version Signature ...

Страница 1211: ... that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use 3 Imports the key pairs installed to the machine 4 Supports only algorithms that can be imported from the Remote UI 5 Keys and certificates are exported in the PKCS 12 format 6 Imports the following items that are registered in the machine CA certificates Certificate revocation lists CRL S MIME certificates ...

Страница 1212: ... C Remote UI On Off No No No Yes C When On is selected Use TLS On Off No No Yes No C Delete Message Board Contents Yes No No No No No No Remote Operation Settings On Off No No Yes No C When On is selected Password 8 characters maximum Only alphanumeric characters No No Yes No C Use ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM On Off No No Yes No C Register Update Software Install Applications Options Software Managem...

Страница 1213: ...Complete Deletion Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion On Off No No Yes No C Timing of Deletion During Job After Job No No Yes No C Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode Once with 0 Null Data Once with Random Data 3 Times with Random Data DoD Standard No No Yes No C Initialize All Data Settings Once with 0 Null Data Once with Random Data 3 Times with Random Data 9 Times with Random Data DoD Standard No N...

Страница 1214: ...isplay Warning When Default Password Is in Use On Off No No Yes No C Allow Use of Default Password for Remote Access On Off No No Yes No C Minimum Length Settings On 1 to 32 Characters Off No No Yes No C Validity Period Settings On 1 to 180 days Off No No Yes No C Prohibit Use of 3 or More Identical Consecutive Char On Off No No Yes No C Use at Least 1 Uppercase Character On Off No No Yes No C Use...

Страница 1215: ...you may not a scrape build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such content or keep cached copies longer than permitted by the cache header b copy translate modify create a derivative work of sell lease lend convey distribute publicly display or sublicense to any third party c misrepresent the source or ownership and d remove obscure or alter any copyright trademark or other propriet...

Страница 1216: ...f the License See Page Adobe PostScript 3 6 Adobe PDF Scan Library 13 HttpClient2 0 Alpha1 Release 16 Bootstrap 18 Crypto API 19 dump restore 20 expat 21 flipsnap 22 fontconfig 23 freetype2 24 HarfBuzz 2012 07 30 29 iw 30 J2ME 31 jQuery 32 jquery ex table filter 33 jquery json 34 tablesorter 35 jQueryUI 36 JSEncrypt 37 libcurl 40 libdrm 43 libjingle 58 libjpeg 59 libpcap 60 libpng 61 libXrandr 64 ...

Страница 1217: ... 3 OpenSSL 77 pango part of OpenTypeCode 81 pixman 82 MSTLIB 84 servlet jar 86 SQLite 89 wpa_supplicant 90 X Window System 92 xkeyboard config 231 Xrandr 237 ...

Страница 1218: ... of the main unit Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below for more detail and corresponding license conditions Table of Software Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the License See page Linux 238 compat wireless Device Driver for Marvell Yukon fusermount libol lvm2 WLAN USB Driver syslog ng ALSA Library 246 atk cairo clutter clutter gst clutter gtk glib glibc gst...

Страница 1219: ... 5 webkit 266 OSGi Release 4 336 ...

Страница 1220: ...sclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The end user documentation included with the redistribution if any must include the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation ht...

Страница 1221: ...e copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors 4 Neither the name of the Universit...

Страница 1222: ...oftware to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the ...

Страница 1223: ...de may be downloaded via the Internet from http www gingerall org ______________________________________________________________________________________ This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors Portions Copyright c 1982 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistrib...

Страница 1224: ...ting documentation The author or Addison Welsey Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty ______________________________________________________________________________________ Portions developed by the University of California Berkeley _____________________________________________________________...

Страница 1225: ...y of the licensed programs in any form in whole or in part 1981 1990 JMI Consultants Inc All rights reserved ______________________________________________________________________________________ This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors Portions Copyright c 1990 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved This c...

Страница 1226: ...ki Library Portions Copyright c 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu This code accompanies the book Alexandrescu Andrei Modern C Design Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied Copyright c 2001 Addison Wesley Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that co...

Страница 1227: ...udes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Alternately this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself if and wherever such third party acknowledgments normally appear 4 The names Xerces and Apache Software Foundation must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please con...

Страница 1228: ...itial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd Portions created by Ginger Alliance are Copyright C 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd All Rights Reserved Pursuant to sections 3 2 and 3 6 of the License the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are available as Source Code The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from http partners adobe com asn tech xml sablotron index...

Страница 1229: ...ice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation The author or Addison Wesley Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty ______________________________________________________________________________________ Updated Informati...

Страница 1230: ...materials provided with the distribution 3 The end user documentation included with the redistribution if any must include the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Alternately this acknowledgement may appear in the software itself if and wherever such third party acknowledgements normally appear 4 The names The Jak...

Страница 1231: ...AMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software consists of voluntary contr...

Страница 1232: ... furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE A...

Страница 1233: ...o whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT I...

Страница 1234: ...n and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERC...

Страница 1235: ...to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AN...

Страница 1236: ...urnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUT...

Страница 1237: ...f the software without specific written prior permission Keith Packard makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty KEITH PACKARD DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL KEITH PACKARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL IN...

Страница 1238: ...fects thus the FreeType font engine the test programs documentation and makefiles at the very least This license was inspired by the BSD Artistic and IJG Independent JPEG Group licenses which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike As a consequence its main points are that o We don t promise that this software works However we will be interested i...

Страница 1239: ...software are copyright year The FreeType Project www freetype org All rights reserved Please replace year with the value from the FreeType version you actually use Legal Terms 0 Definitions Throughout this license the terms package FreeType Project and FreeType archive refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors David Turner Robert Wilhelm and Werner Lemberg as the FreeType Pro...

Страница 1240: ...OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT 2 Redistribution This license grants a worldwide royalty free perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use execute perform compile display copy create derivative works of distribute and sub...

Страница 1241: ...rs nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial advertising or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission We suggest but do not require that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials FreeType Project FreeType Engine FreeType library or FreeType Distribution As you have not signed this license ...

Страница 1242: ...he library and distribution If you are looking for support start in this list if you haven t found anything to help you in the documentation o freetype devel nongnu org Discusses bugs as well as engine internals design issues specific licenses porting etc Our home page can be found at http www freetype org end of FTL TXT ...

Страница 1243: ...paragraphs appear in all copies of this software IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITE...

Страница 1244: ...permission notice appear in all copies THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT...

Страница 1245: ... of commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 Sept 1995 Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 and 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7202 4 June 1995 all U S Government End Users acquire Software with only those rights set forth herein ...

Страница 1246: ...m the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO ...

Страница 1247: ...ed to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS O...

Страница 1248: ...hed to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ...

Страница 1249: ... to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR ...

Страница 1250: ...oftware is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT S...

Страница 1251: ...05 Tom Wu All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished ...

Страница 1252: ...rge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED...

Страница 1253: ...HER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE The MIT License MIT Copyright c 2011 TJ Holowaychuk tj vision media ca Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of...

Страница 1254: ...he names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE ...

Страница 1255: ...ify and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS IN NO E...

Страница 1256: ...S WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNEC TION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTW...

Страница 1257: ...ES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL VA LINUX SYSTEMS AND OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright c 2007 Dave Airlie airlied linux ie Copyright c 2007 Jako...

Страница 1258: ...s the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all co...

Страница 1259: ...T NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER S BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright C 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 20...

Страница 1260: ...THERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright 1999 2000 Precision Insight Inc Cedar Park Texas Copyright 2000 VA Linux Systems Inc Sunnyvale California All rights reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the ...

Страница 1261: ...ftware THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL VA LINUX SYSTEMS AND OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WIT...

Страница 1262: ...f charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sub license and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright...

Страница 1263: ...NT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright 1998 2003 VIA Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Copyright 2001 2003 S3 Graphics Inc All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby grante...

Страница 1264: ...are is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON ...

Страница 1265: ...ht 2006 Tungsten Graphics Inc Bismarck ND USA All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sub license and or sell copies of the Software and to permit perso...

Страница 1266: ...S OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL WITTAWAT YAMWONG OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright 2007 2008 2010 Nouveau Project Permission is hereby g...

Страница 1267: ...hed to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT ...

Страница 1268: ...he Software Copyright 2008 Nicolai Haehnle Copyright 2008 Jérôme Glisse All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sub license and or sell copies of the So...

Страница 1269: ...MITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AUTHORS AND OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE The above copyright notice and t...

Страница 1270: ... Jesse Barnes jesse barnes intel com Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is fur...

Страница 1271: ... subject to the following conditions THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AUTHORS AND OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERW...

Страница 1272: ... or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUE...

Страница 1273: ... 59 libjpeg this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group ...

Страница 1274: ...is software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXE...

Страница 1275: ...rranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs This library is provided with all faults and the entire risk of satisfactory quality performance accuracy and effort is with the user libpng versions 0 97 January 1998 through 1 0 6 March 20 2000 are Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 Glenn Randers Pehrson Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license a...

Страница 1276: ...ranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc assume no liability for direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library even if advised of the possibility of such damage Permission is hereby granted to use copy modify and distribute this source code or portions hereo...

Страница 1277: ...nc specifically permit without fee and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products If you use this source code in a product acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated ...

Страница 1278: ...TIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright c 2000 Compaq Computer Corporation Inc Copyright c 2002 Hewlett Packard Company Inc Copyright c 2006 Intel Corporation Copyright c 2008 Red Hat Inc Permission to ...

Страница 1279: ...n all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of the copyright holders not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is...

Страница 1280: ... 66 MD4 RSA Data Security Inc MD4 Message Digest Algorithm ...

Страница 1281: ...o endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FO...

Страница 1282: ...endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ...

Страница 1283: ...and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF...

Страница 1284: ...IMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY ...

Страница 1285: ...CUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 4 Sun Microsystems Inc copyright notice BSD Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems...

Страница 1286: ...DIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF...

Страница 1287: ...Y WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Part 6 Cisco BUPTNIC copyright notice BSD Copyright c 2004 Cisco Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are me...

Страница 1288: ...ary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provide...

Страница 1289: ...ials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of Apple Inc Apple nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNE...

Страница 1290: ...r promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIR...

Страница 1291: ...rials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contac...

Страница 1292: ...SE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com T...

Страница 1293: ...ryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWA...

Страница 1294: ... 80 derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence ...

Страница 1295: ...ce and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of this software IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES...

Страница 1296: ...yright 2008 Rodrigo Kumpera Copyright 2008 André Tupinambá Copyright 2008 Mozilla Corporation Copyright 2008 Frederic Plourde Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems Inc Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy mo...

Страница 1297: ... COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE ...

Страница 1298: ...WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL RED HAT INCORPORATED BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSE...

Страница 1299: ...d to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ...

Страница 1300: ...or such API for free use by all developers of Java based software 2 Restrictions Software is confidential copyrighted information of Sun and title to all copies is retained by Sun and or its licensors Licensee shall not modify decompile disassemble decrypt extract or otherwise reverse engineer Software Software may not be leased assigned or sublicensed in whole or in part Software is not designed ...

Страница 1301: ...y all copies of Software 5 Export Regulations Software including technical data is subject to U S export control laws including the U S Export Administration Act and its associated regulations and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries Licensee agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export...

Страница 1302: ... 88 Department s Table of Denial Orders ...

Страница 1303: ...ntation in SQLite those parts of the SQLite library that you actually bundle and ship with a larger application Some scripts used as part of the build process for example the configure scripts generated by autoconf might fall under other open source licenses Nothing from these build scripts ever reaches the final deliverable SQLite library however and so the licenses associated with those scripts ...

Страница 1304: ...stapd README for more details Source code files were moved around in v0 6 x releases and compared to earlier releases the programs are now built by first going to a subdirectory wpa_supplicant or hostapd and creating build configuration config and running make there for Linux BSD cygwin builds License This software may be distributed used and modified under the terms of BSD license Redistribution ...

Страница 1305: ...NTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF...

Страница 1306: ...RACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of The Open Group shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open Group Copyright c 2006 Oracle and or its affiliates All righ...

Страница 1307: ...aining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Keith Packard makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty KEITH PACKARD DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL KEITH PACKARD BE L...

Страница 1308: ...n files the Soft ware to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so provided that the above copyright notice s and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Soft ware and that both the above copyright notice s...

Страница 1309: ...RANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOF...

Страница 1310: ...k Computing Devices or Digital not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Network Computing Devices and Digital make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty NETWORK COMPUTING DEVICES AND DIGITAL DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REG...

Страница 1311: ...ut prior written authorization from The Open Group Copyright 1987 by Digital Equipment Corporation Maynard Massachusetts All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice app...

Страница 1312: ...s in this Software without prior written authorization from The XFree86 Project Inc GI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B Version 2 0 Sept 18 2008 Copyright C 1991 2000 Silicon Graphics Inc All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without...

Страница 1313: ...s and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE...

Страница 1314: ...PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 2009 Red Hat Inc Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom ...

Страница 1315: ...IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright c 1998 2001 by Juliusz Chroboczek Permission is hereby granted free of charge to...

Страница 1316: ...odify merge publish distribute sub license and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRES...

Страница 1317: ...ithout restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED...

Страница 1318: ...SE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the names of the authors or their institutions shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the authors The following is the standard copyright agreed upon by mo...

Страница 1319: ...INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE The following licenses are lega...

Страница 1320: ... hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following condition...

Страница 1321: ... It is provided as is without express or implied warranty Copyright c 1999 2000 Free Software Foundation Inc Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell ...

Страница 1322: ...ibute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee provided that 1 This copyright permission and disclaimer notice is reproduced in all copies of this software and any modification thereof and in supporting documentation 2 Any color handling application which displays TekHVC color cooordinates identifies these as TekHVC color coordinates in any interface that displays these ...

Страница 1323: ...hat both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Oki Technosystems Laboratory and Fuji Xerox not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Oki Technosystems Laboratory and Fuji Xerox make no representations about the suitability of this software for any pu...

Страница 1324: ...PLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL FUJITSU LIMITED BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright c 1995 David E Wexelblat All righ...

Страница 1325: ...l this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name OMRON not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission OMRON m...

Страница 1326: ...copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the names of Digital FUJITSU LIMITED and Sony Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distri...

Страница 1327: ...OFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL OPEN SOFTWARE FOUNDATIONN BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright...

Страница 1328: ...ny purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Silicon Graphics not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific prior written permission Silicon Graphics makes no repres...

Страница 1329: ...AL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL FUJITSU LIMITED AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS...

Страница 1330: ... IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1987 1988 1990 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation Maynard Massachusetts All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and th...

Страница 1331: ...RD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL SunSoft Inc OR Bruno Haible BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFT...

Страница 1332: ...rved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name Wyse not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the softwar...

Страница 1333: ... OPEN SOFTWARE FOUNDATIONN OR SONY CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1992 1993 by FUJITSU LIMITED Copyright 1993 by Fujitsu Open Systems ...

Страница 1334: ...n all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Sony Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Sony Corporation makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without ...

Страница 1335: ...ARE Except as contained in this notice the name of the X Consortium or of the XFree86 Project shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consortium and the XFree86 Project Copyright 1990 1991 by OMRON Corporation NTT Software Corporation and Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation Copyri...

Страница 1336: ...chusetts All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name Digital not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to ...

Страница 1337: ...EGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL FUJI XEROX FUJITSU LIMITED BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SO...

Страница 1338: ...rge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED...

Страница 1339: ...poration make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty OMRON NTT SOFTWARE NTT OPEN SOFTWARE FOUNDATION AND SONY CORPORATION DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON NTT SOFTWARE NTT OPEN SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ...

Страница 1340: ... this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Keith Packard not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permissi...

Страница 1341: ... ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 1992 1993 by TOSHIBA Corp Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above c...

Страница 1342: ...ific written prior permission IBM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS IN NO EVENT SHALL IBM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIO...

Страница 1343: ...rmission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions ...

Страница 1344: ...RRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as cont...

Страница 1345: ...iliates All rights reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to...

Страница 1346: ...SULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1986 1987 1988 1989 1994 1998 The Open Group Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above co...

Страница 1347: ...URPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of Digital Equ...

Страница 1348: ...at both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of NCD not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission NCD makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty NCD DISCLAIMS ALL...

Страница 1349: ...ackard Corporation Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Hewlett Packard not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to...

Страница 1350: ...ackard Company shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the Hewlett Packard Company Copyright Digital Equipment Corporation 1996 Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice and this p...

Страница 1351: ...Inc Copyright c 1994 1995 X Consortium Inc and Hewlett Packard Company Permission to use copy modify and distribute this documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies Digital Equipment Corporation Intergraph Corporation Silicon Graphics Hewlett Packard and the X Consortium make no representat...

Страница 1352: ...imitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WI...

Страница 1353: ...by Mark Leisher Copyright c 1998 2003 by Juliusz Chroboczek Copyright c 1998 Go Watanabe All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 Kazushi Jam Marukawa All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 Takuya SHIOZAKI All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 X TrueType Server Project All rights reserved Copyright c 2003 2004 After X TT Project All rights reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any perso...

Страница 1354: ... IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROUP BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWA...

Страница 1355: ...at the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of SuSE not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission SuSE makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided ...

Страница 1356: ...H THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1990 Network Computing Devices Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the names of Net...

Страница 1357: ...s contributors 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR ...

Страница 1358: ... OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 2004 Keith Packard Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any pu...

Страница 1359: ... OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROUP BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of The XFree86 Project Inc shall not be used in ...

Страница 1360: ...o use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Sof...

Страница 1361: ...ON OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 2001 2003 Keith Packard Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this...

Страница 1362: ...IES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL SuSE BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 2000 Compaq Computer Corporation Copyright 2002 Hewlett P...

Страница 1363: ...istribution of the software without specific written prior permission SuSE makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty SuSE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL SuSE BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONS...

Страница 1364: ...istribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRA...

Страница 1365: ...N ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright C 2001 2006 Bart Massey Jamey Sharp and Josh Triplett All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restr...

Страница 1366: ...ssion notice appear in supporting documentation The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROU...

Страница 1367: ...er dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open Group Copyright c 1997 by Silicon Graphics Computer Systems Inc Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice a...

Страница 1368: ...L IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL NCD BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright c 1994 1995 Hewlett Packard Company Permi...

Страница 1369: ...e Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE W...

Страница 1370: ...ECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT TORT OR NEGLIGENCE ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1991 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation Maynard Massachusetts and Olivetti Research Limited Cambridge England All Rig...

Страница 1371: ...c written prior permission Hewlett Packard makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty This software is not subject to any license of the American Telephone and Telegraph Company or of the Regents of the University of California Copyright 2007 2008 Peter Hutterer Permission is hereby granted free of charge...

Страница 1372: ...es to the Xorg bugzilla https bugs freedesktop org enter_bug cgi product xorg All licensing questions regarding this software should be directed at the Xorg mailing list http lists freedesktop org mailman listinfo xorg Copyright 1990 91 by Thomas Roell Dinkelscherben Germany Copyright 1993 by David Dawes dawes xfree86 org Copyright 2002 by SuSE Linux AG Author Egbert Eich Copyright 1994 2002 by Th...

Страница 1373: ...y of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice incl...

Страница 1374: ...TWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Code common to all operating systems is covered by these notices Copyright c 1992 2003 by The XFree86 Project Inc Copyright 1997 by Metro Link Inc Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without ...

Страница 1375: ...ing or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Thomas Roell and David Dawes make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty THOMAS ROELL AND DAVID DAWES DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY...

Страница 1376: ... THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Code for the GNU Hurd operating system is additionally covered by this notice Copyright 1997 1998 by UCHIYAMA Yasushi Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this pe...

Страница 1377: ...e software without specific written prior permission Orest Zborowski and David Dawes make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty OREST ZBOROWSKI AND DAVID DAWES DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL OREST ZBORO...

Страница 1378: ... USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Based on lnx_kbd c which is Copyright 1992 by Orest Zborowski obz Kodak com Copyright 1993 by David Dawes dawes xfree86 org Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is here...

Страница 1379: ...aining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Thomas Roell David Dawes and David Holland make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty THOMAS ROELL DAVID DAWES AND DAVID HOLLAND DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT...

Страница 1380: ...rved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the f...

Страница 1381: ...RANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE O...

Страница 1382: ...onditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER S OR AUTHOR S BE LIABLE FOR AN...

Страница 1383: ...distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name J Kean Johnston not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific writ...

Страница 1384: ...F MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL TUNGSTEN GRAPHICS AND OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright c 2005 Jesse Barnes jbarnes virtuousgeek org Copyright 2002...

Страница 1385: ...ing a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission no...

Страница 1386: ...S WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 2000 Intel Corporation All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including witho...

Страница 1387: ... PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL ATI VA LINUX SYSTEMS AND OR THEIR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE ...

Страница 1388: ...IT license form published by the Open Source Initiative at http www opensource org licenses mit license php Copyright holders of new code should use this license statement where possible and insert their name to this list Please sort by surname for people and by the full name for other entities e g Juliusz Chroboczek sorts before Intel Corporation sorts before Daniel Stone Copyright 2000 2001 Juli...

Страница 1389: ...IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE The following licenses are legacy usually MIT X11 licenses with the name of the copyright holder s in the license statement but also some BSD like licenses Copyright C 1994 2003 The XFree86 Project Inc All Rights Reserved Copyright C Colin Harrison 2005 200...

Страница 1390: ...tice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of the XFree86 Project Inc not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The Xfree86 Project Inc makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It...

Страница 1391: ... or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open Group Copyright c 1987 1989 1990 1992 1995 X Consortium Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish d...

Страница 1392: ... as is without express or implied warranty SuSE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL SuSE BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT O...

Страница 1393: ...te this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the names of Digital and Quarterdeck not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific writt...

Страница 1394: ...implied warranties including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability fitness for a particular purpose or non infringement are disclaimed In no event shall DIGITAL be liable for any damages whatsoever and in particular DIGITAL shall not be liable for special indirect consequential or incidental damages or damages for lost profits loss of revenue or loss of use whether such dama...

Страница 1395: ...erved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the ...

Страница 1396: ...WLETT PACKARD COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of the Hewlett Packard Company shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Softw...

Страница 1397: ...tware to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation on the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all copies o...

Страница 1398: ...LIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentatio...

Страница 1399: ...RRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL RED HAT INC OR PRECISION INSIGHT AND OR THEIR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright c 1995 X Consortium Copyright 20...

Страница 1400: ...2000 VA Linux Systems Inc Copyright c 2002 2008 2009 Apple Computer Inc Copyright c 2003 2004 Torrey T Lyons All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sub...

Страница 1401: ...pies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL VA LINUX SYSTEM IBM AND OR THEIR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERW...

Страница 1402: ...estriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS W...

Страница 1403: ...OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1998 by Metro Link Incorporated Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any ...

Страница 1404: ... to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL CONECTIVA LINUX...

Страница 1405: ...CT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILI...

Страница 1406: ...urrent Computer Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Concurrent Computer Corporation makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty CONCURRENT COMPUTER CORPORATION DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS S...

Страница 1407: ...fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notices appear in all copies and that both those copyright notices and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Adobe Systems Incorporated not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission No trademark license to use the Adobe trad...

Страница 1408: ...yright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of N C D not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission N C D makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty Copyright c 1987 by the Regen...

Страница 1409: ...TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1998 2004 2006 Keith Packard Copyright 2000 2002 Keith Packard member of The XFree86 Project Inc Copyright c 2002 Apple Computer Inc Copyright c 2003 Torrey T Lyons All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby ...

Страница 1410: ...e authors and or copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty THE AUTHORS AND OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS AND OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SP...

Страница 1411: ...ED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL HAROLD L HUNT II BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE...

Страница 1412: ... modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the names of Thomas Roell and David Wexelblat not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the s...

Страница 1413: ...BLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1998 by Alan Hourihane Wigan England Copyright 2000 2002 by Alan Hourihane Flint Mountain North Wales Permission to use c...

Страница 1414: ... above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL Kaleb S KEITHLEY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABIL...

Страница 1415: ...gbert Eich Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to...

Страница 1416: ...WARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL DAVID WEXELBLAT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1992 by Ores...

Страница 1417: ... in supporting documentation and that the names of Orest Zborowski and David Dawes not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Orest Zborowski and David Dawes make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty OREST ZBOROWSKI AND DAVI...

Страница 1418: ...ight 1993 by David Wexelblat dwex goblin org Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the names of Rich Murphey and David Wexelblat not be u...

Страница 1419: ...ANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL RICH MURPHEY OR DAVID DAWES BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 2003 2004 Anders Carlsson Permission to use co...

Страница 1420: ...dvertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Eric Anholt makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty ERIC ANHOLT DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT ...

Страница 1421: ...or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Philip Blundell makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty PHILIP BLUNDELL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHA...

Страница 1422: ...WARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of the copyright holder s and author s shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the copyright holder s and author s Copyright 1990 91 by Thomas Roell Dinkelscherben Germany Copyright 1993 by David Wexe...

Страница 1423: ... Project Inc 2005 Lars Knoll Zack Rusin Trolltech Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Keith Packard not be used in advertis...

Страница 1424: ... and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM OR ANY SPECIAL INDIREC...

Страница 1425: ...ETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 1998 1999 Precision Insight Inc Cedar Park Texas Copyright c 2001 Andreas Monitzer Copyright c 2001 2004 Greg Parker Copyright c 2001 2004 Torrey T Lyons Copyright c 2002 2003 Apple Computer Inc Copyright c 2004 2005 Alexander Gottwald Copyright ...

Страница 1426: ...fication are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 ...

Страница 1427: ...RRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of the author shall not be used in advertisi...

Страница 1428: ...Technologies LLC Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of the authors not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to dist...

Страница 1429: ...THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER S OR AUTHOR S BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright 1995 by Robin Cutshaw robin XFree86 Org Copyright 2000 by Egbert Eich Copyright 2002 by David Dawes Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell thi...

Страница 1430: ...pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Marc Aurele La France makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty MARC AURELE LA FRANCE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHAL...

Страница 1431: ...HANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE LISTED COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright 2001 2005 by J Kean Johnston jkj sco c...

Страница 1432: ...e Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL JAKUB JELINEK BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR TH...

Страница 1433: ... permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of copyright holders not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS DISCLA...

Страница 1434: ...E ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that this permission notice appear in supporting documentation This permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software...

Страница 1435: ...OF THIS SOFTWARE Copyright c 1989 1990 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Michael Rendell of Memorial University of Newfoundland Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted pro...

Страница 1436: ...o deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all copies or substant...

Страница 1437: ...er dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open Group Copyright 1987 by Digital Equipment Corporation Maynard Massachusetts All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright not...

Страница 1438: ...R A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright 1985 1987 1988 1990 1991 1993 1996 1998 The Open Group Permission to use copy modify distribut...

Страница 1439: ... that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Digital not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission DIGITAL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES...

Страница 1440: ...hing performance or use of this material Copyright c 1999 The XFree86 Project Inc All Rights Reserved The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPO...

Страница 1441: ...TWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of The Open Group shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open Group ______________________________________________________________________________ Copyright 1993 1994 NCR Corporation Dayton Ohio...

Страница 1442: ...rge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPL...

Страница 1443: ...s contained in this notice the name of Sebastien Marineau or Holger Veit shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Holger Veit or Sebastien Marineau ______________________________________________________________________________ Copyright 2003 Keith Packard Noah Levitt Permission to use copy modi...

Страница 1444: ...CIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE ...

Страница 1445: ...without express or implied warranty THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER S DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER S BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER ...

Страница 1446: ...ify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFT...

Страница 1447: ...CHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Copyright c 1996 by Silicon Graphics Computer Systems Inc Permission to use copy ...

Страница 1448: ...ge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED ...

Страница 1449: ...R IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder Copyright C 1999 2000 by...

Страница 1450: ... 236 This file is distributed without any expressed or implied warranty ...

Страница 1451: ...ising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS...

Страница 1452: ...ware is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can...

Страница 1453: ...er the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this Li...

Страница 1454: ... considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thu...

Страница 1455: ...py from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or dis...

Страница 1456: ... contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 I...

Страница 1457: ...OR CORRECTION 12 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BE...

Страница 1458: ...ractive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright C year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts o...

Страница 1459: ...our program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License ...

Страница 1460: ... are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other auth...

Страница 1461: ...by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries ...

Страница 1462: ... derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source co...

Страница 1463: ...rary the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or col...

Страница 1464: ...her it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As a...

Страница 1465: ...ating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on t...

Страница 1466: ... this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software t...

Страница 1467: ...BRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library and you want it to b...

Страница 1468: ... Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library Frob a library for tweaking knobs written by James Random...

Страница 1469: ...s of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restr...

Страница 1470: ... need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License ...

Страница 1471: ...isclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a...

Страница 1472: ...ies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete c...

Страница 1473: ... be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in t...

Страница 1474: ...se since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing...

Страница 1475: ...r of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other ...

Страница 1476: ...ea of what it does Copyright C year name of author This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the i...

Страница 1477: ...MITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THE...

Страница 1478: ...E Image Scaling Functions 4 tap Copyright c 2005 David A Schleef ds schleef org All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form mu...

Страница 1479: ...notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDI...

Страница 1480: ...out specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQU...

Страница 1481: ...ENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Note The implementations of Inter...

Страница 1482: ... without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the di...

Страница 1483: ...BUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR P...

Страница 1484: ...TRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 1999 2000 Harri Porten porten kde org Copyright C 2003 2007 2008 2012 Apple Inc All Rights Reserved This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License a...

Страница 1485: ...LL UNIVERSITY OF SZEGED OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OU...

Страница 1486: ... source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the softwa...

Страница 1487: ...portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part ...

Страница 1488: ...than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial d...

Страница 1489: ...n not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program a...

Страница 1490: ...ncorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software ...

Страница 1491: ... it does Copyright C year name of author This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of ...

Страница 1492: ...icense instead of this License GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of th...

Страница 1493: ...e free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively...

Страница 1494: ...ollow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed ...

Страница 1495: ...tself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that u...

Страница 1496: ...f the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customaril...

Страница 1497: ...cense If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distr...

Страница 1498: ...arate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the...

Страница 1499: ...urpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reli...

Страница 1500: ...RARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES A...

Страница 1501: ... the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the librar...

Страница 1502: ... the License but not also under the terms of a Secondary License 1 6 Executable Form means any form of the work other than Source Code Form 1 7 Larger Work means a work that combines Covered Software with other material in a separate file or files that is not Covered Software 1 8 License means this document 1 9 Licensable means having the right to grant to the maximum extent possible whether at th...

Страница 1503: ...ontrol with You For purposes of this definition control means a the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or b ownership of more than fifty percent 50 of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity 2 License Grants and Conditions 2 1 Grants Each Contributor hereby grants You a world wide royalty free non excl...

Страница 1504: ...e notice requirements in Section 3 4 2 4 Subsequent Licenses No Contributor makes additional grants as a result of Your choice to distribute the Covered Software under a subsequent version of this License see Section 10 2 or under the terms of a Secondary License if permitted under the terms of Section 3 3 2 5 Representation Each Contributor represents that the Contributor believes its Contributio...

Страница 1505: ...Secondary Licenses and the Covered Software is not Incompatible With Secondary Licenses this License permits You to additionally distribute such Covered Software under the terms of such Secondary License s so that the recipient of the Larger Work may at their option further distribute the Covered Software under the terms of either this License or such Secondary License s 3 4 Notices You may not re...

Страница 1506: ...is is the first time You have received notice of non compliance with this License from such Contributor and You become compliant prior to 30 days after Your receipt of the notice 5 2 If You initiate litigation against any entity by asserting a patent infringement claim excluding declaratory judgment actions counter claims and cross claims alleging that a Contributor Version directly or indirectly ...

Страница 1507: ...reference to its conflict of law provisions Nothing in this Section shall prevent a party s ability to bring cross claims or counter claims 9 Miscellaneous This License represents the complete agreement concerning the subject matter hereof If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable Any law or reg...

Страница 1508: ...such a notice You may add additional accurate notices of copyright ownership Exhibit B Incompatible With Secondary Licenses Notice This Source Code Form is Incompatible With Secondary Licenses as defined by the Mozilla Public License v 2 0 Copyright C 2010 2013 Google Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that ...

Страница 1509: ...inary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE COMPUTER INC AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN N...

Страница 1510: ...ITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2010 The Android Open Source Project Copyright C 2012 Samsung Electronics All rights ...

Страница 1511: ...e copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE COMPUTER INC AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE ...

Страница 1512: ... FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF ...

Страница 1513: ...8 2009 2012 2013 Apple Inc All rights reserved Copyright C 2008 Cameron Zwarich cwzwarich uwaterloo ca Copyright C 2012 Igalia S L Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Re...

Страница 1514: ...ist of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE COMPUTER INC OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIAB...

Страница 1515: ...BILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 1999 Lars Knoll knoll kde org Copyright C 2003 2011 Apple Inc All rights reserved Copyright C 2009 2012 Google Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without ...

Страница 1516: ...aimer Neither the name of Google Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPO...

Страница 1517: ...E GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2006 2007 2008 2009 Apple Inc All rights reserved Copyright C 2008 Nokia Corporation and ...

Страница 1518: ...se in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or...

Страница 1519: ...erials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE COMPUTER INC AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE COMPUTER INC OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUD...

Страница 1520: ...CUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2011 2012 2013 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Redist...

Страница 1521: ... source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIE...

Страница 1522: ... NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY W...

Страница 1523: ...ETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2011 2013 Google Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source cod...

Страница 1524: ...ve copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY UNIVERSITY OF SZEGED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL UNIVERSITY OF SZE...

Страница 1525: ...FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT I...

Страница 1526: ...cation are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS...

Страница 1527: ...LL APPLE INC OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE US...

Страница 1528: ...nd use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation an...

Страница 1529: ...OT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE COMPUTER INC OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY...

Страница 1530: ...THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2010 University of Szeged Copyright C 2010 Zoltan Herczeg Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form m...

Страница 1531: ...he distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS...

Страница 1532: ... THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2009 Alex Milowski alex milowski com All rights reserved Copyright C 2010 Apple Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the followin...

Страница 1533: ...her the name of Apple Computer Inc Apple nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE D...

Страница 1534: ...ABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED...

Страница 1535: ...ING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2003 2006 2009 Apple Inc All rights reserved Copyright C 2006 Rob Buis buis kde org Copyright C 2007 2008 Torch Mobile Inc Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source ...

Страница 1536: ...ollowing disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of Ericsson nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NO...

Страница 1537: ...CULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NE...

Страница 1538: ... 2009 Alex Milowski alex milowski com All rights reserved Copyright C 2010 François Sausset sausset gmail com All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Red...

Страница 1539: ...with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE COMPUTER INC AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE COMPUTER INC OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMI...

Страница 1540: ...ABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2009 2012 Apple Inc All rights reserved Copyright C 2010 Patrick Gansterer paroga paroga com Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Re...

Страница 1541: ...copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE COMPUTER INC AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE COMPUTER INC OR ...

Страница 1542: ...F SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright 2010 the V8 project authors All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source...

Страница 1543: ... of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE COMPUTER INC AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTI...

Страница 1544: ...UT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEO...

Страница 1545: ...R OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright C 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 Apple Inc All rights reserved Copyright C 2008 2009 Torch Mobile Inc All rights reserved http www torchmobile com Copyright C Research In Motion Limited 2009 All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modifi...

Страница 1546: ... com Copyright C 2011 Google Inc All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this li...

Страница 1547: ...In Motion Limited 2011 All rights reserved Copyright C 2012 Google Inc All rights reserved This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but ...

Страница 1548: ...ECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SU...

Страница 1549: ...Y DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POS...

Страница 1550: ...tion with the Program under their own license agreement and ii are not derivative works of the Program Contributor means any person or entity that distributes the Program Licensed Patents mean patent claims licensable by a Contributor which are necessarily infringed by the use or sale of its Contribution alone or when combined with the Program Program means the Contributions distributed in accorda...

Страница 1551: ...distributing the Program d Each Contributor represents that to its knowledge it has sufficient copyright rights in its Contribution if any to grant the copyright license set forth in this Agreement 3 REQUIREMENTS A Contributor may choose to distribute the Program in object code form under its own license agreement provided that a it complies with the terms and conditions of this Agreement and b it...

Страница 1552: ...aim and b allow the Commercial Contributor to control and cooperate with the Commercial Contributor in the defense and any related settlement negotiations The Indemnified Contributor may participate in any such claim at its own expense For example a Contributor might include the Program in a commercial product offering Product X That Contributor is then a Commercial Contributor If that Commercial ...

Страница 1553: ...h failure in a reasonable period of time after becoming aware of such noncompliance If all Recipient s rights under this Agreement terminate Recipient agrees to cease use and distribution of the Program as soon as reasonably practicable However Recipient s obligations under this Agreement and any licenses granted by Recipient relating to the Program shall continue and survive Everyone is permitted...

Страница 1554: ...rk and the intellectual property laws of the United States of America No party to this Agreement will bring a legal action under this Agreement more than one year after the cause of action arose Each party waives its rights to a jury trial in any resulting litigation ...

Страница 1555: ...ts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the fonts or their derivatives DEFINITIONS Font Software refers to the set of files released by the Copyright Holder s under this license and clearly marked as such This may include source files build scripts and documentation Reserved Font Name refers to any names specified as such after the copyright statement s Origina...

Страница 1556: ...Version except to acknowledge the contribution s of the Copyright Holder s and the Author s or with their explicit written permission 5 The Font Software modified or unmodified in part or in whole must be distributed entirely under this license and must not be distributed under any other license The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов